Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other websites.

Internal use only

 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz R equipment
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man‐ R technical features
ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
life, follow the instructions and warning notices trations.
in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
R Digital Owner's Manual
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to: R Printed Owner's Manual
R model R Service Booklet
R order R Equipment-dependent Supplements
R national version Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
R availability times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand
drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the
layout of components and controls differs
accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi‐
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
2135844604Z102
R design

2135844604Z102
2 Contents

Copyright ...................................................... 28 Using the memory function ........................ 104

At a glance .................................................... 6 Stowage areas ............................................ 105
Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Cup holders ................................................. 115
Warning and indicator lamps ........................ 10 Occupant safety ......................................... 30 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 117
Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Restraint system ........................................... 30 Sockets ....................................................... 118
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16 Seat belts ..................................................... 32 Wireless charging of the mobile phone
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18 Airbags ......................................................... 37 and connection with the exterior aerial ...... 120
PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 44 Fitting/removing floor mats ....................... 122
Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 20 Children in the vehicle .................................. 45
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 20 Pets in the vehicle ........................................ 63
Light and sight ......................................... 123
Exterior lighting .......................................... 123
General notes ............................................. 21 Opening and closing .................................. 64 Interior lighting ........................................... 130
Protection of the environment ...................... 21 Key ............................................................... 64 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 21 Doors ............................................................ 68 halogen headlamps) .................................... 131
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 22 Boot .............................................................. 73 Windscreen wipers and windscreen
Owner's Manual ........................................... 23 Roller sunblinds ............................................ 78 washer system ............................................ 134
Operating safety ........................................... 23 Side windows ............................................... 79 Mirrors ........................................................ 137
Declaration of Conformity ............................. 24 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 83 Operating the sun visors ............................. 139
Diagnostics connection ................................ 26 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 87 Infrared reflective windscreen .................... 140
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 26
Vehicle registration ....................................... 27 Seats and stowing ..................................... 90 Climate control ......................................... 141
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27 Correct driver's seat position ....................... 90 Overview of climate control systems ........... 141
Implied warranty ........................................... 27 Seats ............................................................ 91 Operating the climate control system ......... 142
QR code for rescue card ............................... 27 Steering wheel ............................................ 101
Vehicle data storage ..................................... 27
 Contents 3

Operation ................................................... 257 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 387

Driving and parking ................................. 153 Using LINGUATRONIC effectively ............... 259 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 392
Driving ........................................................ 153 Essential commands .................................. 259 Electrical fuses ........................................... 398
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 160
Manual transmission ................................... 161
Automatic transmission .............................. 162 Multimedia system .................................. 268 Wheels and tyres ..................................... 401
Refuelling .................................................... 166 Overview and operation .............................. 268 Noise or unusual handling characteristics .. 401
Parking ....................................................... 172 System settings .......................................... 276 Regular checking of wheels and tyres ......... 401
Driving and driving safety systems ............. 179 Navigation .................................................. 284 Notes on snow chains ................................. 401
Trailer hitch ................................................. 237 Telephone ................................................... 307 Tyre pressure .............................................. 402
Bicycle rack ................................................. 241 Online and Internet functions ..................... 329 Wheel change ............................................. 409
Media ......................................................... 337 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 419
Radio .......................................................... 349
Instrument Display and on-board
TV ............................................................... 352
computer .................................................. 244 Sound ......................................................... 360 Technical data .......................................... 421
Instrument display overview ....................... 244 Notes on technical data .............................. 421
Overview of the buttons on the steering On-board electronics .................................. 421
wheel .......................................................... 245 Maintenance and care ............................. 363 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
Operating the on-board computer .............. 246 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 363 engine number ........................................... 423
Displays in the multifunction display ........... 247 Engine compartment .................................. 364 Operating fluids .......................................... 425
Adjusting the instrument lighting ................ 248 Cleaning and care ....................................... 371 Vehicle data ................................................ 433
Menus and submenus ................................. 248 Trailer hitch ................................................ 435
Head-up Display ......................................... 255
Breakdown assistance ............................ 379
Emergency .................................................. 379
LINGUATRONIC ......................................... 257 Flat tyre ...................................................... 381
Operating safety ......................................... 257
4 Contents

Display messages and warning/indi‐

cator lamps .............................................. 437
Display messages ....................................... 437
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 493

Index .......................................................... 510

6 At a glance – Cockpit

Left-hand drive vehicle

 At a glance – Cockpit 7

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle → 165 G DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 161

2 Combination switch → 125 H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp → , 41
3 DIRECT SELECT lever → 162 I Control panel for multimedia system → 245
4 Display (multimedia system) → 269 J To adjust the steering wheel → 102
5 Start/Stop button → 154 K Control panel for on-board computer → 245
6 Control panel for multimedia system → 269 L Cruise control lever → 191
7 Climate control systems → 142 M To unlock the bonnet → 365
8 Glove box → 106 N Electric parking brake → 176
9 Hazard warning lights → 126 O Light switch → 123
A Stowage compartment → 106 P Control panel for:
B Controls for the multimedia system → 269 Steering Pilot → 203
C Rear window roller sunblind → 78 Active Lane Keeping Assist → 236
D ECO start/stop function → 159 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC → 210
E Parking Pilot → 219 Head-up display → 256
F Setting the vehicle level → 207
8 At a glance – Cockpit

Right-hand drive vehicle

 At a glance – Cockpit 9

1 Display (multimedia system) → 269 C Cruise control lever → 191

2 Steering wheel gearshift paddle → 165 D Hazard warning lights → 126
3 Combination switch → 125 E DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 161
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 162 F To set the vehicle level → 207
5 Control panel for: G Parking Pilot → 219
Steering Pilot → 203 H ECO start/stop function → 159
Active Lane Keeping Assist → 236 I Rear window roller sunblind → 78
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC → 210 J Controls for the multimedia system → 269
Head-up display → 256 K Stowage compartment → 106
6 Light switch → 123 L Control panel for multimedia system → 269
7 Electric parking brake → 176 M Glove box → 106
8 To unlock the bonnet → 365 N Climate control systems → 142
9 Control panel for multimedia system → 245 N PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp → , 41
A To adjust the steering wheel → 102 P Start/Stop button → 154
B Control panel for on-board computer → 245
10 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument display (standard)

 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 11

1 Speedometer → 244 G J Brakes (yellow)

2 ÷ ESP® H ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
3 #! Turn signal light → 125 I 6 Restraint system → 31
4 Ð Steering assistance malfunction J ü Seat belt is not fastened
5 Multifunction display → 247 K j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel‐
ling
6 ! ABS malfunction
L T Standing lights → 123
7 ; Engine diagnosis
→ M Fuel level display
8 Rev counter 244
8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
9 % Diesel engine: preglow indicator
A ! Electric parking brake applied (red) N K Main beam → 125
B J Brakes (red) O L Dipped beam → 123
C # Electrical fault P R Rear fog light → 124
D · Distance warning Q h Tyre pressure monitoring system
E ? Coolant too hot/cold R å ESP® OFF
F Coolant temperature display → 244
12 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 13

1 Speedometer → 244 D J Brakes (red)

2 ü Seat belt is not fastened E Fuel level display
3 #! Turn signal light → 125 F 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
→ indicator
4 Multifunction display 247
G R Rear fog light → 124
5 Rev counter → 244
H 6 Restraint system → 31
6 å ESP® OFF
I % Diesel engine: preglow
÷ ESP®
J ; Engine diagnosis
7 K Main beam → 125
K J Brakes (yellow)
L Dipped beam → 123
L ! Electric parking brake applied (red)
T Standing lights → 123
M h Tyre pressure monitoring system
8 ? Coolant too hot/cold
N ! ABS malfunction
9 Coolant temperature display → 244
O ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
A · Distance warning
P j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel‐
B Ð Steering assistance malfunction ling
C # Electrical fault
14 At a glance – Overhead control panel
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 15

1 Sun visors → 139 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 130
2 Breakdown assistance call button (Mercedes me → 318 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 130
connect) on/off
3 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 130 9 MB Info call button (Mercedes me connect) → 318
on/off →
A Spectacles compartment 107
4 | Switches the automatic lighting control → 130
B 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun‐ → 83
on/off
roof
5 SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz → 319
Opens/closes the roller sunblinds → 83
emergency call system)
→ C Inside rearview mirror → 138
6 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 130
16 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 17

1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 94 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 79
2 Switches the seat heater on/off → 100 D W Opens/closes the left side window → 79
3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 100 E Opens the door → 68
4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv‐ → 94 F Sets the memory function → 104
er's seat →
G Sets the seat fore-and-aft adjustment 93
5 &% Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 69
H Adjusts the seat cushion length → 93
6 Folds the ball neck of the trailer hitch in or out → 238
I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 95
7 Opens/closes the boot lid → 73
J Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 97
8 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in → 137
K Adjusts the head restraints → 95
electrically
→ L Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 93
9 W Opens/closes the right side window 79
→ M Adjusts the seat height → 93
A W Opens/closes the rear right side window 79
N Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 93
B Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 63
18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 19

What to do in the event of an accident 8 Hazard warning lights → 126

1 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 27 9 Fire extinguisher → 381
2 Safety vests → 379 A Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre → 166
→ pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
3 Button for the SOS emergency call system and 319 the rescue card
breakdown assistance
B Tow-starting and towing away → 393
4 Checking and topping up operating fluids → 425
C TIREFIT kit → 383
5 Tow-starting and towing away → 393
D First-aid kit (soft sided) → 380
6 Flat tyre → 381
E Warning triangle → 380
7 Starting assistance → 389
20 Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . Õ Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual contains the follow‐
ing menu items:
R Search: allows you to search precisely for
keywords.
R Quick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
R Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle 1 Picture
in certain situations. 2 Menu
R Highlights: shows you vehicle highlights 3 Navigation window
using pictures and animations.
# Select a menu item. R Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the Some sections of the Digital Owner's Manual,
bookmarks you have stored yourself. such as warning notes, can be made visible by
In addition, you can also call up the Owner's highlighting and pressing them.
Manual within a main function (e.g. via Informa- % The Owner's Manual can also be found in the
tion on phone). Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all common
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func‐ App Stores.
tion and operation of:
R the vehicle
R the multimedia system
 General notes 21

Protection of the environment # Always have service work carried out at Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
a qualified specialist workshop.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental EU countries only:
damage due to operating conditions and Personal driving style: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
personal driving style vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-
The pollutant emission of your vehicle is when starting the engine. of-Life Vehicles Directive.
directly related to the way you operate your # Do not warm up the engine while the
A network of vehicle take-back points and dis‐
vehicle. vehicle is stationary. mantlers has been established for you to return
You can help to protect the environment by # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
operating your vehicle in an environmentally- distance from the vehicle in front. points free of charge. This makes an important
responsible manner. Please observe the fol‐ # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration contribution to closing the recycling circle and
lowing recommendations on operating condi‐ and braking. conserving resources.
tions and personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each For further information about the recycling and
Operating conditions: gear only up to Ô of its maximum disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor‐ engine speed. back conditions, please visit the national
rect. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight fic.
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no # Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con‐
longer need them). sumption.
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
22 General notes

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts R Door sills specifically approved for your vehicle model for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
R Seats ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by the non-use of recon‐ R Cockpit unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
ditioned components. R Instrument cluster therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned R Centre console
they have been officially approved or independ‐
components and parts with the same quality # Do not install accessories such as audio ently approved by a testing centre.
as new parts. The same entitlement from the systems in these areas. Certain parts are only officially approved for
implied warranty is valid as for new parts. installation or modification if they comply with
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. Parts meet the approval requirements. The use
of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi‐
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ You could jeopardise the operating safety of your cle's general operating permit.
ciency of the restraint systems from vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well This is the case in the following situations:
installing accessories or from repairs or as accessories relevant to safety which have not R A change of the vehicle type from that for
welding been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could which the vehicle's general operating permit
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, was granted.
control units and sensors for the restraint e.g. the brake system. Only use Mercedes-Benz
R If other road users could be endangered.
systems, may be installed in the following GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use
tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have R If the exhaust gas or noise levels are
areas of your vehicle: adversely affected.
been specifically approved for your vehicle
R Doors model. Always specify the vehicle identification number
R Door pillars Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conver‐ (VIN) (→ page 423) when ordering Mercedes-
sion parts and accessory parts that have been Benz GenuineParts.
 General notes 23

Owner's Manual Operating safety # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐

This Owner's Manual describes all models and mable material, in particular.
all standard and optional equipment available for & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ # If there is damage, consult a qualified
your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual functions or system failures specialist workshop immediately.
going to press. Country-specific differences are If you do not have the prescribed service/
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit‐ maintenance work or any required repairs & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
ted with all features described. This is also the carried out, this could result in malfunctions to incorrect modifications on electronic
case for systems and functions relevant to or system failures. component parts
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle # Always have the prescribed service/
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ Modification to electronic components, their
maintenance work as well any required software or wiring could impair their function
trations. repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
The original purchase contract documentation and/or the function of other networked com‐
cialist workshop. ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys‐
tems in your vehicle. to safety could also be affected.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable As a result, these may no longer function
Should you have any questions concerning materials on hot parts of the exhaust
equipment and operation, please consult a properly and/or jeopardise the operating
system safety of the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐
The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are twigs may ignite if they come into contact
important documents and should be kept in the tronic component parts or their soft‐
with hot parts of the exhaust system. ware.
vehicle.
# When driving on unpaved roads or off- # You should have all work on electrical
road, regularly check the vehicle under‐ and electronic components carried out
side. at a qualified specialist workshop.
24 General notes

If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen‐ the underbody panelling. If these materials Wireless vehicle components
eral operating permit is rendered invalid. come into contact with hot parts on the The following information applies to all compo‐
exhaust system, they may catch fire. nents of the vehicle and the information systems
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired and communication devices integrated into the
Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol‐ immediately at a qualified specialist vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio
lowing cases: workshop. waves:
R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a or The components of this vehicle that receive
high kerb or an unpaved road. # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with
R The vehicle is driven too fast over an tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the basic requirements and all other relevant
obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot‐ the vehicle immediately, paying atten‐ conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can
hole. tion to road and traffic conditions, and obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz
contact a qualified specialist workshop. Service Centre.
R A heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis.
Jack
In situations such as this, the body, the Declaration of Conformity
underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres Copy and translation of the original declaration
could be damaged without the damage being Electromagnetic compatibility of conformity:
visible. Components damaged in this way The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle EC declaration of conformity
can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an components has been checked and certified 1.
accident, no longer withstand the strain they according to the currently valid version of Regu‐
are designed to. lation ECE-R 10. The signatory, as a representative
If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam‐ Manufacturer:
mable materials such as leaves, grass or BRANO a.s.
twigs can gather between the underbody and 74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,
 General notes 25

Czech Republic Reference data of the harmonised standards or TIREFIT kit

ID No.: 64-387-5933 specifications
Copy and translation of the original declaration
VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, of conformity:
MBN 10435, AS 2693
declares, as our sole responsibility, that the EC declaration of conformity
product: B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN
In accordance with EC directive 2006/42/EC
10435
2. a) We hereby declare that the product
C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10
Description: Product designation: Daimler electric air pump
The technical documentation of the product is
Jack stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa‐ Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046
Type, number: tive for the compilation of the technical docu‐ MB part no.: A 000 583 8200
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 mentation: Director of the Technical Department complies with the following relevant regulations:
Brano a.s.
B) A 240 580 00 18 2004/108/EC
4.
C) A 639 580 02 18 Applied harmonised standards, in particular:
Hradec nad Moravicí
Manufacture year: 2015 DIN EN 55014-1
City
Fulfils all relevant conditions DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06
5.
Directive No. 2006/42/EC Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
05.05.2015
b) Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau,
Date Germany
Description and purpose of use:
Signed by Authorised representative: IMS dept.
The jack is only intended for raising the specified
vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc‐ Director of Quality Date: June 2015
tions affixed to the jack.
Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L
3.
26 General notes

Diagnostics connection This jeopardises the operating and road Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
safety of the vehicle. nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
The diagnostics connection is only intended for mation being reset, for example. This may lead
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐ # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
fied specialist workshop. so that they cannot get into the driver's the next emissions inspection during the main
footwell. inspection.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ # Always fit the floor mats securely and
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ as prescribed in order to ensure that
nection there is always sufficient room for the Qualified specialist workshop
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics pedals. A qualified specialist workshop has the neces‐
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the # Do not use loose floor mats and do not sary special skills, tools and qualifications to
operation of vehicle systems. place floor mats on top of one another. correctly carry out any necessary work on your
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐ vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant
cle could be affected. to safety.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using
# Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐ devices connected to the diagnostics Always have the following work carried out on
tics connection in the vehicle which is connection your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Using devices at the diagnostics connection R Work relevant to safety
Benz. drains the battery. R Service and maintenance work
# Check the charge level of the battery. R Repair work
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
# If the charge level is low, charge the R Modifications, installations and conversions
objects in the driver's footwell
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable R Work on electronic component parts
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede distance.
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service centre.
 General notes 27

Vehicle registration Correct use of the vehicle # Follow the instructions in this manual
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to If you remove any warning stickers, you or others on proper operation of your vehicle as
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi‐ could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave well as on possible vehicle damage.
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is warning stickers in position.
improved as a result of the inspection. Observe the following information when driving
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi‐ your vehicle: QR code for rescue card
cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra‐ R the safety notes in this manual
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
tion data. on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
R the vehicle technical data of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
registered in your name in the following cases: R traffic rules and regulations code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
R laws and safety standards pertaining to for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
R If your vehicle was not purchased at an tains the most important information about your
authorised specialist dealer. motor vehicles
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
R If your vehicle has not yet been examined at electric lines.
a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Implied warranty Further information can be obtained at http://
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
from culpable violation of these operat‐
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible ing instructions. Vehicle data storage
about any change in address or vehicle owner‐
ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service Damage to the vehicle can arise from culpa‐ Data acquisition
centre, for example. ble violation of these operating instructions. A wide range of electronic components in your
This damage is not covered either by the vehicle contain data memories.
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
28 General notes

These data memories temporarily or perma‐ This data is of an exclusively technical nature After a fault has been rectified, the information
nently store technical information about: and can be used to: is deleted from the fault memory or is continu‐
R the vehicle's operating state R assist in detecting and rectifying faults and ally overwritten.
R events defects When operating the vehicle, situations are con‐
R analyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci‐ ceivable in which this technical data, in connec‐
R faults
dent tion with other information (if necessary, after
In general, the technical information documents consultation with an authorised expert), could be
R optimise vehicle functions
the state of a component part, a module, a sys‐ traced to a person.
tem or the surroundings. The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's Examples include:
These include, for example: movements. R accident reports
R operating conditions of system components, When your vehicle is serviced, technical informa‐ R damage to the vehicle
e.g. fluid levels tion can be read from the event data memory
and fault data memory. R witness statements
R the vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components, e.g. number of Services include, for example: Further additional functions that have been con‐
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lat‐ R repair services tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
eral acceleration, accelerator pedal position certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi‐
R service processes
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
R malfunctions and defects in important sys‐ R warranty events example, vehicle location in case of an emer‐
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes gency.
R vehicle reactions and operating conditions in The vehicle is read out by employees of the
special driving situations, e.g. airbag deploy‐ service network (including the manufacturer)
ment, intervention of stability control sys‐ using special diagnostic devices. You can obtain Copyright
tems more information there, if required.
Information on free and open source software
R ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature licences for your vehicle's software can be found
 General notes 29

on the data storage medium in your vehicle

document wallet and on the Internet together
with updates:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
30 Occupant safety

Restraint system In order for the restraint system to provide pro‐ Reduced restraint system protection
tection, each vehicle occupant must:
Protection by the restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
R Have their seat belt fastened correctly.
The restraint system includes the following: R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
modifications to the restraint system
R Seat belt system their back against the seat backrest. The restraint system can no longer function
R Airbags R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ correctly after alterations have been made.
R Child restraint system sible. The restraint system may then not protect
R Child seat securing system R Always be secured in an additional restraint the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
In the event of an accident, the restraint system if they are under 1.50 m tall. example
can: # Never alter the parts of the restraint
R Reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming
However, no system available today can com‐ system.
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
# Never tamper with the wiring or any
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
R Reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu‐ and airbag generally do not protect against electronic component parts or their
pants are subjected. objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. software.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the modate a person with disabilities, contact a
detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners qualified specialist workshop.
and/or airbags supplement the protection
offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in seat belts which have been approved specifically
every accident. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
 Occupant safety 31

Restraint system functionality may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
for example. sion.
When the ignition is switched on, a system self-
test is performed, during which the 6 # Have the restraint system checked and Factors which can only be seen and measured
restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐
out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle cialist workshop. sive role in airbag deployment, nor do they pro‐
is started. The components of the restraint sys‐ vide an indication of airbag deployment.
tem are then functional. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
dent only parts which are relatively easily deformed
Restraint system malfunction
How the restraint system works is determined by are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp the severity of the impact detected and the type is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
does not light up when the ignition is of accident anticipated: deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
switched on. minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
R Frontal impact such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a R Rear impact ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
journey. R Side impact vehicle deceleration.
R Rollover
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury
due to a malfunction in the restraint sys‐ The activation thresholds for the components of
tem the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
restraint system components may be trig‐ emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
gered unintentionally or might not be trig‐ the components of the restraint system should
gered at all in the event of an accident. This
32 Occupant safety

The components of the restraint system can indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat R In general, the powder released is not haz‐
be activated or deployed independently of is occupied, make sure, both before and during ardous to health but may cause short-term
each other: the journey, that the status of the front breathing difficulties to persons suffering
Component Detected deploy‐ passenger airbag is correct (→ page 41). from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
ment situation Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag immediately or open the window in order to
Seat belt tensioners Frontal impact, rear components prevent breathing difficulties.
impact, side impact, The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has
rollover been deployed.
Seat belts
Driver's airbag, front Frontal impact # Do not touch the airbag parts.
passenger airbag Protection provided by the seat belt
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
Knee airbag Frontal impact starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
as possible.
Side impact airbag Side impact the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
Window airbag Side impact, rollover, vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
frontal impact after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ incorrectly fastened seat belt
ularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
Belt airbag Frontal impact airbag was deployed. not perform its intended protective function.
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side impact If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air‐ In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
Side bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a can also cause injuries, for example, in the
small amount of powder may also be released: event of an accident or when braking or
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ changing direction suddenly.
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ing.
 Occupant safety 33

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
pants have their seat belts fastened vehicle occupant. ning your journey.
correctly and are sitting properly. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
seat belt is also being used by one of the in an almost vertical position and that
R The seat belt must: vehicle's occupants. Always observe the the shoulder section of your seat belt is
- Not be twisted and must fit tightly and instructions for loading the vehicle when routed across the centre of your shoul‐
snugly across your body. securing objects, luggage or loads der.
(→ page 105).
- Be routed across the centre of your
shoulder and as low down across your If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
hips as possible. observe the instructions and safety notes on additional restraint systems are not used
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 45). for persons with a smaller build
not touch your neck nor be routed under Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
your arm or behind your back. Reduced protection seat belt correctly without a suitable addi‐
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter tional restraint system.
coat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible incorrect seat position not perform its intended protective function.
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ The seat belt does not offer the intended In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
der section of the belt. Never route the lap level of protection if you have not moved the can also cause injuries, for example, in the
belt across your abdomen. seat backrest to an almost vertical position. event of an accident or when braking or
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ changing direction suddenly.
R When braking or in the event of an accident,
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. you could slide underneath the seat belt and # Always secure persons under 1.50 m

R Only one person should use each seat belt at sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ tall in a suitable restraint system.
any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ ple.
34 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt extremely dirty seat belts which have been approved specifically
anchorage for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R If the seat belt tensioners, seat belt
Objects next to the front seat that block the anchorages or seat belt retractors have & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt been modified deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension‐
anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐ Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, ers
tion of the seat belt tensioners. although the damage may not be visible, e.g. Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
The seat belt tensioners may not function as due to splinters of glass. been deployed are no longer operational and
intended and the seat belt may no longer Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or are unable to perform their intended protec‐
provide the intended protection. fail, e.g. in an accident. tive function.
# Before starting the journey, make sure # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden‐
that there are no objects around the tally trigger or fail to function as intended. seat belt tensioners immediately
seat belt buckle or between the front replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt
seat and door. shop.
tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat
belt retractors.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
# Make sure that the seat belts are
damaged or modified seat belts vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
undamaged, not worn and clean. after an accident.
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the # Always have the seat belts checked
following situations: immediately after an accident at a
R If the seat belts are damaged, modified, qualified specialist workshop.
extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
 Occupant safety 35

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the approved for use in conjunction with the belt
seat belt airbag.
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it As a result, the child restraint system may
may become trapped in the door or in the not be able to provide the intended level of
seat mechanism. protection.
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom‐
is fully retracted. mends that you only use a child restraint sys‐
tem which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt
Information on the belt airbag in the rear airbag.
seat belt
Information on child restraint systems
The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear (→ page 59).
seat belt is equipped with a belt airbag.
When activated, the belt airbag increases the Fastening and adjusting seat belts
protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage. # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ responding seat.
use of a non-approved child restraint sys‐ not be pulled out any further. # Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
tem and slide the seat belt outlet into the desired
In an accident, the belt airbag may damage a position.
non-approved child restraint system or a # Let go of the belt outlet release and ensure
child restraint system which has not been that the seat belt outlet locks in position.
36 Occupant safety

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt Activating or deactivating seat belt adjust‐
is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt ment via the multimedia system
adjustment may automatically apply a certain Multimedia system:
tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
, Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Belt
while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti‐
vate the seat belt adjustment function using the adjustment
multimedia system. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐

sioner when the front passenger seat is Seat belt warning for the driver and front
unoccupied passenger
The rear seat belt status display informs you
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐ which rear seat belt is not fastened.
belt buckle of the front passenger seat and ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐ You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt
the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the pants must wear their seat belts correctly. status display using the back button on the left-
seat belt tensioner may deploy in the event In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. hand side of the steering wheel (→ page 246).
of an accident. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten
# Only one person should use each seat their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
belt at any one time.
Rear seat belt status display
Releasing the seat belts The rear seat belt status display is only available
# Press the release button in the seat belt for certain countries.
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
 Occupant safety 37

Airbags When activated, an airbag can provide addi‐ * NOTE Important points to remember if
tional protection for the respective vehicle the front passenger seat is unoccupied
Overview of airbags occupant.
In an accident, the components of the
AIRBAG Potential protection for
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
…
on the front passenger side if:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
Driver's airbag, Head and ribcage
front passenger R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
airbag seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
Window airbag Head unoccupied.
Side impact air‐ Ribcage, also pelvis for # Stow objects in a suitable place.
1 Knee airbag bag front seat occupants # Only one person should use each seat
2 Driver's airbag belt at any one time.
3 Front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
4 Window airbag in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
5 Side impact airbag indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat Protection by the airbags
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
The installation location of an airbag is identified the journey, that the status of the front Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
by the AIRBAG symbol. passenger airbag is correct (→ page 41). may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
38 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to When doing so, always observe the informa‐ Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an
incorrect seat position tion on the correct driver's seat position airbag from functioning correctly. Therefore
(→ page 90). always ensure that:
If you deviate from the correct seat position, R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering R There are no people, animals or objects
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully between the vehicle occupants and an air‐
tective function and deployment may even deployed. bag.
cause further injuries.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when R There are no objects between the seat, door
To avoid hazardous situations, always make the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards and door pillar (B-pillar).
sure that all vehicle occupants: or against the door or side window. You may R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
R Have their seat belt fastened correctly, otherwise be in the deployment area of the hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
including pregnant women. airbags.
R There are no accessories, such as cup hold‐
R Are seated properly and keep as far away R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not ers, attached to the vehicle within the
as possible from the airbags. put your feet on the cockpit, for example. deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on doors,
R Observe the following information. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ side windows or side panelling.
ment area of the airbag.
# Always make sure that there are no R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects between the airbag and vehicle
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
occupant. observe the additional notes (→ page 45). such objects in a suitable place.
R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of
the airbag:
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
 Occupant safety 39

Reduced airbag protection # You should only use seat covers that & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
have been approved for the correspond‐ airbag
& WARNING Risk of injury from modifica‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
tions to the airbag cover A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐
tection and cannot provide the intended pro‐
If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tective function in the event of an accident.
such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon‐ tions of the sensors in the door panelling # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
ger function correctly.
Sensors to control the airbags are located in specialist workshop in order to have the
# Never modify an airbag cover and do
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐ deployed airbag replaced.
not affix objects to it. formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
The installation location of an airbag is identified the function of the sensors being impaired.
by the AIRBAG symbol (→ page 37). The airbags might therefore not function Status of the front passenger airbags
properly any more.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to Points to remember when the front
the use of unsuitable seat covers Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to passenger seat is occupied
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐ do. The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is
vent the deployment of the airbags integra‐ able to detect whether the front passenger seat
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
ted into the seats. is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐
doors. tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect # Always have work on the doors or door
vehicle occupants as they are designed to disabled accordingly.
panelling carried out at a qualified spe‐ When installing a child restraint system on the
do. In addition, the operation of the auto‐ cialist workshop.
matic front passenger airbag shutoff could front passenger seat:
be restricted. R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (→ page 52).
40 Occupant safety

R Always observe the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to A person in the front passenger seat must:
manufacturer's installation instructions. objects between the sitting surface and R Have their seat belt fastened correctly.
R Never place objects under or behind the the child restraint system R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
child restraint system, e.g. cushions. their back against the seat backrest.
Objects between the sitting surface and the
R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ child restraint system could affect the func‐ R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
ment. tion of the automatic front passenger airbag sible.
R The entire base of the child restraint system shutoff.
must always rest on the sitting surface of the Otherwise, the front passenger airbag may be
This could result in the front passenger air‐ deactivated by mistake, for example because the
front passenger seat. bag not functioning as intended during an front passenger:
R The backrest of the forward-facing child accident.
R Transfers their weight by supporting them‐
restraint system must, as far as possible, be # Do not place any objects between the
resting on the seat backrest of the front selves on a vehicle armrest.
sitting surface and the child restraint
passenger seat. R Sits in such a way that their weight is raised
system.
R The child restraint system must not touch the from the sitting surface.
# The entire base of the child restraint
roof or be put under strain by the head system must always rest on the sitting
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
surface of the front passenger seat. deactivated front passenger airbag
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
# The backrest of the forward-facing child
ingly. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
the front passenger seat.
an accident and cannot perform its intended
# Always comply with the child restraint protective function.
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
 Occupant safety 41

A person in the front passenger seat could PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The status of the front passenger airbag is then
then, for example, come into contact with displayed:
System self-test
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
sitting too close to the cockpit. 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
If the front passenger seat is occupied, lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
always ensure that: OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled.
bled in accordance with the person in the It will then not be deployed in the event of an
front passenger seat. accident.
R The front passenger seat has been moved If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
as far back as possible. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
R The person is seated correctly. lamp shows the status of the front passenger
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
# Ensure, both before and during the jour‐ lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
ney, that the status of the front If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
passenger airbag is correct. and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
When the ignition is switched on, a system self- light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
test is performed during which the two may not be used. Also in this case, do not install
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator a child restraint system on the front passenger
lamps light up simultaneously. seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
42 Occupant safety

Status display When installing a child restraint system on the & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ incorrect positioning of the forward-
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ cific information (→ page 39). facing child restraint system
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for Depending on the child restraint system and the
the prevailing situation. stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
After installing a rearward-facing child OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do restraint system on the front passenger seat
restraint system on the front passenger not install the rearward-facing child restraint and you position the front passenger seat too
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ system on the front passenger seat. close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐
tinuously. dent, the child could:
Instead, install the rearward-facing child
R Come into contact with the vehicle inte‐
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
After installing a forward-facing child cator lamp is lit, for example.
by using a rearward-facing child restraint
restraint system on the front passenger
system when the front passenger airbag R Be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
is enabled seat: depending on the child restraint system
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. # Always move the front passenger seat
child restraint system on the front passenger Always observe the following information. as far back as possible and fully retract
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ the seat cushion length adjustment.
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag Always make sure that the shoulder belt
can deploy in the event of an accident. strap is correctly routed from the seat
The child could be struck by the airbag. belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐
Always make sure that the front passenger der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG tem. The shoulder belt strap must be
OFF indicator lamp must be lit. routed forwards and downwards from
the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust
 Occupant safety 43

the seat belt outlet and the front should not use the front passenger seat. not perform its intended protective function,
passenger seat accordingly. Instead, they should use a rear seat. e.g. when a person is seated in the front
# Always observe the child restraint sys‐ R A person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager passenger seat.
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐ or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF That person could, for example, come into
tions. indicator lamp either lights up and remains lit contact with the vehicle interior, especially if
depending on the result of the classification the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
When installing a child restraint system on the or, alternatively, goes out.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ - PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF is off: move the always ensure that:
cific information (→ page 39). front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
R The classification of the person in the
If a person is sitting in the front passenger ble or a person with a smaller build
should use a rear seat. front passenger seat is correct and the
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's - If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator bled in accordance with the person in the
stature. Always observe the following informa‐ lamp is lit continuously: a person with a front passenger seat.
tion. smaller build should not use the front
R The person is seated properly with a cor‐
If the front passenger seat is occupied by: passenger seat.
rectly fastened seat belt.
R An adult or a person with a build correspond‐ R The front passenger seat has been moved
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator as far back as possible.
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This lamp is lit
indicates that the front passenger airbag is
enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Further related subjects:
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, R Child restraint system on the front passenger
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator seat (→ page 50).
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will
with a build corresponding to that of an adult not be deployed in the event of an accident. R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys‐
In this case, the front passenger airbag can‐ tem (→ page 52).
44 Occupant safety

PRE-SAFE® system brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ Information on PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipa‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing. tory occupant protection plus)
Information on PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory
occupant protection) * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts,
footwell or behind the seat particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
ures to protect the vehicle occupants. tion may result in damage to the seat and/or prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ the object.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following
ures independently of each other: # Stow objects in a suitable place.
measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. and front passenger seat.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® measures
R Closing the side windows. If an accident does not occur, the pre-emp‐
R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive tive measures that were taken are reversed .
sliding sunroof. measures that were taken are reversed. You
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a
will need to perform certain settings your‐
R Vehicles with memory function: Moving
self. higher flashing frequency.
the front passenger seat to a more favoura‐ R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
ble seat position. is stationary. This brake application is cancel‐
move the seat backrest back slightly.
R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increas‐
The locking mechanism releases. led automatically when the vehicle pulls
ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters away.
of the seat backrest.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS system limitations
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: Provided that the multi‐ R No measures are implemented:
media system is switched on, generates a - If the vehicle is reversing.
 Occupant safety 45

or side inoperative See Owner's Manual is dis‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
- When the vehicle is towing a trailer and played (→ page 438). the key with you and lock the vehicle.
there is a risk of a rear impact. This also applies to mobile phones if the
R The brakes are not applied: "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
Children in the vehicle
function is activated via the Mercedes
- Whilst driving. Notes on the safe transportation of children connect me web app.
or
When entering or exiting a parking space & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
- & WARNING This poses an increased risk
using Parking Pilot. due to children left unattended in the
of death due to heat stroke or exposure
vehicle
to cold in the vehicle
Information on PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐
If persons – particularly children – ‑ experi‐
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
ence prolonged exposure to extremely high
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE- motion, for example by:
or low temperatures, this poses a risk of
SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the R Releasing the parking brake. injury or even fatal injury.
front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body
R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by
rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat of park position j or shifting the manual dren – unattended in the vehicle.
side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on transmission into neutral.
which the impact is anticipated. This increases R Starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of burns when the child
the distance between the door and the vehicle In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ seat is exposed to direct sunlight
occupant. ment. If the child restraint system is exposed to
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or # Never leave children and animals unat‐ direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
is faulty, the display message PRE-SAFE impulse tended in the vehicle.
46 Occupant safety

Children could suffer burns on these parts, R Always install a child restraint system on a # Always comply with the manufacturer's
particularly on metallic parts of the child rear seat if possible. installation instructions for the child
restraint system. R Only use the following securing systems for restraint system and its correct use.
# Always make sure that the child child restraint systems: # Make sure that the entire base of the
restraint system is not exposed to - the seat belt system child restraint system always rests on
direct sunlight. - the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting bracket the sitting surface of the seat.
# Protect it with a blanket, for example. # Never place objects under or behind
- the Top Tether anchorages
# If the child restraint system has been the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐
R The manufacturer's installation instructions ions.
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to for the child restraint system.
cool before securing a child into it. # Always use child restraint systems with
R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and the original cover designed for them.
# Never leave children unattended in the
on the child restraint system.
vehicle. # Always replace damaged covers with
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused genuine covers.
To improve protection for children younger than by incorrect installation of the child
12 years old and under 1.50 m in height, restraint system & WARNING Risk of accident caused by
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the incorrectly installed child restraint sys‐
following notes: If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it tems
R Only secure children using a child restraint
cannot perform its intended protective func‐ If the child restraint system is not correctly
system which is suitable and recommended
tion. installed or secured, it could release in the
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, as well as appro‐
priate to the height, age and weight of the The child cannot be restrained in the event of event of an accident, sudden braking or a
child. Be sure to observe the instructions for an accident, heavy braking or a sudden sudden change in direction.
correct use of the child restraint system. change of direction.
 Occupant safety 47

The child restraint system could be flung # Have the securing systems for the child R Information on the correct use of the seat
around and hit vehicle occupants. This poses restraint systems checked at a qualified belt (→ page 36).
an increased risk of injury or even death! specialist workshop before installing a
# Always install child restraint systems child restraint system again. ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems
correctly, even when not in use. Information on the ISOFIX and i-Size child
% Use Mercedes-Benz care products recom‐
# Always comply with the child restraint seat securing systems
mended by Mercedes-Benz to clean child
system manufacturer's installation restraint systems. Further information can
instructions. be obtained at a qualified specialist work‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if
shop. the child secured weighs more than the
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused permissible weight for the ISOFIX or
The following notes must be observed: i‑Size child restraint system
by the use of damaged child restraint
R When installing a child restraint system on
systems ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child
the front passenger seat, the information on
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ installing a child restraint system on the front restraint systems do not offer sufficient pro‐
tems that have been subjected to a load in passenger seat (→ page 50). tection for children weighing more than
an accident may then not be able to perform 22 kg, who are secured using the seat belt
R Notes on attaching suitable child restraint integrated in the child restraint system.
their intended protective function. systems (→ page 52).
The child cannot be restrained in the event of For example. the child may not be restrained
R Notes on recommended child restraint sys‐ correctly in the event of an accident.
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden tems (→ page 59).
change of direction. # If the child weighs more than 22 kg,
R Instructions and safety notes on the auto‐ only use ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
# Always replace child restraint systems
matic front passenger airbag shutoff systems with which the child is secured
immediately that have been damaged or (→ page 39).
involved in an accident. with the vehicle seat belt.
R Safety notes on the seat belt (→ page 32).
48 Occupant safety

# Also secure the child restraint system Fitting ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing
with the Top Tether belt, if available. systems

When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if
observe the manufacturer's installation instruc‐ the child secured weighs more than the
tions and the instructions for correct use of the permissible weight for the ISOFIX or
child restraint system. i‑Size child restraint system
ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing sys‐ ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child
tems for special restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient pro‐
restraint systems are approved in accordance tection for children weighing more than
with ECE R44, i‑Size child restraint systems are 22 kg, who are secured using the seat belt
approved in accordance with ECE R129. integrated in the child restraint system.
Only child restraint systems that have been For example. the child may not be restrained
approved in accordance with ECE R44 may be correctly in the event of an accident.
attached to ISOFIX mounting brackets. ISOFIX # If the child weighs more than 22 kg,
child restraint systems which have been 1 Symbol for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint only use ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
approved in accordance with ECE R-44 and system systems with which the child is secured
i‑Size child restraint systems which have been 2 Symbol for fitting an i-Size child restraint with the vehicle seat belt.
approved in accordance with ECE-R129, can be # Also secure the child restraint system
attached to i‑Size mounting brackets. system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to

observe the manufacturer's installation instruc‐
 Occupant safety 49

tions and the instructions for correct use of the * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the Securing Top Tether
child restraint system. centre seat
Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX & WARNING Risk of injury if the seat
child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint When fitting a child restraint system, the seat backrests of the rear seats are not
system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or belt for the centre seat could be damaged. locked after fitting Top Tether belts
i‑Size mounting brackets. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
ped. could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
# Remove each cover for ISOFIX mounting direction.
brackets 1 or i‑Size mounting brackets 2.
# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to As a result, child restraint systems cannot
both ISOFIX mounting brackets 1 or i‑Size perform their intended protective function.
mounting brackets 2. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
or event of an accident. This poses an
# Attach the i‑Size child restraint system to increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
both i‑Size mounting brackets 2. # Always lock rear seat backrests after
# After removing the child seat, replace each fitting Top Tether belts.
cover for ISOFIX mounting brackets 1 or # Observe the lock verification indicator.
i‑Size mounting brackets 2.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,
this will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
1 ISOFIX mounting brackets
The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether
2 i-Size mounting brackets
as Top Tether provides an additional connection
50 Occupant safety

between the child restraint system secured with # Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top # Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
ISOFIX and the vehicle. Tether. Always comply with the child restraint 3.
The child restraint system must be equipped system manufacturer's installation instruc‐ # If necessary, move head restraint 1 down‐
with a Top Tether belt. tions when doing so. wards (→ page 97). Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt 5.

Child restraint systems on the front

passenger seat
Notes on child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
Accident statistics show that children secured in
the rear seats are safer than children secured in
the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
# Route Top Tether belt 5 under head strongly advises that you install a child restraint
restraint 1 between the two head restraint system on a rear seat.
bars. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
# Hook Top Tether hook 4 of Top Tether belt restraint system on the front passenger seat,
5 without twisting into Top Tether anchor‐ always observe the information on the automatic
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 age 3. front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 39).
upwards (→ page 97). # Tension Top Tether belt 5. Always comply
# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage with the child restraint system manufactur‐
3. er's installation instructions when doing so.
 Occupant safety 51

By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by: & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused Vehicles without the automatic front
R A child restraint system that is not detected by using a rearward-facing child restraint passenger airbag shutoff
by the automatic front passenger airbag system when the front passenger airbag Vehicles without automatic front passenger air‐
shutoff. is enabled bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the
side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.
R The unintentionally disabled front passenger If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
airbag. child restraint system on the front passenger
R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
system. cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always make sure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a

seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in
front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
visor: goes out, the front passenger airbag is enabled.
Be sure to observe the notes on the safe trans‐ Never install a rearward-facing child restraint
portation of children (→ page 45). system on the front passenger seat:
52 Occupant safety

The following notes must be observed: R The entire base of the child restraint system Always comply with the manufacturer's installa‐
R On forward-facing and rearward-facing child must always rest on the sitting surface of the tion and operating instructions for the child
restraint systems on the front passenger seat front passenger seat. restraint system used, and the notes on fitting
(→ page 52). R The backrest of the forward-facing child suitable child restraint systems (→ page 52).
R On attaching suitable child restraint systems restraint system must, as far as possible, be
(→ page 52). resting on the seat backrest of the front Suitability of the seats for child restraint sys‐
passenger seat. The child restraint system tems
Forward-facing and rearward-facing child must not touch the roof or be put under
restraint systems on the front passenger strain by the head restraints. Notes on attaching suitable child restraint
seat systems
R If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat
When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐ backrest and the head restraint position Only child restraint systems with the following
tem on the front passenger seat, the front accordingly. ECE standards are permitted for use in the vehi‐
passenger airbag must always be disabled. This cle:
is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF R Move the seat cushion inclination to the
highest, most vertical position. R ECE R44
indicator lamp is lit continuously (→ page 41).
R Always make sure that the shoulder belt R ECE-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
When using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, it is essential to observe the fol‐ strap is correctly routed from the seat belt Examples of approval labels on child restraint
lowing: outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt systems:
guide on the child restraint system. The
R Move the front passenger seat as far back as
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
possible. and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical
R If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
position. the front passenger seat accordingly.
R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos‐
R Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under or
sible. behind the child restraint system.
 Occupant safety 53

Semi-universal child restraint systems are indi‐

cated by the text "semi-universal" on the
approval label. They can only be used if the vehi‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint
system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-
secured child restraint systems
Observe the following information:
R When using a baby car seat of the cate‐
gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the
driver's and front passenger seat such that
the seat does not touch the child restraint
system.
R When using a forward-facing child
Label for child restraint systems in accord‐ Label for child restraint systems in accord‐ restraint system of category I: remove the
ance with ECE R-44 ance with ECE R-129 head restraint from the respective seat, if
ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems of the fol‐ possible. In addition, the seat backrest of the
lowing “Universal“ category can be used, in child restraint system must, as far as possi‐
accordance with the tables on suitability of seats ble, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle
for the attachment of child restraint systems, on seat.
seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U. R When you remove the child restraint system,
fit the head restraint immediately and adjust
all the head restraints again correctly.
54 Occupant safety

R For certain child restraint systems in weight R Observe the manufacturer's installation UF Suitable for forward-facing child
categories II or III, there might be restrictions instructions for the child restraint system. restraint systems of the "Universal" cat‐
in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to pos‐ egory in this weight category.
sible contact with the roof. Legend for the table:
R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch X Not suitable for children in this weight L Suitable for semi-universal child
the front seat. If necessary, move the front category. restraint systems according to the table
seat forward slightly. in "Recommended child restraint sys‐
U Suitable for child restraint systems of tems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
R The child restraint system must not touch the the "Universal" category in this weight
roof or be put under strain by the head listed in the child restraint system man‐
category. ufacturer's vehicle model list.
restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord‐
ingly.

Front passenger seat:

Weight categories Front passenger airbag ena‐ Front passenger airbag disabled1
bled
Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L
 Occupant safety 55

Weight categories Front passenger airbag ena‐ Front passenger airbag disabled1
bled
Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF, L U, L
1 The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

Rear seats without a belt airbag

Weight categories Left, right Middle1

Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L U
Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
56 Occupant safety

Rear seats with a belt airbag

Weight categories Left, right

Category 0: up to 10 kg X
Category 0+: up to 13 kg X
Category I: 9 to 18 kg X
Category II: 15 to 25 kg L1
Category III: 22 to 36 kg L1
1 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX or KIDFIX XP.

Vehicles with belt airbags: When securing a R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐ Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX
child in a child restraint system on an outer rear tem with the ISOFIX child seat attachment or child restraint systems
seat, it is essential to observe the following the i-Size child seat attachment. Observe the following information:
instructions: R Secure a forward-facing child restraint sys‐ R When using a baby car seat of cate‐
R Only use a child restraint system approved tem with the ISOFIX child seat attachment or gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child
by Mercedes-Benz. the i-Size child seat attachment and, if pres‐ restraint system of category I on a rear
R Observe the notes in "Overview of recom‐ ent, the Top Tether anchorage. seat: adjust the driver's and front passenger
mended child restraint systems" seat such that the seat does not touch the
(→ page 59). child restraint system.
 Occupant safety 57

R When using a forward-facing child R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch Legend for the table:
restraint system of category I: remove the the front seat. If necessary, move the front X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child
head restraint from the respective seat if seat forward slightly. restraint system in this weight category
possible and position the seat backrest of R The child restraint system must not touch the and/or size category.
the child restraint system as flat as possible roof or be put under strain by the head
against the seat backrest of the vehicle seat. restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord‐ IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child
R When you remove the child restraint system ingly. restraint systems of the"Universal" cat‐
you must install the head restraint again R Observe the manufacturer's installation egory in this weight category.
immediately and adjust all of the head instructions for the child restraint system. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys‐
restraints correctly.
tems according to the table in "Over‐
R For certain child restraint systems in weight view of the recommended child
categories II or III, there might be restrictions restraint systems", or if the vehicle and
in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to pos‐ the seat are listed in the child restraint
sible contact with the roof. system manufacturer's vehicle model
list.

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat

Left, right
Carry cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
Category 0: up to 10 kg and approx. 6 months E ISO/R1 IL
58 Occupant safety

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat

Left, right
Category 0+: up to 13 kg and approx. 15 months E ISO/R1 IL
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL1
Category I: 9 to 18 kg and between approx. 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL1
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
1When using a child restraint system of the size category (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position and move the seat backrest to an
upright position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size R When using a forward-facing child R When you remove the child restraint system
child restraint systems restraint system: remove the head restraint you must install the head restraint again
Observe the following information: from the respective seat, if possible. In addi‐ immediately and adjust all the head
tion, the seat backrest of the child restraint restraints correctly.
R When using a rearward-facing child
system must, as far as possible, lie flat R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
restraint system: adjust the front seat so against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
that it does not touch the child restraint sys‐ the front seat. If necessary, move the front
tem. seat forward slightly.
 Occupant safety 59

R Observe the manufacturer's installation Legend for the table:

instructions for the child restraint system. X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint
system in the "Universal" category.
i‑U Suitable for forward-facing and rear‐
ward-facing i-Size child restraint sys‐
tems in the "Universal" category.

Front passenger seat Left rear seat Centre rear seat Right rear seat
i‑Size child restraint system X i‑U X i‑U

Overview of recommended child restraint - Weight category 0, 0+ or 1: the child R Secure a forward-facing child restraint sys‐
systems restraint system must be installed on the tem with the ISOFIX child seat attachment or
ISOFIX or i-Size child seat attachment. the i-Size child seat attachment and, if pres‐
Vehicles with belt airbags: When securing a ent, the Top Tether anchorage.
child in a child restraint system on an outer rear - Weight category II/III: Only used the
seat, it is essential to observe the following approved child seats KIDFIX or KIDFIX XP. R Observe the notes in "Belt airbag in rear seat
instructions: R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐ belt" (→ page 35).
R Only use a child restraint system approved tem with the ISOFIX child seat attachment or
by Mercedes-Benz. the i-Size child seat attachment.
60 Occupant safety

Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt

Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number

(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) colour
code 9H95
Category 0: Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 970 20 00
up to 10 kg 970 36 00
up to approximately 6 months
Category 0+: Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 970 20 00
up to 13 kg 970 36 00
up to approximately 15 months
Category I: Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301 133 970 16 00
9 to 18 kg 970 37 00
between approximately 9 months and 4 years
Category II/III: Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301 198 970 19 00
15 to 36 kg 970 38 00
between approximately 4 and 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301 304 970 61 00
 Occupant safety 61

Recommended "Universal" and "Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number (col‐
(E1 ...) our code: 9H95)
Category 0+: E Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 04 301 146 B6 6 86 8224
up to 13 kg
up to approximately
15 months
Category I: B1 Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301 133 A 000 970 16 00
9 to 18 kg A 000 970 37 00

% You can obtain further information on the Child safety locks & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
correct child restraint system at any due to children left unattended in the
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. vehicle
for the rear doors
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
62 Occupant safety

R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
of park position j or shifting the manual dren – unattended in the vehicle. function is activated via the Mercedes
transmission into neutral. connect me web app.
R Starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the Child safety locks are available for the rear doors
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ and for the rear side windows.
vehicle
ment. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
# Never leave children and animals unat‐ If children are travelling in the vehicle, they each door separately. The doors can no longer
tended in the vehicle. could: be opened from the inside.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
the key with you and lock the vehicle. persons or road users.
This also applies to mobile phones if the R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" oncoming traffic.
function is activated via the Mercedes R Operate vehicle equipment and become
connect me web app. trapped, for example.
# Always activate the child safety locks
& WARNING This poses an increased risk
installed if children are travelling in the
of death due to heat stroke or exposure vehicle.
to cold in the vehicle
# Never leave children unattended in the
If persons – particularly children – ‑ experi‐ vehicle.
ence prolonged exposure to extremely high
or low temperatures, this poses a risk of
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
injury or even fatal injury. the key with you and lock the vehicle.
This also applies to mobile phones if the
 Occupant safety 63

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
2 (deactivate). Opening/closing the side window in the rear the vehicle in the event of an accident or
# Make sure that the child safety locks are is possible: sudden steering and braking manoeuvres
working properly. R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch and injure vehicle occupants in the process.
on the driver's door. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear side windows R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch tended.
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐ # Always correctly secure animals while
er's door. driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐
rier.
Pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
64 Opening and closing

Key # Never leave children or animals unat‐

Overview of key functions tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
& WARNING ‑ There is a risk of accident the key with you and lock the vehicle.
and injury if you leave children unatten‐ # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
ded in the vehicle children.
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could: * NOTE Damage to the key caused by
R open doors, thereby endangering other magnetic fields
persons or road users. # Keep the key away from strong mag‐ 1 Locks
R get out of the vehicle and be hit by netic fields. 2 Battery check lamp
oncoming traffic. 3 Unlocks
R operate vehicle equipment. 4 Opens/closes the boot lid
Moreover, the children could also set the The key locks and unlocks the following compo‐
vehicle in motion by, for example: nents:
R releasing the parking brake R The doors
R shifting the automatic transmission out of R The boot lid
park position P j or shifting manual R The fuel filler flap
transmission into idle position.
R starting the engine.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx‐
imately 40 seconds after unlocking:
R The vehicle is locked again.
 Opening and closing 65

R Anti-theft protection is reactivated. # To switch between settings: press the

% and & buttons simultaneously for
Do not keep the key together with electronic approximately six seconds until the battery
devices or metal objects. This can affect the check lamp flashes twice.
key's functionality.
If the unlocking function for the driver's door
% If battery check lamp 2 does not light up and fuel filler flap has been selected:
after pressing the % or & button, the
battery is discharged. R Pressing the % button a second time cen‐
trally unlocks the vehicle.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If you touch
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal # To prime: press button 1 for approximately the inner surface of the door handle on the
one second. driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
Multimedia system: filler flap are unlocked.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
tings . Acoustic lock Reducing the energy consumption of the key
or
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
# Press the start/stop button on the cockpit If you do not intend to use the vehicle for an
(the key is inside the vehicle). extended period of time, you can deactivate the
Priming/deactivating the panic alarm following functions on the key.
Changing the unlocking settings R KEYLESS-GO starting function
Requirements:
R Ignition switched off. R KEYLESS-GO
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
66 Opening and closing

# To deactivate: press the & button on the # Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
key twice in rapid succession. the intermediate position. attention immediately.
The battery check lamp of the key flashes
twice briefly and lights up once. % You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
# To activate: press any button on the key.
ring. damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
% When the vehicle is started with the key in # Press release knob 1 again and fully teries
the stowage compartment of the centre con‐ remove emergency key 2.
sole (→ page 155), the key functions are # To insert: press release knob 1.
automatically activated.
# Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
position or fully until it engages.
Inserting/removing the emergency key illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
Replacing the key battery #

& DANGER Serious damage to health

caused by swallowing batteries Dispose of batteries in an
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ environmentally responsible manner.
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Take discharged batteries to a qualified
serious damage to health. specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ Requirements:
# To remove: press release knob 1. dren. You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
 Opening and closing 67

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the # Press release button 2 down fully and
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ remove cover 1.
shop. # Remove battery compartment 3 and take
# Remove the emergency key (→ page 66). out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery.
# Push in battery compartment 3.
# Replace cover 1 so that it engages.

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes:
vehicle. R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R The key is faulty.
68 Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle .

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. # Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
# If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors # Never leave persons unattended in the Unlocking and opening the doors from the
vehicle, particularly children, elderly inside
Notes on the additional door lock
persons or persons in need of help. United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the
The additional door lock is only available for # If there are persons in the vehicle, do additional door lock (→ page 68).
vehicles for the United Kingdom. not activate the additional door lock.
& WARNING Risk of injury to persons
The additional door lock is automatically activa‐
inside the vehicle when the additional ted:
door lock is activated
R After locking the vehicle with the key.
If the additional door lock is activated, the
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
If there are persons in the vehicle, they can cannot be opened from the inside.
no longer leave the vehicle, e.g. in hazardous You can deactivate the additional door lock by
situations. deactivating the interior protection (→ page 89).
 Opening and closing 69

Locking/unlocking the vehicle centrally from R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
the inside LESS-GO.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle via a mobile

phone
Requirements:
R Vehicle with the "Digital Car Key in the
smartphone" function.
R The "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" func‐
tion is activated via the Mercedes me con‐
nect web app: https://www.mercedes.me.
R Suitable mobile phone with NFC aerial (Near
Field Communication) and Secure Element.
R Sufficient charge level of the mobile phone.
# Pull door handle 2. On some mobile phones, the function is also
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is available when the battery is discharged.
unlocked.
# To unlock: press button 1. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
# To lock: press button 2. two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is
deactivated. Pull the door handle to activate the
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. NFC aerial again.
The vehicle is not unlocked: % You can check the suitability of your mobile
R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. phone by entering the phone number at
https://www.mercedes.me.
70 Opening and closing

Information about suitable mobile phones # Touch the door handle on the driver's door in
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz the area where NFC aerial 1 is located with
Service Centre or on the Internet at http:// the part of the mobile phone where the NFC
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. aerial is located.
% The function is only available in combination The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately.
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐ If you lose your mobile phone, deactivate the
tain countries. "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" service in
% Protective cases around the mobile phone Mercedes me connect at https://
can impair the functionality. www.mercedes.me.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry
the emergency key in case of function
restrictions.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐

LESS-GO
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
Requirements: face of the door handle.
R The key must be outside the vehicle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
R The distance between the key and the vehicle 1 or 2.
must not exceed 1 m. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
R The driver's door and the door at which the sor surface 2 for an extended period.
door handle is used must both be closed. % For further information on convenience clos‐
ing (→ page 81).
 Opening and closing 71

If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid
is automatically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes:
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated .
R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R The key is faulty.

# Activate KEYLESS-GO .
# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle .
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching the automatic locking feature

on/off
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
72 Opening and closing

R On a roller dynamometer.

Unlocking/locking the driver's door using

the emergency key element
% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key element.

# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for # Insert the emergency key into opening 1 in
approximately five seconds until an acoustic the cover.
signal sounds. # Pull and hold the door handle.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
approximately five seconds until an acoustic straight as possible away from the vehicle
signal sounds. until it releases.
Danger of being locked out when the function is # Release the door handle.
activated:
R If the vehicle is being tow started/pushed.
 Opening and closing 73

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐ You have the following options to open the boot
der until it engages and is seated firmly. lid:
# Pull the boot lid handle.

Boot # Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐

Opening the boot lid ing feature: with the boot lid stopped in an
intermediate position, pull it upwards and
release as soon as it begins to open.
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
# Press and hold the p button on the key.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
boot lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
opening the boot lid.
# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti- # Never drive with the boot lid open.
clockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to * NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obsta‐
position 1. cles above the vehicle
% Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the emer‐ The boot lid swings upwards when it is
gency key in the opposite direction in each opened.
case. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐
cient clearance above the boot lid.
74 Opening and closing

# Pull boot lid remote operating switch 1. # Always store objects in such a way that R Pull the boot lid handle.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: use they cannot be flung around.
your foot to kick under the bumper # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also
(→ page 76). gage or loads against slipping or tipping possible to stop the closing process by moving
over. your foot in a kicking motion under the rear
Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing: if bumper.
an object restricts the boot lid during the auto‐
matic opening process, the obstacle detection & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped You have the following options to close the boot
stops the boot lid. The obstacle detection func‐ during automatic closing of the boot lid lid:
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your # Pull the boot lid down using the handle
Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐ recess and push it closed.
attentiveness. ing automatic closing of the boot lid. More‐
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing # Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐

Closing the boot lid in the closing area or may enter the closing ing: pull the boot lid handle.
area during the closing process. # Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity ing: press and hold the p button on the
items in the vehicle of the closing area during the closing key (with the key in the vicinity of the vehi‐
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured process. cle).
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, # Use one of the following options to stop
tip over or be flung around and thereby hit the closing process:
vehicle occupants. R Press the p button on the key.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the R Press or pull the remote operating
event of sudden braking or a sudden change switch on the driver's door.
in direction. R Press the closing or locking button
on the boot lid.
 Opening and closing 75

automatically. The automatic reversing function

is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

despite reversing function
The reversing function does not react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
R over the last 8 mm of the closing path.

In these situations in particular, the reversing

function cannot prevent someone being trap‐
ped.
# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐ # Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐ # When closing, make sure that no body
ing: press closing button 1 in the boot lid. ing: press boot lid remote operating switch parts are in the closing area.
# Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐ 1. # If someone is trapped, use one of the
ing and KEYLESS-GO: press locking button # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: use following options:
2 in the boot lid. your foot to kick below the bumper R Press the p button on the key.
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the (→ page 76). R Press the remote operating switch
boot lid closes and the vehicle is locked. on the driver's door.
Automatic reversing function of the boot lid
If an object restricts the boot lid during the auto‐
matic closing process, the boot lid opens again
76 Opening and closing

R Press the closing or locking button performing a kicking movement under the rear R when using a high pressure cleaner
on the boot lid. bumper.
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
R Pull the boot lid handle. that the key located is at least 3 m
closing process alternately.
away from the vehicle in such situa‐
Observe the notes when opening (→ page 73) tions.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function and closing (→ page 74) the boot lid.
% A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is When making the kicking movement, make sure
opening or closing. that you are standing firmly on the ground you
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot Requirements:
exhaust system
R The key is behind the vehicle.
The vehicle exhaust system can become very R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you while performing the kicking movement.
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system. R Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
# Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection R Do not carry out the kicking movement too
range of the sensors. slowly.
R The kicking movement must be towards the
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by vehicle and back.
unintentionally opening the boot lid:
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close R when using an automatic car wash
or stop the closing process of the boot lid by
 Opening and closing 77

The boot lid could thus be opened or closed

unintentionally, in the following situations:
R If persons' arms or legs move in the sensor
detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehi‐
cle, sitting on the edge of the boot, or picking
up objects.
R If objects are guided behind or placed behind
the vehicle, e.g. charging cables, tensioning
straps or luggage.
R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers
1 Sensor detection range or rear bicycle racks.
If several consecutive kicking movements are Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (→ page 65) or do not
not successful, wait ten seconds. carry the key about your person in such situa‐
System limitations tions.
The system may be impaired or may not function # To switch on: slide the switch to position
if: Switching separate boot locking on/off 1.
R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. road If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate # To switch off: slide the switch to position
salt or snow. locking is activated, the boot remains locked. 2.
R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ % If an accident has been detected, the boot
thetic leg. unlocks even if separate locking is switched
on.
78 Opening and closing

Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening # Do not drive with the roller sun blind Extending/retracting the rear window roller
limiter hooked in and one or more side win‐ sunblind
Multimedia system: dows open at the same time.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
extending or retracting the roller sun‐
tings . Boot lid open. limiter blind
Activating the function allows you to avoid Body parts could become entrapped in the
bumping the boot lid on a low garage ceiling, for sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being
example. extended or retracted.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Make sure that no body parts are in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when it is
being extended or retracted.
Roller sunblinds
# If someone becomes trapped, briefly
Extending the rear side window roller sun‐
press the button again.
blinds
The opening or closing process is
briefly stopped. The roller sun blind
* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to then returns to its starting position.
it snapping back
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel * NOTE Damage caused by objects
may be damaged. # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and
# Always move the roller sun blind man‐ hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the # Make sure that the roller sunblind can
window. move freely.
ually.
 Opening and closing 79

Side windows # If someone is trapped, release the but‐

Opening/closing the side windows ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when opening a side window & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
When you open a side window, parts of the when children operate the side windows
body could be drawn in or become trapped Children could become trapped if they oper‐
between the side window and window frame. ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
# When opening, make sure that nobody tended.
is touching the side window. # Activate the override feature for the

# If someone is trapped, release the but‐ rear side windows.

ton immediately or pull it in order to # When leaving the vehicle, always take
close the side window again. the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
# To extend or retract: press button 1. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped vehicle.
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
80 Opening and closing

Automatic reversing function for the side This means that the reversing function can‐
windows not prevent someone from becoming trapped
If an object blocks a side window during the in these situations.
closing process, the side window opens again
# When closing, make sure that no body
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your parts are in the closing area.
attentiveness. # If someone becomes trapped, press the

# When closing, make sure that no body parts W button to open the side window
are in the closing area. again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour‐
despite there being reversing protection ney (convenience opening)
on the side window
The reversing function does not react: & WARNING Risk of entrapment when
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small opening a side window
1 To close fingers When opening a side window, parts of the
2 To open R over the last 4 mm of the closing path body could be drawn in or become trapped
R during resetting between the side window and window frame.
The buttons in the driver's door take prece‐
# When opening, make sure that nobody
dence. R when closing the side window again man‐
ually immediately after automatic revers‐ is touching the side window.
# To start automatic operation: press/pull
ing # Release the button immediately if
the W button beyond the pressure point.
somebody becomes trapped.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
 Opening and closing 81

# Press and hold the % button on the key. Closing side windows from the outside (con‐ R The side windows are closed.
The following functions are performed: venience closing) R The sliding sunroof is closed.
R The vehicle is unlocked. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
R The side windows are opened. inadvertent convenience closing # To close the roller sunblinds: press the

R The sliding sunroof is opened. & button again.

When the convenience closing feature is
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. # To interrupt convenience closing: release
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ the & button.
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on. dow and the sliding sunroof. % Convenience closing can also be operated
# Observe the complete closing proce‐ with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 70).
If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding dure when using convenience closing.
sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are # When closing, make sure that no body
opened first. parts are in the closing area.
# To continue the opening procedure: press
the % button again. # Press and hold the & button on the key.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release The following functions are performed:
the % button. R The vehicle is locked.

Problems with the side windows

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot be closed and # Check to see if any objects are in the window guide.
you cannot see the cause.
82 Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes
with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win‐
dow.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has
closed, and hold the button for an additional second.
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Repeat the previous step.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
 Opening and closing 83

Sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid‐ # Press the switch in any direction during
Opening/closing the sliding sunroof ing sunroof is operated by children the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the Children operating the sliding sunroof could ped.
panoramic sliding sunroof. get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # Never leave children unattended in the
* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and
while opening and closing the sliding vehicle. ice
sunroof # When leaving the vehicle, always take Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
During opening and closing, parts of the the key with you and lock the vehicle. the sliding sunroof.
body could get caught in the sweep of the # Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
sliding sunroof. & WARNING Risk of entrapment while of snow and ice.
# When opening or closing, make sure opening and closing the roller sunblinds
that no body parts are in the sweep. When opening or closing, make sure that no * NOTE Damage caused by protruding
# Release the button immediately if objects
body parts become trapped between the
somebody becomes trapped. roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof. Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
or # When opening or closing, make sure roof may damage the sealing strips.
# Press the button in any direction during that no body parts are in the sweep of # Do not allow anything to protrude from
the automatic opening/closing process. the roller sunblind. the sliding sunroof.
The opening/closing process is stop‐ # Release the switch immediately if
ped. somebody becomes trapped.
or
84 Opening and closing

R The roller sunblind can only be operated & WARNING Risk of entrapment even with
when the panoramic sliding sunroof is the reversing feature active
closed.
The reversing function does not react:
# To start automatic operation: press/pull
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
the 3 button beyond the pressure point.
fingers
# To interrupt automatic operation: press/
R during the last 4 mm of the closing path
pull the 3 button again.
R during resetting
Restrictions:
R when closing the sliding sunroof again
R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be
manually immediately after automatic
opened if a roof rack is fitted. The panoramic reversing
sliding sunroof closes again automatically
when it encounters resistance. This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit‐
Automatic reversing function of the sliding
uations.
sunroof
# When closing, make sure that no body
1 To raise If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun‐
2 To open roof during the closing process, the sliding sun‐ parts are in the closing area.
# Release the switch immediately if
3 To close/lower roof opens again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐ somebody becomes trapped.
Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic stitute for your attentiveness. or
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. # When closing, make sure that no body parts # Press the switch in any direction during
R The panoramic sliding sunroof can only be are in the closing area. the automatic closing process.
opened when the roller sunblind is open. The closing process is stopped.
 Opening and closing 85

Automatic reversing function of the roller or Rain closing function when driving
sunblind Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if
If there is an object obstructing the roller sun‐
# Press the button in any direction during it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is
blind during the closing process, the roller sun‐ the automatic closing process. automatically lowered while the vehicle is in
blind opens again automatically. The automatic The closing process is stopped. motion.
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness. Automatic lowering feature
Automatic features of the sliding sunroof Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if
# When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid‐
make sure that no body parts are in the ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at
sweep. panoramic sliding sunroof.
higher speeds. At low speeds it is raised again
By pushing or pulling the 3 button you can automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
despite the reversing function being function when driving " and "Automatic lowering & WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
active feature". matic lowering of the sliding sunroof
In particular, the reversing function does not Automatic closing when the vehicle is sta‐ At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small tionary automatically lowers slightly at the rear.
fingers. R If it starts to rain (detected by the rain sensor
This could trap you or other persons.
This means that the reversing function can‐ on the windscreen)
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the
not prevent entrapment in these situations. R At extreme outside temperatures
sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
# When opening or closing the roller sun‐ R After six hours vehicle is in motion.
blind, make sure that no body parts are R If there is a malfunction in the power supply
in the sweep.
# Release the button immediately if The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised.
somebody becomes trapped.
86 Opening and closing

# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐ Problems with the sliding sunroof

ately pull back the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
switch. panoramic sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed & WARNING Risk of entrapment by closing the sliding sunroof again
and you cannot see the cause.
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the
process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or
# Press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
 Opening and closing 87

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
# Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐ # Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear.
ing sunroof: the sliding sunroof does # Press the 3 button for another second.
not operate smoothly.
# Use automatic operation to fully raise and then close the sliding sunroof.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding # Pull the 3 button down repeatedly to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the # Pull the 3 button for another second.
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.
# Pull and hold the 3 button down until the roller sunblind is completely closed.
# Pull the 3 button for another second.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Anti-theft protection The immobiliser is automatically activated when ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
Immobiliser Function of the ATA system (anti-theft alarm
the ignition is switched on.
system)
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct key. If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R A door is opened.
88 Opening and closing

R The boot lid is opened. % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call

R The bonnet is opened. system is active and the alarm stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
R Interior protection is triggered. (→ page 89) matically sent to the Customer Assistance
R Tow-away protection is triggered. Centre (→ page 320).
(→ page 88)
Deactivating the ATA (anti-theft alarm sys‐
The ATA system is primed automatically after tem) alarm
approximately 10 seconds: # Press the %, & or p button on the
R After locking the vehicle with the key. key.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. or
# Press the start/stop button (the SmartKey is
inside the vehicle).
Stopping the alarm using KEYLESS-GO
# Grasp the outside door handle (with the key
When the ATA system is primed, indicator lamp outside the vehicle).
1 flashes.
The ATA system is automatically deactivated: Tow-away protection
R After unlocking the vehicle with the key.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your
R After pressing the start/stop button with the vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-
key inside the vehicle. away protection is primed.
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO.
 Opening and closing 89

Tow-away protection is automatically primed Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
after about 60 seconds: R After pressing the % or p button on
Multimedia system:
R After locking the vehicle with the key. , Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Tow- the key
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. away protection R After pressing the start/stop button with the
key inside the vehicle.
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol‐ # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
lowing components are closed: R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO.
R Doors Interior protection R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS.
R Boot lid
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec‐ The following situations can lead to a false
Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva‐ alarm:
ted: ted in the vehicle interior.
R By moveable objects such as mascots in the
R After pressing the % or p button on Interior protection is primed automatically after
approximately 10 seconds: vehicle interior.
the key
R When the side window is open.
R After pressing the start/stop button with the R After locking the vehicle with the key.
key inside the vehicle. R When the sliding sunroof is open.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- R When the panoramic sliding sunroof is open.
Interior protection is only primed when the fol‐
GO. lowing components are closed:
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS. Priming/deactivating interior protection
R Doors
R Boot lid Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Inte-

rior motion sensor

# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
90 Seats and stowing

Correct driver's seat position R your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐ R the back of your head is supported at eye
ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in level by the centre of the head restraint
motion R you can hold the steering wheel with your
You could lose control of the vehicle in the arms slightly bent
following situations: R you can move your legs freely
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head R you can see all the displays in the instrument
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ cluster clearly
ror while the vehicle is in motion R you should have a good overview of traffic
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ conditions
cle is in motion R the seat belt is pulled snugly against the
# Before starting the engine: adjust the body and must be routed across the centre
driver's seat, the head restraints, the of your shoulder and across your hips in the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten Observe the following when adjusting steering pelvic area
your seat belt. wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R you are as far away from the driver's airbag
as possible
R you are sitting in a normal upright position
R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
 Seats and stowing 91

Seats & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped & WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ when adjusting the seats ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
trically (without Seat Comfort Package) When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle motion
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the You could lose control of the vehicle in the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if seat guide rail. following situations:
the seats are adjusted by children # Make sure when adjusting a seat that R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
Children could become trapped if they adjust no one has any body parts in the sweep restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
the seats, particularly when unattended. of the seat. ror while the vehicle is in motion
# When leaving the vehicle, always take R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐ cle is in motion
This also applies to mobile phones if the dren in the vehicle".
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" # Before starting the engine: adjust the
function is activated via the Mercedes & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat, the head restraints, the
connect me web App. driver's seat not being engaged steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
# Never leave children unattended in the If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
vehicle. move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is This could cause you to lose control of the the seat height is adjusted carelessly
switched off. vehicle. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
# Always make sure that the driver's seat or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
is engaged before starting the vehicle. and thereby injured.
92 Seats and stowing

Children in particular could accidentally Do not interchange the head restraints of the routed across the centre of your shoul‐
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot der.
and become trapped. adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
# While moving the seats, make sure that * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
hands or other body parts do not get Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so the seats back
under the lever assembly of the seat that it is as close as possible to the back of your
adjustment system. head. The seats may be damaged by objects when
moving the seats back.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an incor‐ # When moving the seats back, make
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head rect seat position
restraints which are not fitted or are sure that there are no objects in the
adjusted incorrectly The seat belt does not offer the intended footwell or under or behind the seats.
level of protection if you have not moved the
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended. When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
There is an increased risk of injury in the sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam‐
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
accident or when braking. even fatal injury.
# Always drive with the head restraints
# Adjust the seat correctly before starting
fitted. the journey.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
vehicle occupant that the centre of the in an almost vertical position and that
head restraint supports the back of the the shoulder section of your seat belt is
head at about eye level.
 Seats and stowing 93

Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
trically (with Seat Comfort Package) lift lever 4 and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5 and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.

1 Seat backrest inclination

2 Seat height
3 Seat fore-and-aft position 1 Seat backrest inclination
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: 2 Seat height
lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the 3 Seat cushion inclination
desired position. 4 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. 5 Seat cushion length
94 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the seats electrically # Save the settings with the memory function
(→ page 104).

Adjusting the front passenger seat from the

driver's seat
Requirement:
R Power supply switched on

This function is only available on vehicles with an

electrically adjustable front passenger seat.

You can call up the following functions for the

front passenger seat:
1 Head restraint height R Seat adjustment
2 Seat backrest inclination
R Seat heater
3 Seat height
R Seat ventilation
4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat cushion inclination R Memory function
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
 Seats and stowing 95

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the indica‐ Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints
tor lamp in the button lights up.
Adjusting the front seat head restraints man‐
The front passenger seat is selected.
ually
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons in the door control panel on the driv‐ & WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
er's side. ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
1 To raise steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
2 To soften your seat belt.
3 To lower
4 To harden
# Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
96 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head # To move backwards: press release knob 2
restraints which are not fitted or are and push the head restraint backwards.
adjusted incorrectly Adjusting the front seat luxury head
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ restraints
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
fitted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level. # To raise: pull the head restraint up.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
adjust the height and angle of the head down.
restraints correctly. Adjusting the gap between the head # To adjust the side bolsters of the head
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so restraint and the back of your head: restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side
that it is as close as possible to the back of your # To move forwards: pull the head restraint bolster 2.
head. forwards.
 Seats and stowing 97

Adjusting the gap between the head # To raise: pull the head restraint up. Configuring seat settings
restraint and the back of your head: To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
# Multimedia system:
# To move forwards: pull the head restraint tion of the arrow and push the head restraint , Vehicle . a Seats
forwards. down.
# Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area.
# To move backwards: press release knob 1 The head restraints can only be removed on
and push the head restraint backwards. vehicles with folding rear seat backrests. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints # Select Side bolsters.
slightly forwards.
# Select the setting.
# To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
stop. Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the region of the seat backrest
arrow and pull out the head restraint. # Select Lumbar.

# To fit: insert the head restraint so that the # Adjust the air cushion.
notches on the bar are on the left when # Save the settings with the memory function
viewed in the direction of travel. (→ page 104).
# Push the head restraint down until it
engages. Adjusting the dynamic multicontour seat
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages. Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . a Seats

The dynamic lateral cornering support can be

adjusted using this function.
# Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area.
98 Seats and stowing

# Select Dynamic seat. # Select setting: Off, Level 1 or Level 2.

Overview of massage and workout programs

The following massage programs can be selected:

Massage program for the front seats Function

Hot Relaxing Massage for back Relaxing massage program starting in the pelvic area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full back massage,
stretching the pelvic area. Ending with gentle stroking motions.
Hot Relaxing Massage for shoulders Relaxing massage program starting in the shoulder area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full twin-wave
back massage, stretching the shoulder area. Ending with gentle stroking motions.
Activating Massage Activating back massage with increasing twin-waves and then soothing movements.
Classic Massage Massage with increasing twin-waves and soothing movements.
Wave Massage Relaxing and activating massage program, starting on your back and continuing in the cushion. Subse‐
quent stroking motions across the entire spinal column.
Mobilising Massage Mobilisation of the spinal column and upper body using pressure points in the lumbar and back. You can
increase the mobilisation effect by relaxing into the pressure points. This process helps to improve your
posture.
 Seats and stowing 99

Active Workout programs ing your abdomen and back muscles during a ing also helps to improve blood flow in your mus‐
The Active Workout programs require your active traffic jam, for example, by tensing and releasing cles. Press against a pressure point as soon as
cooperation and are a convenient way of exercis‐ the specific muscle groups. Tensing and releas‐ you feel it.

The following Active Workout programs can be selected:

Workout program Function

Active Workout backrest To stimulate the muscles in your abdomen and back: press against the pressure points in the backrest.
Keep the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath.
When the pressure in the seat backrest recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.
Active Workout cushion To stimulate the muscles in your lower back: press against the pressure points in the seat cushion. Keep
the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath.
When the pressure in the seat cushion recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.

Selecting the massage programme for the # Select a massage programme. Resetting seat and massage settings
front seats The massage programme runs for approx‐
imately 9 to 15 minutes, depending on the Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: setting. , Vehicle . a Seats . Reset
, Vehicle . a Seats
# To set the massage intensity: switch High # Select Yes or No.
# Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area. intensity on O or off ª. Depending on whether the settings for the driver
# Select Massage.
or front passenger seat are selected, only the
selected seat can be reset.
100 Seats and stowing

Switching the seat heater on/off % The seat heater automatically switches down
from the three heating levels after certain
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ periods of time: 8, 10 and 20 minutes until
edly switching on the seat heater the seat heater is switched off.
Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest Setting the panel heating
padding to become very hot.
Multimedia system:
The health of persons with limited tempera‐ , Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
excessively high temperatures may be affec‐ tings . Panel heating
ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. When the seat heater is switched on, the armr‐
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
ests in the vehicle as well as the centre console
heater. can be heated using this function.
Setting options
# Select Front and rear, Front only, Rear only
# To switch on/increase the level: press but‐ or Off.
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three Switching the seat ventilation on/off
indicator lamps light up. Requirement:
# To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ R power supply switched on
ton 1 repeatedly until all the indicator
lamps go out.
 Seats and stowing 101

Steering wheel # Never leave children unattended in the

Adjusting the steering wheel manually vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐ the key with you and lock the vehicle.
ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in This also applies to mobile phones if the
motion "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
function is activated via the Mercedes
You could lose control of the vehicle in the connect me web app.
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
# To switch on/increase the level/ driver's seat, the head restraints, the
decrease the level: press button 1 repeat‐ steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
edly until the desired ventilation level is set. your seat belt.
Depending on the ventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps light up.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐
# To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly dren when adjusting the steering wheel
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.
102 Seats and stowing

# To unlock the steering column: push Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
release lever 1 down completely.
# Adjust height 2 and distance to steering
wheel 3.
# To lock the steering column: push release
lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# Check and make sure that the steering col‐
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
ignition is switched off.

1 Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel

2 Adjusts the height
1 To switch on
# Save the settings with the memory function. 2 To switch off
3 Indicator lamp
 Seats and stowing 103

Easy entry and exit feature that no one has any body parts in the The steering wheel moves back to the last drive
sweep of the steering wheel. position in the following cases:
How the easy entry and exit feature operates
# Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐ R you switch the ignition on when the driver's
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming door is closed
away during the adjustment process of trapped by the steering wheel. R you close the driver's door when the ignition
the easy exit feature The adjustment process is stopped. is switched on
‑ If you pull away while the easy entry and # Never leave children unattended in the The last drive position of the steering wheel is
exit feature is making adjustments, you could vehicle. stored:
lose control of the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take R when you switch off the ignition
# Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ the key with you and lock the vehicle.
R using the last setting stored using the mem‐
ess is complete before pulling away. This also applies to mobile phones if the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" ory function
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped function is activated via the Mercedes If you press one of the memory function position
while adjusting the easy entry and exit connect me web App. buttons, the adjustment process is stopped.
feature The crash-responsive exit aid only functions
The easy entry and exit feature makes getting in
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts when the easy entry and exit feature is active.
and out of your vehicle easier.
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the Setting the easy entry and exit feature
occupants – particularly children – could steering wheel will move upwards in the follow‐ Multimedia system:
become trapped. ing situations: , Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
# During the adjustment process of the
R you switch the ignition off tings . Easy Entry/Exit
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
R you open the driver's door when the ignition # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
is switched on
104 Seats and stowing

Using the memory function # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐ The following systems can be set using the
ately release the memory function posi‐ memory function:
& WARNING Risk of an accident if memory tion button. R Seat, backrest and head restraint
function is used while driving The adjustment process is stopped. R Steering wheel
If you use the memory function on the driv‐ R Outside mirrors
er's side while driving, you could lose control & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
R Head-up Display
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments memory function is activated by children
being made. Children could become trapped if they acti‐
# Only use the memory function on the vate the memory function, particularly when
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ unattended.
ary. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
ting the seat with the memory function the key with you and lock the vehicle.
If you use the memory function to set the This also applies to mobile phones if the
seat or the steering wheel, you and other "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
vehicle occupants, especially children, could function is activated via the Mercedes
be entrapped. – – connect me web app.
# During the setting procedure of the
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
memory function, ensure that no body
tion is switched off.
parts are in the sweep of the seat or
Seat comfort positions for up to three people
the steering wheel.
can be stored and called up using the memory
function.
 Seats and stowing 105

# To save: set the seat, the steering wheel, the # Never drive with the boot lid open. addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces
Head-up Display and the outside mirror to and mobile phone brackets cannot always
the desired position. retain all objects they contain.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
# Press the memory button M together with items in the vehicle There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3. event of sudden braking or a sudden change
An acknowledgement tone sounds. The set‐ If objects, luggage or loads are not secured in direction.
tings are stored. or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
# Always stow objects so that they can‐
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
# To call up: press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 not be thrown around in such situa‐
vehicle occupants.
until all the seat comfort systems are in the tions.
stored position. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
# Always make sure that objects do not
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction. protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
Stowage areas # Always stow objects in such a way that
nets or stowage nets.
Notes on loading the vehicle # Close the lockable stowage spaces
they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
before starting a journey.
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning gage or loads against slipping or tipping # Always stow and secure heavy, hard,

over. pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
objects in the boot.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectly
boot lid is open when the engine is running, stowed objects & WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
especially if the vehicle is in motion. and tailpipe trim
If objects in the passenger compartment are
# Always switch off the engine before The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
opening the boot lid. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.
106 Seats and stowing

# Always be particularly careful around Interior stowage compartments 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim. Overview of the front stowage compart‐ console with a USB port (depending on the
# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down ments vehicle's equipment)
before you touch them. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle 4 Glove box
(→ page 105). Locking/unlocking the glove box
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
dependent on the distribution of the load within (→ page 105).
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
mind when loading the vehicle:
R never exceed the maximum permissible
gross mass or the permissible axle loads for
the vehicle (including occupants).
R the load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible. 1 Stowage compartment in the doors
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and 2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the
distribute the load evenly. armrest with multimedia connections and
stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3
player
 Seats and stowing 107

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐ Through-loading feature in the rear bench
wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to seat
unlock).
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
Opening the spectacles compartment
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
(→ page 105). bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
# To open: press release catch 1 and swing intended and could result in additional
the cover of the armrest upwards. injury.
# To open: press button 1.
R Objects or loads in the boot cannot be
Opening the stowage compartment in the restrained by the seat backrest.
rear armrest
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle # Make sure that the seat backrest and
(→ page 105). the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
108 Seats and stowing

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, # Left and right seat backrest: pull release Folding the rear seat backrest back
this will be shown in the multifunction display in lever 1.
the instrument cluster. * NOTE Damage to the seat belt
The centre and outer seat backrests can be fol‐ The seat belt could become trapped and thus
ded forwards separately. damaged when folding back the seat back‐
# Fully insert the rear seat backrest head rest.
restraints. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,

this will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.

# Centre seat backrest: pull seat backrest 2

release 3 forwards.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for‐
wards.
 Seats and stowing 109

Locking the centre rear seat backrest # Fold the centre and left seat backrest for‐
Lock the centre seat backrest if you want to wards.
secure the load compartment from unauthorised # To lock: slide catch 1 upwards.
access. The centre seat backrest can then only The release mechanism of the centre seat
be folded forwards together with the left seat backrest is locked.
backrest.
# To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards.
Both seat backrests must be engaged and joined
together.
Stowing the ski/snowboard bag in the boot

& WARNING Risk of injury due to using the

through-load ski bag incorrectly
The through-load ski bag in conjunction with
the lashing straps cannot restrain any
objects other than skis.
# Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back Vehicle occupants could be struck in the
until it engages. event of sudden braking or an accident in the
Left and right seat backrests: if the seat following cases:
backrest is not correctly engaged, this will be R If you transport other heavy or sharp-
shown in the multifunction display in the edged objects in the through-load ski bag
instrument cluster. R If you do not secure the through-load ski
Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is bag with the lashing straps
not correctly engaged, red lock verification
indicator 2 will be visible.
110 Seats and stowing

# Only store skis in the through-load ski # Fold the centre rear seat backrest forwards.
bag. # Slide the bag between the outer seat backr‐
# Always secure the through-load ski bag ests into the rear.
with the lashing straps so that it cannot # Undo zip 2, place the skis or snowboards
move around. inside the bag and close it.
# Pull tensioning strap tight by the loose end in
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow‐ order to secure the skis or snowboards
boards may be transported in the ski/snow‐ inside the ski/snowboard bag.
board bag.
# Attach lashing strap 1 onto hook 3 in a
crosswise pattern with the fastener facing
upwards in tie-down eye 4.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(→ page 105). 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading
feature in the rear bench seat)
 Seats and stowing 111

EASY-PACK boot box & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped * NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-
Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK boot when pressing the EASY-PACK boot box PACK boot box
box to any position in
The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged
When the EASY-PACK boot box is pressed when it is extended.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped into the retracted position, your hands may # Do not place any objects on or press
and injured when moving the floor up become trapped. Children, in particular, may down on the EASY-PACK boot box
When the floor moves up, your hands may injure themselves when doing so. frame.
become trapped on the frame of the EASY- # When pressing the EASY-PACK boot box
# Do not close the boot lid when the
PACK boot box and objects may be thrown in, make sure that your hands are not
upwards. EASY-PACK boot box is extended.
within the sweep of the EASY-PACK
# When the floor moves up, make sure boot box.
that your hands are not within the # When leaving the vehicle, always take
* NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot
sweep of the floor. box caused by objects which are sharp-
the key with you and lock the vehicle. edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy
# If someone becomes trapped, carefully This also applies to mobile phones if the and objects that roll
push the centre of the floor downward. "digital vehicle key in the smartphone"
# Remove all objects from the floor
function is activated via the Mercedes Objects which are sharp-edged, pointed,
before moving it up. connect me web app. fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that
# Never leave children unattended in the roll can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and
vehicle. be thrown out.
# Do not transport objects which are
sharp-edged, pointed, rounded or frag‐
ile and objects that roll in the EASY-
PACK boot box.
112 Seats and stowing

# Always stow and secure such objects % Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-
outside of the box in the boot. PACK boot box (→ page 376).
# Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK boot box.
# Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box
when the rear seats are folded for‐
wards.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK

boot box is 10 kg. To prevent the box from being
overloaded, the box floor lowers onto the boot
floor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg.

# Pull the box out using handle 2.

# To increase the load capacity: press the
centre of floor 1 downwards to the desired
position and box size.
# To reduce the load capacity: press button
3.
# To stow: press the box in completely using
handle 2, until it locks in place.
 Seats and stowing 113

Installing/removing the EASY-PACK boot box # To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch 6
clockwise and right-hand rotating catch 6
anti-clockwise by 90°.
# Lower box 1 and pull it out of anchorages
4, then pull box 1 backwards and out of
holes 3.

Opening the stowage space under the boot

floor

* NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot

floor
If the handle in the boot is left protruding,
the handle may be damaged.
# Unhinge the handle before you close
# To install: open rotating catch 6 and turn it
outwards. the boot lid and clip it in place.
# Insert retainer 2 of box 1 into outer holes
3.
# Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 into rear
shelf 4.
# Turn rotating catch 6 inwards to the stop.
114 Seats and stowing

Attaching the roof rack sliding sunroof closes again automatically

when it encounters resistance.
& WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding
the maximum roof load
When you load the roof, the vehicle centre of
gravity rises and the driving characteristics
change.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐
ing and braking, will be greatly impaired.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof

load in the "Technical data" section.
# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into rain
trough 2. Requirements:
R Only use roof racks tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Damage to the covers
R Make sure that you can raise the sliding sun‐
roof fully and open the boot lid fully once the The covers may be damaged and scratched
roof rack is fitted. when being opened.
# Do not use metallic or hard objects.
R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be
opened if a roof rack is fitted. The panoramic
 Seats and stowing 115

# Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the You could be distracted from traffic condi‐ # To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull
direction of the arrow. tions and you may lose control of the vehicle. out cup holder 1.
# Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ # To fit: insert cup holder 1 and slide back
points under covers 1. cle is stationary. catch 2.
# Always comply with the roof rack manufac‐ # Only use the cup holder for containers % The rubber mat of the cup holder can be
turer's installation instructions. of the right size. removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke‐
# Secure the load on the roof rack. # Always close the container, particularly
warm water.
if the liquid is hot.
Fitting/removing the cup holder in the
Cup holders centre console (manual transmission)
Fitting or removing the cup holder in the
centre console & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury vehicle is in motion
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure while the vehicle is in motion.
The cup holder cannot hold a container If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
secure while the vehicle is in motion. motion, the container may be flung around
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle
motion, the container may be flung around occupants may come into contact with the
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
occupants may come into contact with the You could be distracted from traffic condi‐
liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.
116 Seats and stowing

# Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest
cle is stationary.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
# Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size. When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
# Always close the container, particularly holder could become damaged.
if the liquid is hot. # Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.

# To fit: insert the cup holder at the front and

then slide it until it reaches edge 3.
The wedge of the upper section of the cup
holder must face upwards.
# Slide upper cup holder sections 1 outwards
until both right and left sides 2 engage.
% The rubber mat of the cup holder can be
# To remove: slide both cup holder sections removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke‐
1 inwards until they release. warm water.
# Slide the cup holder forwards and remove
cup holder 2.
 Seats and stowing 117

# To open: press on cup holder 1 or 2. Using the rear ashtray

# To fold in or out: place or remove a con‐
tainer from cup holder 1 or 2.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using the ashtray in the front centre console

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐

ment under the ashtray
# To open: push the cover of the ashtray
The stowage compartment under the ashtray upwards on right 2 or left side.
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if # To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle
you rest lit cigarettes on it. # To remove the insert: push insert 1 for‐ edge.
wards slightly and pull it upwards and out.
# Ensure that the ashtray is fully engaged. # To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from
# To refit the insert: press insert 1 into the the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and
holder until it engages. out.
# To fit the insert: fit insert 1 from above
and press down into the holder until it
engages.
118 Seats and stowing

Using the cigarette lighter

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from

the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter # Press in cigarette lighter 1. # Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐ plug of the device.
objects, for example cally when the heating element is red-hot.
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the Using the rear 12 V socket
knob. Sockets Requirement:
# Always make sure that the cigarette 12 V socket in the front centre console only connect devices up to a maximum of 180
lighter is out of reach of children. Watt (15 A)
Requirements:
# Never leave children unattended in the
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
vehicle.
180 Watt (15 A)
R if you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com‐
partment open
 Seats and stowing 119

socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged Requirements:

or wet. R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to
# Use only connecting cables that are dry
the country you are in.
and free of damage.
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
# When the ignition is switched off, make
150 watts.
sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Immediately have the 230 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali‐
fied specialised workshop if it is dam‐
# Briefly press the trim of cover 2. aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Lift out cover 1 of the socket and insert the # Never plug the connecting cable into a

plug of the device. 230 V power socket that is damaged or

has been pulled out of the trim.
Using the 230 V socket in the rear compart‐
ment & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
rect handling of the socket
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ You could receive an electric shock:
aged connecting cables or sockets R if you reach into the socket.
When a suitable device is connected, the R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
230 V power socket will be carrying a high into the socket.
voltage. You could receive an electric shock
if the connecting cable or the 230 V power # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket. # Open flap 3.
120 Seats and stowing

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
socket 1. connection with the exterior aerial
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. Notes on wireless charging of the mobile
phone

Using the 12 V socket in the boot & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
Requirement: being stowed incorrectly
Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
Watt (15 A) incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
# Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the in direction.
plug of the device. # Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
 Seats and stowing 121

# Close the lockable stowage spaces * NOTE Damage to objects caused by R The charging function and wireless connec‐
before starting a journey. placing them in the mobile phone stow‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
age compartment exterior aerial are only available if the ignition
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, is switched on.
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky If you place objects in the mobile phone
objects in the boot/load compartment. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
stowage compartment, these may be dam‐ charged in every position of the mobile
aged by electromagnetic fields. phone stowage compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
# Do not place credit cards, storage
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing media or other objects sensitive to the mobile phone stowage compartment may
objects in the mobile phone stowage electromagnetic fields in the mobile not be able to be charged or connected with
compartment phone stowage compartment. the vehicle's exterior aerial.
If you place objects in the mobile phone R The mobile phone may heat up during the
stowage compartment, they may heat up * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone charging process. The mobile phone can be
excessively and even catch fire. stowage compartment caused by liquids cooled in the mobile phone stowage com‐
# Do not place additional objects, espe‐ If liquid is spilled in the mobile phone stow‐ partment when the air conditioning system is
cially those mode of metal, in the age compartment, the mobile phone stowage switched on. The cooling output in the
mobile phone stowage compartment. compartment may be damaged. mobile phone stowage compartment is high‐
# Do not spill liquids into the mobile
est when the controller in the glove box is
closed.
phone stowage compartment.

R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Wireless charging of the mobile phone
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior aerial via the charging module. Requirements:
R Your mobile phone must be suitable for wire‐
less charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone).
122 Seats and stowing

You can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile mobile phone reacts and from the charging # Do not use loose floor mats and do not
phones online at: symbol in the multimedia system display. place floor mats on top of one another.
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Malfunctions during the charging process are
R To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ shown in the multimedia system display.
nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, % To clean, mat 1 can be removed.
remove the protective cover from the mobile
phone.
Fitting/removing floor mats
R If possible, use the mat when charging.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and
# To fit: press studs 1 onto holders 2.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the
centre of mat 1 as possible with the display as prescribed in order to ensure that # To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders
facing upwards. there is always sufficient room for the 2.
The mobile phone is charged automatically, pedals.
as is apparent from the way in which the
 Light and sight 123

Exterior lighting Lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch

Changing the lights when driving abroad The various lighting systems of the vehicle are Operating the light switch
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
Vehicles with halogen or static LED head‐ for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
lamps: It is not necessary to change the head‐ with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in legal requirements and traffic situation.
countries where people drive on the other side
of the road.
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: Before
crossing the border into countries where they
drive on the other side, it is necessary to set the
headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam
(→ page 129).
After changing the headlamps:
R Oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
R The edge of the road is not illuminated as far
or as high.
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light functions" are not available.
# 1 W Left-hand parking lights
# 2 X Right-hand parking lights
The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical
dipped beam after returning from abroad.
# 3 T Standing lights and licence plate
lighting
124 Light and sight

# 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ Activating/deactivating the rear fog light
light switch position) ing lights) switches off automatically when the
driver's door is opened. Requirement
# 5 L Dipped beam/main beam The light switch is in the L or à position.
# 6 R Switches the rear fog light on or off Automatic driving lights # Press button R.
The standing lights, dipped beam and daytime
When dipped beam is activated, the indicator running lights are switched on automatically Please observe the country-specific laws on the
lamp for the standing lights is deactivated and depending on the ignition status, whether the use of rear fog lamps.
replaced by the dipped beam indicator lamp. engine is running and on the light conditions.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-lit Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen
area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipu‐ & WARNING Risk of accident when the headlamps without active suspension)
lations. The headlamp range adjuster allows you to
dipped beam is switched off in poor visi‐
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in
bility
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating relation to the vehicle's load condition.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
the standing lights
dipped beam may not be switched on auto‐
Operating the standing lights over a period of matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
hours puts a strain on the battery. of poor visibility such as spray.
# Where possible, switch on the # In such cases, turn the light switch to
right X or left W parking light. L.

In the case of severe battery discharging, the The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
standing lights or parking lights are automati‐ are responsible for vehicle lighting.
cally switched off to facilitate a future engine
start.
 Light and sight 125

# Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the 3 Headlamp flashing

position which corresponds to the load con‐ 4 Turn signal light, left
dition of your vehicle.
# Pull or push the combination switch in the
relevant direction following the arrow.
Operating the light combination switch
Switching on the main beam manually
# Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus: Turn the light switch to the L posi‐
tion.
R Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow 1.
When the main beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for dipped beam is deactivated and
replaced by the indicator lamp for the main
g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐ beam.
pied # To switch off the main beam: move the

1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear combination switch back to its starting posi‐
seats occupied tion.
2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear # To indicate briefly: press the combination
seats occupied, boot laden switch briefly up to the pressure point in the
3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐ 1 Main beam direction of arrow 2 or 4.
pied and maximum permissible rear axle 2 Turn signal light, right The corresponding turn signal light flashes
load utilised three times.
126 Light and sight

# To indicate for a duration: press the combi‐ The hazard warning light switches on automati‐ R City lighting (→ page 128)
nation switch beyond the pressure point in cally if:
the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The system is only active when it is dark.
R The airbag has been deployed.
R The vehicle brakes sharply from a speed of
Active headlamps function
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
light
The hazard warning light switches off automati‐
cally when the vehicle reaches a speed exceed‐
ing 10 km/h following maximum full-stop brak‐
ing.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Function of the Intelligent Light System
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the
driving and weather situation and provide exten‐ Functions of the active headlamps function:
ded functions for improving the illumination of R The headlamps follow the steering move‐
the road. ments.
The system comprises the following functions: R Relevant areas are better illuminated while
R Active headlamps function (→ page 126) driving.
R Cornering light (→ page 127) R Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist, Driv‐
R Motorway mode (→ page 127) ing Assistance Package, Driving Assis‐
# Press button 1. tance Plus Package or Traffic Sign Assist:
R Enhanced fog light function (→ page 127)
the active headlamps function evaluates the
R Adverse weather light (→ page 128)
 Light and sight 127

course of the lane in which you are driving The function is active:
and adjusts the light in advance. R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig‐
The function is active when the dipped beam is nal light is switched on or the steering wheel
switched on. is turned.
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h
Cornering light function when the steering wheel is turned.
Roundabout and intersection function: the
cornering light is activated on both sides through
an evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle The function is active if a motorway journey is
has left the roundabout or the intersection. detected by:
Motorway mode R The vehicle's speed.
The motorway mode increases the range and R The multifunction camera.
brightness of the cone of light enabling better R The GPS.
visibility.
Cornering light improves the illumination of the The function is not active:
roadway over a wide angle in the direction you R At speeds below 80 km/h.
are turning, enabling better visibility in tight
bends, for example. It can only be activated Enhanced fog light function
when the dipped beam is switched on. The enhanced fog light function reduces self-
dazzling by the driver and improves the illumina‐
tion of the edge of the carriageway.
128 Light and sight

City lighting Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

City lighting improves the illumination of road‐
Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
sides within built-up areas using a broader distri‐
bution of light. & WARNING Risk of accident despite
The function is active: Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
R At lower speeds.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec‐
R In illuminated parts of built-up areas. ognise the following road users:
Switching the Intelligent Light System R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
on/off trians
The function is active: R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
Requirement:
R At speeds below 70 km/h when the rear fog cyclists
The light switch is in the à position.
light is switched on. R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
Multimedia system:
The function is not active: e.g. by a barrier
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Intell.
R At speeds above 100 km/h after activation. Light System In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
R When the rear fog light is switched off.
Plus may not recognise road users who do
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
have lights, or may recognise them too late.
Adverse weather light In this, or in similar situations, the automatic
The adverse weather light reduces reflections in main beam will not be deactivated or will be
rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in activated despite the presence of other road
the headlamps. This reduces the glare for the users.
driver and other road users.
# Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the main beam in good time.
 Light and sight 129

them. The vehicle in front is illuminated by the Detection may be restricted if:
dipped beam. R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog,
At speeds above 30 km/h: heavy rain or snow.
R If no other road users are detected, the main R There is dirt on the sensors or if the sensors
beam is automatically switched on. are covered over.
R If other road users are detected, the partial Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
main beam is automatically switched on. on/off
# To switch on: turn the light switch to
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi‐
cient street lighting: the à position.
R The partial main beam switches off automati‐ # Switch on the main beam using the combina‐

cally. tion switch.

When the main beam is switched on auto‐
R The main beam switches off automatically.
matically in the dark, the _ indicator
At speeds above approx. 50 km/h: lamp in the multifunction display comes on.
The headlamp range of the dipped beam is # To switch off: switch off the main beam
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches auto‐ R
matically between: regulated automatically based on the dis‐ using the combination switch.
R Dipped beam
tance to other road users.
R Partial main beam The system's optical sensor is located behind Setting the dipped beam
R Main beam
the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Multimedia system:
System limitations , Vehicle . ÷ Light set-
The partial main beam uses the main beam to
shine past other road users rather than dazzling Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into tings . Dipped-beams
account road, weather or traffic conditions. # Select Left-side traffic or Right-side traffic.
130 Light and sight

Setting the surround lighting Interior lighting # 5 p Switches the front right-hand read‐
ing lamp on/off
Requirement: Adjusting the interior lighting
The light switch is in the à position. Control panel in the grab handle (rear)
Front overhead control panel
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Loca-

tor lighting
Exterior switch-off delay time: the exterior
lighting is switched on for a short time after the
vehicle is switched off.
# Set the switch-off delay time.

Locator lighting: if a switch-off delay time is

set, the exterior lighting remains lit for 30 sec‐
onds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you # 1 p Switches the reading lamp on/off
start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched # 1 p Switches the front left-hand reading
off and automatic driving lights are activated. lamp on/off
Adjusting the ambient lighting
# 2 | Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Ambi-
# 3 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off ent light
# 4 u Switches the rear interior lighting Setting the colour
on/off
# Select Colour.
 Light and sight 131

# Set the colour. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your‐
Setting the brightness for zones self on these component parts.
# Select Entire vehicle, Front, Rear or Display. # Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulbs.
# Set the brightness value.

R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if

Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb
time may otherwise explode.
Multimedia system: R Do not touch the glass tube with your bare
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings
hands.
. Int.
light delay shut-off R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow
bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
# Set the switch-off delay time.

Overview of bulb types

Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo‐
The following bulbs can be replaced. Halogen headlamps
gen headlamps)
1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W
Notes on changing bulbs
2 Main beam: H7 55 W
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ 3 Dipped beam: H7 55 W
ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during operation.
132 Light and sight

Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo‐ # Removal (left-hand side of the vehicle):
gen headlamps) using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
clockwise as far as they will go.
Fitting/removing the cover on the front
Cover 2 is released.
wheel arch
# Removal (right-hand side of the vehicle):
Requirements: using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
R The lighting system is switched off. anti-clockwise as far as they will go.
R The appropriate front wheel is turned Cover 2 is released.
inwards. # Remove cover 2.
# To fit: insert cover 2 into the wheel arch
liner.
R Left-hand side of the vehicle: using a
screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
anti-clockwise as far as they will go.
R Right-hand side of the vehicle: using a
Tail lamps screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W clockwise as far as they will go.
2 Reversing light: W 16 W Cover 2 is locked.
Replacing bulbs in the halogen headlamp
Requirements:
R Main beam/dipped beam: bulb, type
H7 55 W.
 Light and sight 133

R Turn signal light: bulb, type PY 21 W. # Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock‐ Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halo‐
R The lighting system is switched off. wise and remove it. gen headlamps)
R The cover in the front wheel arch has been # Main beam/dipped beam: turn the socket Opening and closing the side trim panels in
removed. anti-clockwise and remove it. the boot
R The engine bonnet is open. # Turn signal light: turn the socket anti-clock‐
wise, unlock and remove it.
# Pull the bulb out of the socket.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket so that
the entire base of the bulb is resting on the
bottom of the socket.
# Insert socket and turn it clockwise.
# Press on the housing cover and turn it clock‐
wise.
# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch. # To open: release right-hand or left-hand side
trim panels 1 at the side and remove.
# To close: reinsert side trim panel 1.
Replacing the tail lamp bulbs
Requirements:
R Turn signal light: bulb, type PY 21 W.
1 Dipped beam
R Reversing light: bulb, type W 16 W.
2 Main beam/turn signal light
R The lighting system is switched off.
134 Light and sight

R The side trim panel in the boot is open. Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer
system
Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

# Turn signal light: press bulb 2 gently into

the bulb mount, turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb mount.
# Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount and
turn it clockwise.
# Reversing light: pull bulb 3 out of the bulb
mount.
# Press the upper and lower catch on the plug
together and remove the plug. # Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount.
# Press tab 1 outwards and remove the bulb # Insert the bulb mount again.
# 1 í Single wipe/î wiping with
mount. # Insert the plug until the catch hooks engage washer fluid
audibly.
# 1 g Windscreen wipers off
# Close the side trim panel.
# 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
 Light and sight 135

# 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent # Fold the wiper arm away from the wind‐ # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
# 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow screen. until it engages in the removal position.
# 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Removing the wiper blades

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if

the windscreen wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before changing the
wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position

# Set the windscreen wipers to the ° slow # Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
continuous wiping position on the combina‐ # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the arrow 4 away from the wiper arm.
tion switch. other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
# As soon as the wiper arms are vertical rela‐ tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm to
tive to the engine bonnet, switch off the igni‐ the stop.
tion.
136 Light and sight

Fitting the wiper blades Maintenance display

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3

until it engages in the locking position.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper # Remove protective film 1 of the mainte‐
arm in the direction of arrow 1. # Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. nance display on the tip of the newly fitted
# Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind‐ wiper blade.
screen.
If the colour of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
 Light and sight 137

% The duration of the colour change varies & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
depending on the usage conditions. judgement of distances when using the
outside mirror
Mirrors The outside mirrors reflect objects on a
Operating the outside mirrors smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐ As a result, you may misjudge the distance
ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in between you and the road user driving
motion behind you, e.g. when changing lanes.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
following situations: der in order to ensure that you are
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
aware of the actual distance between
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ you and the road users driving behind
ror while the vehicle is in motion you.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ # To fold in or out: briefly press button 1.
cle is in motion
% If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
# Before starting the engine: adjust the pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
driver's seat, the head restraints, the be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten folding function work properly.
your seat belt. # To adjust: select the required mirror using
button 3 or 4.
138 Light and sight

# Use button 2 to set the position of the mir‐ skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the
ror you have selected. be swallowed. inside rearview mirror.
An outside mirror which has been pushed out of
position can be engaged in position again in the
# If you come into contact with electro‐ System limitations
following manner: lyte, observe the following: The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode in
R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin the following situations:
# Vehicles without electrically folding out‐
and seek medical attention immedi‐ R the engine is switched off
side mirrors: manually move the outside ately.
mirror into the correct position. R reverse gear is engaged
R If electrolyte comes into contact
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside R interior lighting is switched on
with your eyes, rinse them thor‐
mirrors: press and hold button 1. oughly with clean water and seek
You will hear a click and the mirror audibly medical attention immediately. Parking position of the passenger outside
engage in position. The mirror is set into the mirror
R If the electrolyte is swallowed,
correct position.
immediately rinse your mouth out The parking position makes parking easier.
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors Seek medical attention immediately. The passenger outside mirror tilts downwards
and shows the rear wheel on the front passenger
R Immediately change out of clothing side if:
& WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning which has come into contact with
due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte R the parking position is stored
electrolyte.
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an R the passenger mirror is selected
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. medical attention immediately. R reverse gear is engaged
The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita‐ The passenger outside mirror moves back to its
tion. It must not come into contact with your The outside mirrors and inside rearview mirrors
on the driver's side automatically go into anti- original position in the following situations:
 Light and sight 139

R if you shift the transmission to another trans‐ % No more than three seconds may pass
mission position between pressing memory button M and
R when driving faster than 15 km/h button 1. The mirror setting process is can‐
celled after three seconds.
R if you press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
Saving the parking position of the passenger
outside mirror Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
Requirement:
Reverse gear must not be engaged when storing tings . Auto. fold-in mirrors
using the memory button. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Operating the sun visors

# To store using the memory button: select
the passenger outside mirror using button
2.
# Move the passenger outside mirror into the
desired parking position using button 1.
# Press memory button M.
# Confirm immediately using button 1 to
store the setting.
140 Light and sight

# Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1 Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐
down. tems, can only be mounted on areas of the wind‐
# Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to screen which are permeable to radio waves 1.
the side. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐
# Slide sun visor 1 horizontally as required. ble from outside the vehicle when the wind‐
screen is illuminated using an external light
# Fold down additional sun visor 2. source.

Infrared reflective windscreen

The infrared reflective windscreen is coated and

prevents an excessive build-up of heat in the
vehicle interior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior against
radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
 Climate control 141

Overview of climate control systems Vehicles with a stationary heater: ! to

THERMATIC control panel overview switch the residual heat on/off
(→ page 144)
The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that 7 To switch the rear window heater on/off
the current function is activated. 8 0 To activate or deactivate synchronisa‐
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on climate tion (→ page 144)
control in the separate Owner's Manual. Vehicles with a stationary heater: & to
switch the stationary heater on/off
(→ page 146)
9 To switch air-recirculation mode on/off
(→ page 144)
A To switch the A/C function on/off
(→ page 143)
B To set the front passenger side temperature

1 To set the driver's side temperature

THERMOTRONIC control panel overview
2 To set the air distribution
3 To set the airflow or switch off climate con‐ The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that
trol the current function is activated.
4 To set climate control to automatic mode Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on climate
(→ page 143) control in the separate Owner's Manual.
5 To demist the windscreen
6 To call up the air conditioning menu of the
multimedia system
142 Climate control

To switch the residual heat on/off Rear operating unit

(→ page 144)
7 To switch the rear window heater on/off
8 ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off
(→ page 143)
Vehicles with a stationary heater: & to
switch the stationary heater on/off
(→ page 146)
9 To switch air-recirculation mode on/off
(→ page 144)
A To set the front passenger side air distribu‐
tion 1 To set the temperature
B To set the front passenger side temperature 2 Display
3 To set the airflow
1 To set the driver's side temperature
2 To set the driver's side air distribution Operating the climate control system
3 To set the airflow or switch off climate con‐ Switching climate control on/off
trol # To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
4 To set climate control to automatic mode
higher using the H button.
(→ page 143)
5 To demist the windscreen # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
6 To call up the air conditioning menu of the the H button.
multimedia system
 Climate control 143

% When the climate control is switched off, the # Switch the function on O or off ª. Setting the climate style
windows can mist up faster. Only switch off
the climate control briefly. Requirements:
Setting climate control to automatic mode R THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control is

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐ fitted.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via R The à button has been pressed.
the control panel trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply. Multimedia system:
The A/C function cools, heats and dehumidifies # Press the à button.
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Cli-
the interior air in the vehicle.
# To switch to manual mode: press the H mate mode
# Press button ¿.
or _ button. # Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other‐
wise the windows can mist up more quickly. Climate style
Air distribution settings
Condensation may drip from the underside of
Climate style function
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is The symbols in the display indicate which vents
not a sign that there is a malfunction. In automatic mode you can select the following the airflow is being directed through:
climate style settings for the driver's and front R ¯ demister vents
passenger areas:
Activating/deactivating the A/C function R P centre and side air vents
R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
using the multimedia system R O footwell vents
R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
Multimedia system: R S centre, side and footwell vents
, Vehicle . b Climate control . A/C
R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draught-free setting R a defroster and footwell vents
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies R _ all vents
the vehicle's interior air.
R b defroster, middle and side air vents
144 Climate control

R W automatic air distribution Activating/deactivating the climate control Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
synchronisation function using the multime‐
dia system
# Press the g button.
Activating/deactivating the climate control The interior air will be recirculated.
synchronisation function via the control Multimedia system:
panel , Vehicle . b Climate con-
Air-recirculation mode is switched off automati‐
cally.
Climate control can be set centrally using the trol . SYNC
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
synchronisation function. The temperature and Climate control can be set centrally using the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch
air distribution setting for the driver's side is synchronisation function. The temperature set‐ on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
adopted automatically for the front passenger ting is automatically adopted for all climate
side. zones.
# Press button 0.
Switching residual heat on/off
# Switch the function on O or off ª.

The synchronisation function is deactivated if Requirement

the settings for one of the other climate zones Demisting the windows The vehicle must be switched off.
are changed. Using the residual heat of the engine, it is possi‐
Windows misted up on the inside ble to continue heating or ventilating the front
# Press the à button. compartment of the vehicle, depending on the
# If the windows continue to mist up: press the
set temperature, for approximately 30 minutes.
¬ button. # To switch on: press the ! button.

Windows misted up on the outside Residual heat is switched off automatically.

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Press the à button.

 Climate control 145

Activating and deactivating ionisation # To set the intensity: select High, Medium, + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
Multimedia system: Low or Off. damage due to improper disposal of full
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Ioni- Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ flacons
sation grance system
Ionisation cleans and refreshes the interior air of & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
the vehicle. The ionisation of the interior air is fume
odourless. Full flacons must not be disposed
If children open the flacon, they could drink of with household waste.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ #
tact with their eyes.
Fragrance system # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk. Full flacons must be taken to
Setting the fragrance system a harmful substance collection point.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact
Requirements:
R Automatic climate control is activated.
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes
with clean water.
R The glove box is closed.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Air

freshener
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐
con located in the glove box.
146 Climate control

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior Stationary heater/ventilation

perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
Function of the stationary heater/stationary
it.
ventilation
Refillable flacon R The air in the vehicle interior is heated or
# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. ventilated to the set temperature.
# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
R The air in the vehicle interior cannot be
cooled down to temperatures below the out‐
# Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
side temperature.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the R If the outside temperature changes, ventila‐
same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ tion mode automatically switches to heating
tion sheet attached to the flacon. mode or from heating mode to ventilation
mode.
Information on the windscreen heater The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet
The windscreen heater is switched on automati‐ are situated at the right-hand front wheel.
1 Cap cally: Switching the stationary heater/stationary
2 Flacon R if the ¬ button is activated ventilation on/off via the control panel
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as After the vehicle is started the windscreen & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
far as it will go. heater is switched on automatically as needed. sonous exhaust gases
# To remove: pull out the flacon. If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
notices on the perfume packaging.
 Climate control 147

cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if R the exhaust gas itself
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
# When the stationary heater is switched
# Always switch the stationary heater off
on, make sure that:
in enclosed spaces without an air R hot vehicle parts do not come into
extraction systems, e.g. in garages. contact with flammable materials
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the
the vehicle free from snow when the tailpipe unhindered
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
R the exhaust gas does not come into
ning.
contact with flammable materials
# Open a window on the windward side of
the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air. * NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta‐
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station‐
ary heater components Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery. # Set the desired temperature using the w
When the stationary heater is switched on, button.
# After heating or ventilating the vehicle
parts of the vehicle can become very hot, # Press button 1.
e.g. the exhaust system. twice, drive for a longer period of time.
The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or Requirement: lights up or goes out.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel Indicator lamp colours:
with: level. R blue: stationary ventilation is switched on
R hot parts of the exhaust system
R red: stationary heater is activated
148 Climate control

R yellow: departure time is preselected # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐

ously.
The stationary heater/stationary ventilation The Î symbol in the remote control display
switches off automatically after 50 minutes. flashes.
Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven‐ # Press the , and . buttons to set the
tilation using the multimedia system desired departure time.
Multimedia system: # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Aux-
ously.
iliary heating The new departure time is stored.
You can pre-set three departure times for auto‐
matic activation of the stationary heater. Up to three departure times can be stored.
# To activate the departure time: select the
# Select an option.
desired departure time and press and hold
Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven‐ the u button.
tilation via remote control The Í symbol, the departure time and,
# To activate immediately: press and hold depending on the selected departure time,
Requirement:
the u button. the letter A, B or C appear in the display.
The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel
level. # To set the departure time: briefly press # To deactivate the departure time: select

the u button. the desired departure time and press and

hold the ^ button.
# Press the , or . button repeatedly
OFF appears in the display.
until the time to be changed appears in the
display. # To check the status of the stationary
heater: briefly press the u button.
 Climate control 149

# To deactivate immediately: press and hold Further possible displays: + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
the ^ button. R Time: activated departure time. damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
Remote control displays (stationary heater/ R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta‐ teries
stationary ventilation) tionary heater is increased, as the engine has
not yet reached operating temperature when
it is started.
R OFF: the stationary heater/stationary venti‐ Batteries contain toxic and corro‐
lation is switched off. sive substances.
#
Replacing the remote control battery (sta‐
tionary heater)
Take discharged batteries to a
& DANGER Serious damage to health qualified specialist workshop or to a
caused by swallowing batteries collection point for used batteries.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
1 Stationary ventilation switched on stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Requirement:
2 Stationary heater switched on serious damage to health. A CR2450 lithium battery is required when
3 Selected departure time There is a risk of fatal injury. changing the battery.
4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/ # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
stationary ventilation (in minutes) dren.
5 Stationary heater/stationary ventilation
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
active
attention immediately.
6 Departure time activated
7 Signal strength
150 Climate control

# Press a pointed object into recess 1.

# Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the
direction of the arrow.
# Insert new battery 3 with the lettering
facing upwards.
# Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc‐
tion to the arrow onto the remote control
until it engages.

Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/stationary ventilation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
FAIL ¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty.
# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.
FAIL The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
# Charge the starter battery.
The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.
# Refuel at the nearest filling station.
FAIL ¯ The stationary heater is faulty.
# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Climate control 151

Air vents Adjusting the rear air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING ‑ Risk of burns/frostbite due

to not maintaining a sufficient distance
to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ left or right as far as it will go.
# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
pants maintain a sufficient distance to # To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 left or right as far as it will go.
the air vents. in the centre and move it up or down or to
# If necessary, redirect the airflow to the left or right.
# To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down
another area of the vehicle interior.
or to the left or right.
Opening/closing the air vent in the glove box

* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive

objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
glove box may be damaged by the air vent
located inside the glove compartment.
152 Climate control

# Close the air vent when you heat the

vehicle.
# At high outside temperatures, open the
air vent and switch on the A/C func‐
tion.

Requirement:
Automatic climate control is activated.

1 Air vent controller

2 Air vent
# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.
 Driving and parking 153

Driving # Never leave children and animals unat‐ & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
Switching on the power supply or ignition tended in the vehicle. mable material on the exhaust system
using the start/stop button # When leaving the vehicle, always take Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
the key with you and lock the vehicle. mals or environmental influences may ignite
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury This also applies to mobile phones if the if they come into contact with hot parts of
due to children left unattended in the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" the engine or exhaust system.
vehicle function is activated via the Mercedes
# Therefore, check regularly that there
connect me web App.
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, are no flammable materials in the
they could: # Keep the keys out of the reach of chil‐ engine compartment or on the exhaust
dren. This also applies to mobile system.
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
phones if the "Digital Car Key in the
persons or road users. smartphone" function is activated via Requirements:
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by the Mercedes connect me web App. R The key is located in the vehicle and the key
oncoming traffic. battery is not discharged.
R Operate vehicle equipment. & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning R Or if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
Moreover, children could also set the vehicle Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust function is activated via the Mercedes me
in motion by, for example: gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling connect web App: the mobile phone is loca‐
R Releasing the parking brake. these exhaust gases causes poisoning. ted in the vehicle.
R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave the engine running in an

of park position j or shifting manual enclosed space without sufficient venti‐

transmission into idle position. lation.
R Starting the engine.
154 Driving and parking

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

twice. Shift the transmission to position j or i.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster # Depress the brake pedal and push button 1
light up. once.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
following conditions is met: essential consumers and press button 1
R You do not start the vehicle within once.
15 minutes. # If the vehicle still does not start: start the
R You press button 1 once. vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Starting a vehicle with a mobile phone (NFC)
Starting the vehicle
Requirements:
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Car
ton Key in the smartphone" function.
Requirements: R The "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" func‐
# To switch on the power supply: press but‐ R The key is located in the vehicle and the key tion is activated via the Mercedes me con‐
ton 1 once. battery is not discharged. nect web app: http://www.mercedes.me.
You can now activate the windscreen wipers,
R Or if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" R Suitable mobile phone with NFC aerial (Near
for example.
function is activated via the Mercedes me Field Communication) and Secure Element.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ connect web App: the mobile phone is loca‐ R Sufficient charge level of the mobile phone.
lowing conditions are met: ted in the vehicle. On some mobile phones, the function is also
R The driver's door is open.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: available when the battery is discharged.
R You press button 1 twice. Depress the clutch pedal.
 Driving and parking 155

% You can check the suitability of your mobile # Make sure that there is a valid vehicle key in display message appears in the multifunction
phone by entering the phone number at the vehicle. display.
http://www.mercedes.me. # Place the mobile phone in stowage space 1
Information about suitable mobile phones so that the NFC aerial areas touch each
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz other.
service centre or at http://www.mercedes-
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
benz.com/connect.
using the start/stop button.
% The function is only available in combination
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐ % The key is not needed for any further starts.
tain countries. Any further starts
% Protective cases around the mobile phone # Place the mobile phone in stowage space 1
can impair the functionality. so that the NFC aerial areas touch each
Starting the vehicle for the first time after other, and leave it there while driving. # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
activating the function # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle # Remove key 1 from the key ring.
using the start/stop button. # Place key 1 in marked space 2.
If you lose your mobile phone, deactivate the The vehicle will start after a short while.
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" service in If you remove key 1 from marked space 2
Mercedes me connect at https:// the engine continues running. For further
www.mercedes.me. vehicle starts however, key 1 must be loca‐
Starting the vehicle in emergency operation ted in marked space 2 during the entire
mode journey.
If the vehicle cannot be started, the Place the # Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist
key in the marked space See Owner's Manual workshop.
156 Driving and parking

If the vehicle does not start: R only increase the engine speed gradually and Driving tips
# Leave key 1 in marked space 2. accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,500 km. & WARNING Risk of accident due to
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
objects in the driver's footwell
using the start/stop button. This also applies when the engine or parts of the
% You can also switch on the power supply or drivetrain have been replaced. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
the ignition with the start/stop button. Please also observe the following running-in pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
notes: This jeopardises the operating and road
R In certain driving and driving safety systems, safety of the vehicle.
Running-in notes
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km: tain distance is being driven after the vehicle so that they cannot get into the driver's
R drive at varying road speeds and engine has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ footwell.
speeds. tem effectiveness is not achieved until the # Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot
R drive in drive program C or E. end of this teach-in process. slip and provide sufficient room for the
R change gear before the rev counter needle is R Brake linings, brake discs and tyres that are pedals.
Ô of the way to the red area of the rev coun‐ either new or have been replaced only ach‐ # Do not lay multiple floor mats or car‐
ter. ieve optimum braking effect and grip after pets on top of one another.
several hundred kilometres of driving. Com‐
R do not shift down a gear manually in order to pensate for the reduced braking effect by
brake. applying greater force to the brake pedal.
R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R vehicles with automatic transmission: do
not depress the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point (kickdown).
 Driving and parking 157

& WARNING Risk of accident due to # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to poi‐
unsuitable footwear ing. sonous exhaust gases
Operating the pedals may be impaired by If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
wearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.: & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
R platform shoes Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehi‐
R high-heeled shoes
these exhaust gases causes poisoning. cle is stuck in snow.
R slippers # When the engine or the stationary
# Never leave the engine running in an
# Always wear suitable footwear when enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ heater are running, keep the tailpipe
driving so that you can operate the ped‐ lation. and the area around the vehicle clear of
als safely. snow.
# Open a window on the side of the vehi‐
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition accident due to shifting down on slippery cle facing the wind to ensure an ade‐
is switched off while driving road surfaces quate supply of fresh air.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
functions relevant to safety are restricted or & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
no longer available. This may effect, for wheels may lose traction. brake system overheating
example, the power steering system and the # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
brake force boosting. faces to increase the engine braking when driving, the brake system may over‐
You will then need to use considerably more effect. heat.
force to steer and brake. This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
158 Driving and parking

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
due to non-combusted fuel of the journey and when starting the next
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the journey.
accelerator pedal at the same time The engine is not running smoothly and is
while driving. misfiring. Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the
separate Owner's Manual. Otherwise, you may
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ fail to recognise dangers.
* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings lytic converter.
by permanently depressing the brake # Only depress the accelerator pedal
pedal ECO start/stop function
slightly.
# Do not permanently depress the brake # Have the cause rectified immediately at Operation of the ECO start/stop function
pedal while driving. a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is switched off automatically:
# To use braking effect of the engine, R Vehicles with manual transmission: If you
shift to a lower gear in good time. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:
brake the vehicle, shift into neutral i when
R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and travelling at a low speed and then release the
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and brake lining, the braking distance can clutch pedal.
engine when pulling away increase considerably or result in braking R Vehicles with automatic transmission: If
only on one side.
# Do not warm up the engine when sta‐ you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
tionary. Pull away immediately. R maintain a much greater distance to the vehi‐ mission position h or i.
cle in front.
# Avoid high engine speeds and full throt‐ R If all vehicle conditions for an automatic
tle until the engine has reached its To prevent salt build-up: engine stop are met.
operating temperature. R brake occasionally while paying attention to The è symbol appears in the multifunction
# Do not allow the wheels to spin. the traffic conditions. display when the vehicle is stationary. If not all
 Driving and parking 159

the vehicle conditions are met, the ç symbol ing tone sounds. The Vehicle is operational # Press button 1.
appears in the multifunction display. Switch off the ignition before exiting display If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/
The engine is restarted automatically if: message also appears in the multifunction dis‐ stop function is switched on.
play. % Depending on the model, the button may
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
depress the clutch pedal. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition also be located at a different position in the
is automatically switched off after one minute. centre console.
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
engage reverse gear k. Switching the ECO start/stop function
off/on ECO display
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: In
transmission position h, you release the The ECO display summarises the driving style
brake pedal when the HOLD function is not from the start of the journey to its completion
active. and assists you in achieving the most economi‐
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: cal driving style.
You shift out of transmission position j. You can influence consumption if you:
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: R drive with particular care
You shift into transmission position h or R drive the vehicle in drive program E
k.
R observe the gearshift recommendations
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R You switch to drive program S+.
R You change the vehicle level.
R An automatic engine start is necessary.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/

stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
160 Driving and parking

You have driven economically when: R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical

R the three outer segments are completely fil‐ driving style
led simultaneously. R E (Economy): particularly economical driving
R the ECO display border lights up. style
The additional range achieved as a result of your Depending on the drive program selected, the
driving style in comparison to a driver with a following vehicle characteristics will change:
very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus R Drive system
from start. The range displayed does not indicate - Engine and transmission management
a fixed reduction in consumption.
The inner segment lights up green and the outer
- ESP®
segment fills up: - Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
R 1 Moderate acceleration R Suspension
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R Steering
R 3 Consistent speed
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the R Availability of the ECO start/stop function
DYNAMIC SELECT switch in the separate operat‐
The inner segment is grey and the outer seg‐ ing instructions. % Time until the next vehicle start:
ment empties: Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change R Less than four hours: the last selected
R 1 Sporty acceleration between the following drive programs: drive program is active.
R 2 Heavy braking R I (Individual): individual settings R More than four hours: drive program C is

R 3 Fluctuations in speed R S+ (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving

active.
style
R S (Sport): sporty driving style
 Driving and parking 161

Operating the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Configuring drive program I R sea level
Multimedia system: R fuel grade
, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC R outside temperature
SELECT . Individual
# Select the individual setting. Manual transmission
Operating the gearshift lever
Displaying vehicle data
* NOTE Damage to the engine and trans‐
Multimedia system:
mission by shifting to a gear that is too
, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT
low
# Select Vehicle data.
# When changing between gears 5 and
6 push the gearshift lever to the right.
Displaying engine data # Do not shift down at high speeds.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT * NOTE Damage to the transmission by
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards shifting to reverse gear k while the
# Select Engine data.
or backwards. vehicle is in motion
The drive program selected appears in the % The values for engine output and engine tor‐
multifunction display. que may deviate from the nominal values. # Only shift into reverse gear k when
the vehicle is stationary.
Items that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R engine speed
162 Driving and parking

Gearshift recommendation Automatic transmission

The gearshift recommendations assist you in DIRECT SELECT lever
adopting an economical driving style.
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is oncoming traffic.
shown in the multifunction display, shift to R Operate vehicle equipment.
k Reverse gear the recommended gear.
1 - 6 Forward gears Moreover, children could also set the vehicle
i in motion by, for example:
Neutral
R Releasing the parking brake.
# Depress the clutch pedal and shift the gear‐ R Shifting the transmission out of park
shift lever into the required position.
position j.
R Starting the engine.
 Driving and parking 163

# Never leave children and animals unat‐ pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
tended in the vehicle. the same time.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
This also applies to mobile phones if the mission caused by changing the trans‐
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" mission position during the journey
function is activated via the Mercedes
me connect web app. # Only change the transmission position
when the vehicle is stationary.
# Keep the keys out of the reach of chil‐
dren. This also applies to mobile Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐
phones if the "Digital Car Key in the mission position. The current transmission posi‐
smartphone" function is activated via tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
the Mercedes me connect web app.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐

rect gearshifting j Park position
If the engine speed is higher than the idle k Reverse gear
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ i Neutral
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate h Drive position
sharply.
# If you engage the transmission position
h or k always depress the brake
164 Driving and parking

Engaging reverse gear R % If you leave the key in the vehicle and then Park position j is engaged automatically if one
# Depress the brake pedal and push the exit the vehicle, the automatic transmission of the following conditions is met:
DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point remains in neutral i R If you switch the engine off with the trans‐
of resistance. mission in position h or k.
The transmission position display shows k Engaging park position P
R If you open the driver's door when the vehi‐
in the multifunction display.
cle is stationary or when driving at a very low
Shifting to neutral N speed and the transmission is in position h
# Depress the brake pedal and push the or k.
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance. Engaging drive position D
# Depress the brake pedal and push the
Transmission position display i is shown in
the multifunction display. DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move The transmission position display shows h
the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. in the multifunction display.
If you want the automatic transmission to When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
remain in neutral N even if the ignition is sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐
switched off: cally. This is determined by:
# Start the vehicle. R The selected drive program

# Depress the brake pedal and shift to neutral R The position of the accelerator pedal
i. # Press button 1. R The road speed
# Release the brake pedal.
Transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display.
# Switch the ignition off.
 Driving and parking 165

Manual gearshifting # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle 1 or 2.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
accident due to shifting down on slippery time. The current gear is displayed in the
road surfaces multifunction display.
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift

increase the engine braking effect, the drive paddle 2.

wheels may lose traction. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ paddle 1.
faces to increase the engine braking # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
effect.
# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
paddle 2 and hold it in place. shown in the multifunction display, shift to
The transmission position the recommended gear.
h appears in the multifunction display.
% If you select the Manual drive setting in
Using kickdown
drive program I, manual gearshifting is per‐
manently activated. # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on manual erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
gearshifting in the separate operating instruc‐
tions. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto‐
matic transmission shifts up to the next gear
Gearshift recommendation when the maximum engine speed is reached to
The gearshift recommendations assist you in protect the engine from overrevving.
adopting an economical driving style.
166 Driving and parking

# Ease off the accelerator pedal once the (engine management) when in drive program Refuelling
desired speed is reached. I.
Refuelling the vehicle
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
Glide mode function conditions is no longer met. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire or explosion
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consump‐ Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, caused by fuel
tion. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or Active Brake
Fuels are highly inflammable.
Assist: Glide mode is also deactivated depend‐
Glide mode is characterised by the following: ing on the traffic situation and the vehicle then # You must avoid fire, naked flames, cre‐
R The combustion engine is disconnected from switches to overrun mode. This further reduces ating sparks and smoking.
the drivetrain. fuel consumption. # Before refuelling, switch off the engine
R The engine speed corresponds to the idle Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ and auxiliary heating if your vehicle is
speed. ing parameters: equipped with auxiliary heating.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ R Gradient
tions are met: & WARNING Risk of injury from fuel
R Temperature
R Drive program E is selected. R Height Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your
health
R The speed is within a suitable range. R Speed
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
R The course of the road is suitable, e.g. no R Obstacle detection
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
steep uphill or downhill gradients. R Operating condition of the engine # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
R You are no longer depressing the accelerator
# Keep children away from fuel.
or brake pedal.
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have If you or other people come into contact with
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive fuel, observe the following:
 Driving and parking 167

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with & WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
soap and water. result in damage to the fuel system, the
Vehicles with a diesel engine: engine and the emission control system.
# If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash # Only refuel using premium-grade unlea‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of ded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an
attention immediately. pure diesel fuel. equivalent specification.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ While the engine is running, component
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ parts in the exhaust system may overheat Fuel of this specification may contain up to
ing. without warning. 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use
# Never refuel using petrol. with E10 fuel.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. Do not refuel using:
R Diesel
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel R E85, E100
to electrostatic charge Fuel that does not conform to the required R Petrol containing methanol (M15, M30,
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and quality can lead to increased wear as well as M85, M100)
thereby ignite fuel vapours. damage to the engine and exhaust system. R Petrol with additives containing metal
# Touch the metal vehicle body before # Only use the fuel recommended.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
opening the fuel filler cap or touching
the pump nozzle.
# Do not switch the ignition on.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
This discharges any electrostatic charge that Vehicles with a petrol engine:
may have built up.
168 Driving and parking

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ * NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank, other‐
cles with a petrol engine. wise the fuel system may be damaged.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could # Do not switch on the ignition if you # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
result in damage to the fuel system, the accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. nozzle switches off.
engine and the emission control system. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys‐
tem. Even small amounts of the wrong * NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank, other‐
# Only refuel using diesel fuel that con‐
fuel could result in damage to the fuel wise fuel may spay out when you remove
forms to European standard EN 590, or system and the engine. Notify a quali‐
an equivalent specification. the pump nozzle.
fied specialist workshop and have the
# Vehicles with diesel particulate fil‐ fuel tank and fuel lines drained com‐ # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
ters: in countries outside the EU, only pletely. nozzle switches off.
use low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul‐
phur content of under 50 ppm. Requirement:
* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi‐
Do not use the following: The vehicle must be unlocked.
cles with a diesel engine.
R Petrol % Do not get into the vehicle again during the
# Do not switch on the ignition if you refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
R Marine diesel accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. charge could build up again.
R Heating oil Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys‐
tem. Even small amounts of the wrong Observe the notes on operating fluids
R Bio-diesel (→ page 425).
fuel could result in damage to the fuel
R Vegetable oil system and the engine. The repair costs
R Paraffin are high. Notify a qualified specialist
R Kerosene workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
 Driving and parking 169

Refuelling # Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and AdBlue® (diesel engine vehicles only)
remove it.
Notes on AdBlue®
# Insert the fuel filler cap into holder 2.

# Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel * NOTE When you open the AdBlue® tank,
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and small amounts of ammonia vapour may
refuel. escape.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
# Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐
lated areas.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel fill‐
# Do not let AdBlue® come into contact
ing pumps. with skin, eyes or clothes.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the # Keep AdBlue® away from children.
fuel tank is completely empty, refuel with at
least 5 litres of diesel. * NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue®.
If AdBlue® is swallowed:
1 Fuel filler flap # Immediately rinse out your mouth thor‐

2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap oughly.

3 Tyre pressure table # Drink plenty of water.

4 QR code for rescue card # Seek medical attention immediately.

5 Fuel type
AdBlue® is a fluid urea solution for exhaust gas
# Press fuel filler flap 1. aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the
170 Driving and parking

exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, Topping up AdBlue® Requirements:

only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. The following announcements appear succes‐
AdBlue® is characterised by the following: * NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® in sively in the multifunction display when the
the fuel AdBlue® tank requires refuelling.
R non-toxic
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the R Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The
R colourless and odourless
fuel tank. AdBlue® in the tank is at reserve level.
R non-flammable
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® R Refill AdBlue No start in XXX mi. You can still
AdBlue® may be topped up by fast service at a tank. drive the vehicle over the distance shown.
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- Top up AdBlue® as soon as possible.
Benz Service Centre.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.
R Refill AdBlue Start not possible. The vehicle
AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from can no longer be started.
* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte‐
AdBlue® filling pumps.
rior due to AdBlue® leakage The vehicle must be unlocked.
Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified
specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz # After topping up, carefully close the
Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue® refill container.
AdBlue® refill canisters or AdBlue® refill bottles. # Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers
% Ensure the connection between the refill permanently in the vehicle.
container and vehicle filler neck does not
drip.
 Driving and parking 171

Opening the AdBlue® filler cap Preparing the AdBlue® refill canister Topping up AdBlue®

# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canis‐ # Screw disposable hose 1 onto the filler
ter 2. neck of the vehicle until finger-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the opening # Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 2.
of AdBlue® refill canister 2 until finger-tight. The filling process stops when the AdBlue®
tank is completely full.
# Press fuel filler flap 1. AdBlue® refill canister 2 can be removed
# Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and when it has been only partially emptied.
remove it. # Unscrew and close disposable hose 1 and
AdBlue® refill canister 2 in reverse order.
# After topping up the AdBlue® tank, switch on
the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
172 Driving and parking

# Start the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury * NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the driv‐
The display message in the instrument clus‐ due to children left unattended in the etrain caused by the vehicle rolling away
ter goes out. vehicle
% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers per‐ # Always properly secure the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐ against rolling away.
manently in the vehicle. cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
Parking R Releasing the parking brake.
Switching off the vehicle with the start/stop R Shifting the automatic transmission out
button of park position j or shifting the manual
transmission into neutral.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot R Starting the engine.
exhaust system parts
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or ment.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
# Never leave children and animals unat‐
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow. tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot the key with you and lock the vehicle.
vehicle components. This also applies to mobile phones if the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
# In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
function is activated via the Mercedes # On uphill or downhill inclines, turn the front
land or harvested grain fields. connect me web app. wheels towards the kerb.
 Driving and parking 173

# Vehicles with manual transmission: & WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment
Engage first 1 or reverse gear k. when opening the garage door using the
# Apply the electric parking brake. garage door opener
# Press button 1 once.
When you operate or program the garage
% When you switch off the vehicle, you can still door with the integrated garage door opener,
operate the side windows and the panoramic persons in the range of movement of the
sliding sunroof for five minutes. garage door can become trapped or struck
by the garage door.
Garage door opener # When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
Programming buttons for the garage door is within the sweep of the garage door.
opener
Prior to programming a garage door opener, park
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning the vehicle outside the garage and switch off the
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust engine.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
these exhaust gases causes poisoning. wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
# Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
lation. cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
174 Driving and parking

# Point remote control 5 at a distance of R The vehicle as well as persons and objects, # Press previously programmed button 1, 2
1 cm to 8 cm towards buttons 1, 2 or 3. are located outside the sweep of the garage or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control door. When the door closes, programming is com‐
5 until: pleted.
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ % Please also read the operating instructions
uously. Programming is complete. for the garage door drive.
R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ Troubleshooting when programming the
gramming was successful. Additionally, remote control
synchronisation of the rolling code with
the garage door system must also take
place.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the garage door drive

is not included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
# Press the programming button on the door # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
Requirements: drive unit. control 5 is supported.
R The garage door system uses a rolling code. Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or exterior gate drive.
 Driving and parking 175

# Hold remote control 5 at various angles at Opening or closing the garage door the previously pressed button again until the
a distance between 1 cm to 8 cm in front of garage door opens or closes.
the inside rearview mirror. You should test Requirement:
every position for at least 25 seconds before The corresponding button is programmed to Clearing the garage door opener memory
trying another position. operate the garage door.
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
# Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
# Align the aerial line of the garage door
opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000
466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277. # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
R On the Internet at http://
the garage door opens or closes. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
www.homelink.com.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after buttons 1 and 3.
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
176 Driving and parking

Radio equipment approval numbers for the R Switzerland: CE In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
garage door opener R South Africa: TA-2015/1386 ment.
R Egypt: TAC.2511151293.WIR
R Turkey: not required # Never leave children and animals unat‐
R Andorra: CE tended in the vehicle.
R United Arab Emirates: ER41849/15
R Australia: R-NZ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
R United States: NZLMUAHL5
R Barbados: MED1578 the key with you and lock the vehicle.
R Chile: 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
This also applies to mobile phones if the
Electric parking brake "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
R European Union: CE function is activated via the Mercedes
Automatically applying the electric parking
R Gibraltar: CE
brake connect me web app.
R Iceland: CE
Vehicles with manual transmission:
R Jordan: TRC/LPD/2015/299 & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the The electric parking brake is applied while the
R Canada: 4112A-MUAHL5 vehicle is being kept stationary by the HOLD
vehicle
R Kuwait: CE function if one of the following conditions are
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐ fulfilled:
R Liechtenstein: CE cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
R The engine is switched off.
R Mexico: RCPGEMU15-0448 motion, for example by:
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
R Monaco: CE R Releasing the parking brake.
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
R New Zealand: R-NZ R Shifting the automatic transmission out
driver's door is opened.
of park position j or shifting the manual
R Norway: CE R There is a system malfunction.
transmission into neutral.
R Russian Federation: not required R The power supply is insufficient.
R Starting the engine.
R Saudi Arabia: TA 10525 R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
 Driving and parking 177

When the electric parking brake is applied, R Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle station‐ The electric parking brake is released when the
the ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru‐ ary. following conditions are fulfilled:
ment cluster. R The driver's door is closed.
This is only the case if one of the following con‐
The electric parking brake is not automatically ditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is running.
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
R The engine is switched off. R A gear has been selected, you release the
start/stop function.
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator
Vehicles with automatic transmission: pedal.
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐ driver's door is opened. R When the reverse gear k is selected, the
mission is in position j and one of the follow‐ boot lid must be closed.
R There is a system malfunction.
ing conditions is fulfilled:
R The power supply is insufficient. If the electric parking brake is released,
R The engine is switched off.
R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. the ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the ter goes out.
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the When the electric parking brake is applied,
driver's door is opened. Vehicles with automatic transmission:
the ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster. The electric parking brake is released when the
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the following conditions are fulfilled:
electric parking brake. The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO R The engine is running.
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also engaged: start/stop function. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
R The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the Releasing the electric parking brake auto‐
matically R The transmission is in position h or k and
vehicle to a standstill.
Vehicles with manual transmission: you depress the accelerator pedal or you
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ shift from transmission position j to h or
tionary. k.
178 Driving and parking

R If the transmission is in position k, the boot Applying or releasing the electric parking # Pull handle 1.
lid must be closed. brake manually The ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐ Emergency braking
ing conditions must be fulfilled: # Press and hold handle 1.
R The driver's door is closed. When the vehicle has been braked to a
R You move the transmission out of transmis‐ standstill:
sion position j or you have previously R The electric parking brake is applied.
driven faster than 3 km/h. R The ! indicator lamp appears in the
R If the transmission is in position k, the boot instrument cluster.
lid must be closed.
If the electric parking brake is released, Parking up the vehicle
the ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ R If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
ter goes out. than four weeks, damage may occur to the
battery.
R If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
# To apply: push handle 1. than six weeks, it may suffer damage as a
The ! indicator lamp appears in the result of lack of use.
instrument cluster. R Information on parking up your vehicle can
# To release: switch on the ignition. be obtained at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
 Driving and parking 179

Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the high- Exceeding the vehicle's displayed period out of Driving and driving safety systems
voltage battery in the separate Owner's Manual. use may cause inconvenience, i.e. it cannot be
guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably Driving systems and your responsibility
start the engine. Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
Standby mode
The starter battery must be charged in the fol‐ which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu‐
Standby mode function lowing situations: vring the vehicle. The driving systems are aids
Standby mode is characterised by the following: R the vehicle's period out of use must be
and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay
extended. attention to the traffic conditions at all times
R the vehicle can be parked over a long period
and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the
of time without losing power. R a message appears in the multimedia system limitations regarding the safe use of these sys‐
R the vehicle battery is preserved. display explaining that the battery charge is tems.
R the maximum period out of use is displayed insufficient for standby mode.
in the multimedia system display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated Function of the radar sensors
R functions such as interior protection or tow- when the ignition is switched on.
away protection are not available. Some driving and driving safety systems use
Activating or deactivating standby mode radar sensors to monitor the area in front of,
R the connection to online services is interrup‐ Multimedia system: behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the
ted. , Vehicle . î Vehicle set- vehicle's equipment).
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby tings . Standby mode Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar
mode can be activated or deactivated using the # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
multimedia system: When you activate the function, a prompt and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these
R the engine is switched off. appears. parts free of dirt, ice and slush . The sensors
must not be covered, for example by bicycle
R the ignition is switched on. # Select Yes.
racks, overhanging loads or radar-reflecting
Standby mode is activated. stickers. Following an impact and in the event of
180 Driving and parking

associated damage, which may not be visible, to R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Functions of ABS (anti-lock braking system)
the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function (→ page 184)
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe‐ ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ing situations:
cialist workshop. The driver assistance system (→ page 181)
may no longer work properly. R During braking, the wheels are prevented
R DRIVE PILOT (→ page 200) from blocking, e.g. due to maximum full-stop
R HOLD function (→ page 203) braking or insufficient traction of the tyres.
Overview of driving systems and driving
Steering Pilot (→ page 200) R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
safety systems R
R Limiter (→ page 190) R ABS is active from speeds of approx.
In this section, you will find information about 8 km/h.
the following driving systems and driving safety R Parking Pilot (→ page 217)
systems: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 208) If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
R 360° Camera (→ page 214) pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
R Reversing camera (→ page 211) pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) R Cruise control (→ page 190) conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
(→ page 180) extra care while driving.
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 193) (→ page 232) System limits
R Adaptive brake lights (→ page 190) R Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 229) ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
R AIR BODY CONTROL (→ page 205) malfunction has occurred and the yellow !
R Active Brake Assist (→ page 185) ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 234)
instrument cluster after the engine is started.
R ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 228)
R BAS (Brake Assist System) (→ page 181)
R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (→ page 205)
 Driving and parking 181

Function of BAS (Brake Assist System) Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐ R When braking.
gram) R Vehicles with trailer hitch: In trailer opera‐
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is trailer combination begins to sway from side
tem) malfunctioning to side.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry R In strong sidewinds when you are driving
may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other faster than 80 km/h.
tion. driving safety systems are switched off.
# Depress the brake pedal with full force
ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in
# Drive on carefully. the following ways:
in emergency braking situations. ABS
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe‐ R One or more wheels are braked.
prevents the wheels from locking.
cialist workshop. R The engine output is adapted according to
BAS supports your emergency braking situation the situation.
with additional brake force. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
deactivated ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn‐
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
activated: If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry cluster:
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ out vehicle stabilisation. R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
sure. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Stabilisation of
R BAS can shorten the braking distance. following situations. the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. active.
ESP® monitors and improves driving stability and R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
The brakes will function as usual once you traction, particularly in the following situations:
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. R The drive wheels could spin.
R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads.
182 Driving and parking

R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. R In deep snow ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
R On sand or gravel ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
% Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still
assisted by ESP® when braking. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
intervening in the following ways:
ESP® is intervening if the ESP® ÷ warning action which provides better grip.
R The drive wheels are braked individually if
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster: ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ they spin.
R Do not deactivate ESP®. ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as or wheels with traction.
is necessary. If the ESP® ÷ warning lamp lights up continu‐
ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Influence of drive programs on ESP®
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions. Observe any information which may be displayed The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐
in the instrument cluster: ferent weather and road conditions as well as
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to the driver's preferred driving style. You can
R Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 493)
improve traction: select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC
R Display messages (→ page 437) SELECT switch.
R When using snow chains
 Driving and parking 183

ESP® characteristics per drive program

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

C (Comfort) ESP® Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balance
E (Economy) between traction and stability.
Select drive program E or C in difficult road con‐
ditions, such as in snow or ice, or when the road
is wet from rain.
S (Sport) ESP® Sport This drive program continues to offer stability
but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐
siastic driver a more active driving style.
Only select drive program S in good road condi‐
tions, for example on dry carriageways and clear
stretches of road.
S+ (Sport Plus) ESP® Sport Plus The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer‐
ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows
a more active driving style to be adopted.
Only select drive program S+ in good road con‐
ditions, for example on dry carriageways and
clear stretches of road.
184 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ‐ R Slight swaying is reduced by means of a tar‐
bility Program) ual brake application on one side. geted, individual brake application on one
side.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . k Assistance . ESP Functions of ESP® trailer stabilisation R In the event of intense swaying, the engine
output is also reduced and all wheels are
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. braked.
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn‐ and weather conditions ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument In poor road and weather conditions, the may not function if:
cluster. trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of R The trailer is not connected correctly or is
Observe the information on warning lamps and the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with not detected properly by the vehicle.
display messages which may be shown in the a high centre of gravity may tip over before
instrument cluster. ESP® detects this.
Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis‐
# Always adapt your driving style to suit tribution)
Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist the current road and weather condi‐
tions. EBD is characterised by the following:
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise on the rear wheels.
cle in the lane: your vehicle if the trailer begins to sway from R Improved driving stability when braking,
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle side to side: especially on bends.
speeds between 80 km/h and 200 km/h R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
when driving straight ahead or cornering speeds of 65 km/h.
slightly.
 Driving and parking 185

Function of Active Brake Assist If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Active Brake Assist consists of: ing, situation-dependent braking assistance Assist alone.
R Distance warning function occurs. This increases the brake pressure up to
maximum full-stop braking if necessary.
# Be ready to brake and take evasive
R Autonomous braking function
action if necessary.
R Situation-dependent braking assistance If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
R Vehicles with the Driving Assistance
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
package: Evasive Steering Assist additional preventive measures for occupant Assist.
protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated, if
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the the vehicle is equipped with these. The individual subfunctions are available in
risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or the following speed ranges:
to reduce the effects of such a collision. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by Distance warning function
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ limited detection performance of Active The distance warning function issues a warning
sion, you will be warned visually and acousti‐ Brake Assist at speeds:
cally. Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several
If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn‐ identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ seconds the distance maintained to the vehi‐
ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐ tions. cle travelling in front is insufficient for the
cal situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: driven speed. The distance warning lamp
In especially critical situations, Active Brake then lights up in the instrument cluster ·.
R give an unnecessary warning or brake the
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle
vehicle
In this case, the visual and acoustic warning is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian.
R not give a warning or not brake the vehi‐ An intermittent warning tone sounds and the
occurs simultaneously with the braking applica‐
cle. distance warning lamp lights up in the instru‐
tion.
ment cluster ·.
186 Driving and parking

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐

ded it is safe to do so.

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 250 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h
 Driving and parking 187

Autonomous braking function

The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 50 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 200 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h

Situation-dependent braking assistance

Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 250 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h
188 Driving and parking

Cancelling a brake application of Active R Can be activated by an abrupt steering move‐ # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
Brake Assist ment during a swerving manoeuvre. fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
You can cancel a brake application of Active R Can assist during swerving and straightening Steering Assist alone.
Brake Assist at any time by: of the vehicle. # Be ready to brake and take evasive
R Depressing the accelerator pedal fully. R Can react from a speed of approximately action, if necessary.
R Releasing the brake pedal. 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately # Prevent the assistance by actively steer‐
70 km/h. ing in non-critical driving situations.
Active Brake Assist cancels the intervention R You can prevent the assistance at any time
when at least one of the following conditions is # Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
by active steering. trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
fulfilled:
cle.
R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. & WARNING Risk of an accident despite
R There is no longer a risk of collision. Evasive Steering Assist Also observe the system limits of Evasive Steer‐
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly ing Assist.
your vehicle. identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ System limits
tions.
Evasive Steering Assist Active Brake Assist may be impaired or may not
In addition, the steering support of Evasive function in the following situations:
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
teristics: avoid a collision. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
R Can detect stationary or crossing pedes‐ glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can: light conditions.
trians.
R give an unnecessary warning or provide
R Can assist the driver with additional steering R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged
assistance or covered.
assistance if it detects a swerving manoeu‐
R not give a warning or not provide assis‐
vre.
tance
 Driving and parking 189

R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar Setting Active Brake Assist # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
source interference, for example strong radar application: late: your selection is retained
reflections in multi-storey car parks. Multimedia system:
when the vehicle is next started.
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Active
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
has been detected and displayed. Brake Assist
application: off:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐ Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐
The system may not react correctly: age: The settings can be made after starting the age: The distance warning function and the
R In complex traffic stations where objects vehicle. autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
cannot always be clearly identified. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: ted. When the vehicle is next started, the
R To pedestrians or vehicles if they move The settings can be made when the ignition is middle setting is automatically selected.
quickly into the sensor detection range. switched on. Vehicles with Driving Assistance pack‐
R To pedestrians who are hidden by other % It is recommended that you always leave age: The distance warning function and the
objects. Active Brake Assist switched on. autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot The moment of warning or intervention can be ted. Evasive Steering Assist is unavailable.
be distinguished from the background. adjusted as follows: When the ignition is next started, the middle
setting is selected automatically and Evasive
R If a pedestrian is not recognised as such, e.g. # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
Steering Assist is available.
due to special clothing or other objects. application: early: your selection is retained
when the vehicle is next started. % When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
R On bends with a tight radius.
æ symbol appears in the assistance
# Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
graphic in the multifunction display.
application: medium: your selection is
retained when the vehicle is next started.
190 Driving and parking

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights The vehicle is braked considerably when moving into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
faster than 50 km/h: Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an
R Brake Assist System (BAS) and Active Brake for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
emergency braking situation:
Assist support you during braking. cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
R by flashing brake lamps ing in lane.
R Brake Assist activates the Adaptive Brake
R by activating the hazard warning lights
Lights. System limitations
Adaptive Brake Lights have the following charac‐ R The brake lamps flash rapidly. Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
teristics: stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
R If you brake sharply at a speed above
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Cruise control and limiter
50 km/h, or if braking is assisted by BAS or Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
Active Brake Assist, the brake lamps flash Function of cruise control tions:
rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi‐ R in traffic situations which require frequent
you with an even more noticeable warning. cle automatically in order to maintain a previ‐ changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
R If you brake sharply to a standstill from a ously stored speed. winding roads
speed above 70 km/h, the hazard warning If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
lights are activated automatically once the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle is stationary. The brake lamps light foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, vehicle could then skid
up again constantly when you depress the cruise control will resume speed regulation back
R when visibility is poor
brake pedal. The hazard warning lights to the stored speed.
switch off automatically when you drive You can operate cruise control with the cruise Function of the limiter
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off control lever. The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To
the hazard warning lights using the hazard reduce the speed swiftly to the set speed, the
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
warning button. limiter applies the brakes automatically.
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
 Driving and parking 191

You can limit the speed as follows: After completion of kickdown, the variable lim‐ note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
R Variable: for speed limits, e.g. in built-up iter is activated again in the following situations: doing so, you will make use of the braking effect
areas. R if the driven speed drops below the stored of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
speed. system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions,
ing and wearing too quickly.
e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted. R if the stored speed is called up.
R if you store a new speed. Requirements:
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limiter
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor Cruise control
Operating cruise control or the variable lim‐
override the laws of physics. It cannot take into iter R Cruise control is selected.
account road, weather or traffic conditions. The R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven‐
limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the & WARNING Risk of accident due to ing.
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle unknown stored speed
speed, for braking in good time and for staying R The driving speed must be at least 20 km/h.
in lane. If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle Variable Limiter
You can operate the variable limiter with the decelerates. R The vehicle has been started.
cruise control lever. You can store any road
If you do not know the stored speed, the R The variable limiter is selected.
speed above 20 km/h. You can also perform
settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
vehicle has been started. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Kickdown
# If the stored speed is not known, store
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is the desired speed again.
switched to passive mode. The Limiter passive
message appears in the multifunction display. Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
192 Driving and parking

# To call up last speed stored 4. # Press and hold the lever: stored speed is
# To deactivate cruise control or variable lim‐ increased 5 or reduced
iter 2. 6 in 1 km/h increments.
or
# Press the lever beyond the pressure point:
stored speed is increased 5 or reduced
6 by 10 km/h.
or
# Press and hold the lever beyond the pressure
point: stored speed is increased 5 or
reduced 6 in 10 km/h increments.
If cruise control or the variable limiter has been
deactivated, the current speed is stored with 5
or 6.
% Vehicles with manual transmission: if the
# To switch between cruise control and varia‐ engine speed is very low, cruise control or
ble limiter 1. the limiter is deactivated. When the engine
R LIM indicator lamp 3 off: cruise control
speed approaches the maximum engine
is selected. speed, or neutral is engaged or the clutch
# Press the lever briefly: stored speed is
R LIM indicator lamp 3 on: the variable increased 5 or reduced 6 by 1 km/h. pedal is depressed for longer than six sec‐
limiter is selected. onds, cruise control is deactivated.
or
# To store current speed 4 (once after start‐
ing the vehicle).
or
 Driving and parking 193

% On vehicles with a segment display in the Shortly before the set speed is reached, it R Assists you in maintaining the distance from
speedometer, the segments extending from appears in the multifunction display. When you the vehicle in front and can bring your vehi‐
the current stored speed to the end of the confirm the message with %, display mes‐ cle to a standstill if necessary.
scale light up. If you have activated the per‐ sages no longer appear until you switch off the R Brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the
manent limiter and a speed is stored, the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again maximum possible braking power. If greater
segments extending up to the stored speed once the vehicle has been restarted. deceleration performance is required, a vis‐
light up. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas‐ ual and acoustic warning is given and you
% If you perform a kickdown, the variable lim‐ sive mode even during kickdown and the driven must then intervene yourself.
iter is switched to passive mode. The varia‐ speed remains below the set speed. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
ble limiter is operational again once the age, Parking Pilot and COMAND Online:
speed drops below the stored speed. Setting the speed limit for winter tyres
Multimedia system: When driving in stop-start traffic, the driver is
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® , Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Win-
supported by an extended, automatic restart
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The in traffic jams.
variable limiter is not deactivated. ter tyres limit
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
When you switch off the vehicle, the last # Select the speed or deactivate the function.
age: Responds in urban speed ranges to sta‐
speed stored is cleared. tionary vehicles (except bicycles, motorcy‐
Permanent limiter Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cles and pedestrians) if conditions are suffi‐
If you wish to limit the speed permanently to a cient to enable detection.
Function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
specific value (e.g. for driving on winter tyres), If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
you can set this speed with the permanent lim‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
iter. R Maintains the set speed and accelerates or an accident nor override the laws of physics.
You do this by limiting the speed to a value decelerates the vehicle if the distance from Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi‐ the vehicle in front permits. account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis‐
media system (→ page 193). tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
194 Driving and parking

responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R If the driven speed drops below the stored
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time age: In conjunction with navigation systems, Dis‐ speed.
and for staying in lane. tance Pilot DISTRONIC prevents prohibited over‐ R If the traffic situation in the overtaking lane
If all activation conditions are met, you can acti‐ taking on the right at speeds over 80 km/h in permits a safe lane change.
vate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC during a journey right-hand traffic and overtaking on the left in
or while stationary. When Distance Pilot left-hand traffic on motorways and high-speed Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package
DISTRONIC is activated, a speed is stored which major roads. and Traffic Sign Assist: Distance Pilot
the driver can increase or reduce at any time. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses information from DISTRONIC also has the Speed Limit Pilot func‐
The speed can be adjusted between 20 km/h the navigation system to respond to certain traf‐ tion. This function can be configured in the mul‐
and 200 km/h. fic situations: timedia system. If a change in the speed limit is
detected and Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activa‐
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R Roundabouts ted, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC assumes this new
age: The speed can be adjusted between R T junctions speed.
20 km/h and 210 km/h.
R Motorway exits The driven speed is adapted when the vehicle is
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, level with the traffic signs. In the case of signs
R Tollbooth
Parking Pilot and COMAND Online: Up to 30 indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is
seconds after stopping, the vehicle automatically Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection adapted beforehand. The speed limit display in
follows the vehicle ahead without the interven‐ range in these situations, Distance Pilot the Instrument Display is always updated when
tion of the driver. This is only possible if the vehi‐ DISTRONIC temporarily maintains the current the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.
cle is travelling on a motorway or a high-speed driving speed and does not accelerate.
major road. If an obstacle is detected in front of If the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been put
If you activate the turn signal indicator to change into passive mode by pressing the accelerator
the vehicle during the driving-off procedure, a lanes, the vehicle will accelerate more briskly to
takeover warning is given. Acceleration is pedal, only speed limits which are higher than
the set speed under the following conditions: the set speed are adopted.
reduced, the driver is given a visual and acoustic
warning and must stop the vehicle before reach‐ R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
ing the obstacle or take evasive action. R If the driving speed is higher than 70 km/h.
 Driving and parking 195

Pulling the cruise control lever will set the dis‐ The system may be impaired or may not function Tips
played speed limit as the speed, provided that: in the following situations: Pay particular attention in the following traffic
R The Speed Limit Pilot has been activated in R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is situations. In such situations, brake if necessary.
the multimedia system and glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is then deactivated:
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been activa‐ light conditions. R When cornering, entering and exiting a bend.
ted. R If the windscreen in the area of the camera is R When not driving in the centre of the lane.
dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
If no speed limit is displayed when the lever is R When other vehicles are changing lane.
operated, the speed set by the driver is adopted. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R If there are narrow vehicles.
Drive program Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the fol‐ R If there are obstacles and stationary vehi‐
The DYNAMIC SELECT switch allows you to lowing situations: cles.
change the driving style of Distance Pilot R In road and traffic conditions which do not R If there are crossing vehicles, pedestrians,
DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. motorcyclists or cyclists.
is selected, the driving characteristics can be in heavy traffic or on winding roads.
geared towards fuel economy, comfort or R On slippery roads. Braking or accelerating
dynamic performance (→ page 160). can cause the drive wheels to lose traction
System limits and the vehicle could then skid.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active in the R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
0 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. heavy rain or snow.
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R In multi-storey car parks or at toll stations.
age: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active in the R On roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi‐
0 km/h to 210 km/h speed range. ents.
196 Driving and parking

Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the the ç symbol is displayed cyclically when the
assistance graphic and in the speedometer vehicle is ready to pull away.
Vehicles with Speed Limit Pilot: If a speed
limit is automatically adopted, this is shown as
the stored speed with the ê symbol.
Operating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection

function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
impaired
1 Speed of vehicle ahead
2 Stored speed The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not
react:
1 Vehicle ahead Displays in the multifunction display R to people or animals
2 Distance indicator When activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or
when changing the stored speed, the new stored R to stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
3 Set specified distance
speed is shown for around five seconds in the stopped or parked vehicles (vehicles with‐
4 Own vehicle out the Driving Assistance Package)
ç multifunction display 70 km/h.
R to stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active, the set
stored speed is displayed next to the ç sym‐ stopped or parked vehicles, if conditions
bol. When distance control is active, the symbol are not sufficient to enable detection
is shown in green. (vehicles with the Driving Assistance
Package)
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
age: On motorways or high-speed major roads
 Driving and parking 197

As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactiva‐
neither give warnings nor intervene in such ficient deceleration by Distance Pilot ted with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
situations. DISTRONIC vehicle occupant or from outside the
# Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ vehicle.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehi‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all cle with up to 50% of the maximum possible R If the electrics in the engine compart‐
times. braking power. If this deceleration is not suf‐ ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐
ficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you pered with.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ with a visual and acoustic warning. R If the battery is disconnected.
ted detectability of road users and traffic # Apply the brakes yourself in these situa‐ R If the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a
situations tions and try to take evasive action. vehicle occupant.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always # Always deactivate Distance Pilot
clearly identify other road users and complex & WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis‐ DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
traffic situations. tance Pilot DISTRONIC still being activa‐ prevent it from rolling away before you
In these conditions, Distance Pilot ted when you leave the driver's seat leave the driver's seat.
DISTRONIC may: If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
R give an unnecessary warning and then is being braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of accident due to
brake the vehicle only, it can roll away in the following situa‐ unknown stored speed
R neither give a warning nor intervene tions:
If you call up the stored speed and this is
R accelerate or brake unexpectedly R If there is a malfunction in the system or
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
in the power supply. decelerates.
# Continue driving with care and be ready
to brake, particularly if Distance Pilot If you do not know the stored speed, the
DISTRONIC warns you. vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
198 Driving and parking

# Take into account the traffic situation Always carefully observe the traffic condi‐ Requirements:
before calling up the stored speed. tions and be ready to brake at all times. R The vehicle has been started.

# If the stored speed is not known, store R The electric parking brake is released.
the desired speed again. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis‐ R Parking Pilot is not being used to park the
tance Pilot DISTRONIC pulling away auto‐ vehicle or to exit from a parking space.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unex‐ matically R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
pected acceleration by Distance Pilot If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC performs an R The transmission is in position h.
DISTRONIC automatic driving-off procedure, the vehicle R The driver's door, front passenger door and
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer may accelerate unexpectedly.
the rear doors are closed.
detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpect‐ Where necessary, brake the vehicle yourself R The engine bonnet is closed.
edly accelerate to the speed stored. and take evasive action.
R This speed may be too high for a filter
lane or a slip road. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Speed
R If driving in the right lane, this speed may Limit Pilot adapting the vehicle's speed
be so high that you pass vehicles driving The speed adopted by the Speed Limit Pilot
on the left (in countries where traffic may be too high or incorrect in some individ‐
drives on the right). ual cases, such as:
R If driving in the left lane, this speed may R in the wet or in fog
be so high that you pass vehicles driving
R when towing a trailer
on the right (in countries where traffic
drives on the left). Ensure that the driven speed complies with
traffic regulations.
 Driving and parking 199

# To call up stored speed 3.

# Or On vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package and Traffic Sign Assist: If Speed
Limit Pilot in the multimedia system and Dis‐
tance Pilot DISTRONIC are activated, the dis‐
played speed limit is adopted, if available 3.
# To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 2.

# If the LIM indicator lamp is lit: to select Dis‐ # To reduce 6 or increase 7 the specified
tance Pilot DISTRONIC 1. distance from the vehicle in front.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Pulling away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
# To store current speed 3. Requirement
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the A speed has been previously stored.
vehicle in front, but only up to the stored
# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
speed.
# Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
or # To increase 4 or reduce 5 the speed. you 3.
200 Driving and parking

or Collision warning R Speed Limit Pilot (→ page 193)

# Accelerate briefly. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is unable to suffi‐
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed ciently decelerate the vehicle in order to prevent Steering Pilot
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is it from approaching the vehicle in front, you will
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to be warned visually and acoustically. An intermit‐ Function of Steering Pilot
the set speed. tent warning tone will then sound and the dis‐ Steering Pilot is only available for vehicles
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru‐ with the Driving Assistance Package.
Adopting the speed limit as the stored speed ment cluster. R Steering Pilot is operational at speeds up to
Requirements: # Brake immediately in order to increase the 210 km/h and helps you to stay in the centre
R Speed Limit Pilot is activated in the multime‐ distance from the vehicle in front. of the lane by means of moderate steering
dia system (→ page 231). or interventions.
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. # Take evasive action provided it is safe to do R It uses as a reference the vehicle in front or
R The system detects a traffic sign indicating a so. the lane markings, depending on the driven
speed limit. speed.
R Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to
# Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Function of DRIVE PILOT
you 3. keep your hands on the steering wheel at all
The DRIVE PILOT function is available only times so that you are able to intervene at any
The displayed speed limit is adopted as the
on vehicles with the Driving Assistance time to correct the course of the vehicle and
stored speed. Your vehicle adapts its speed
package. keep it in lane.
to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to
the stored speed. If Speed Limit Pilot is acti‐ DRIVE PILOT includes the following driving and R Steering Pilot can be overridden at any time
vated, any detected changes in the speed driving safety systems: by steering the vehicle yourself.
limit are adopted by the system. R Steering Pilot with Active Lane Change Assist R If the system detects that there are no lane
(→ page 200) markings, it uses the vehicle ahead as a ref‐
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 193) erence up to a speed of 130 km/h.
 Driving and parking 201

R When the system is actively steering, the R If the windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam‐ R When towing a trailer.
è symbol is shown in green in the multi‐ aged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in R If you actively change lane without switching
function display. the vicinity of the camera. on the turn signal indicator.
Steering Pilot system limits R If no, or several, unclear lane markings are R If you switch on the turn signal indicator and
Steering Pilot has a limited steering torque for present for one lane, e.g. in a construction the conditions for activating Active Lane
lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering area. Change Assist are not fulfilled.
intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or
in the lane. covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Notes on Steering Pilot
Steering Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible
If detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
is impaired, Steering Pilot switches to passive small and the lane markings thus cannot be cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
mode. The system provides no support in this detected. ing in lane. Before changing lanes, make sure
case. During the transition from the active to R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. that the neighbouring lane is free (shoulder
passive status the è symbol is shown as lanes branch off, cross one another or view).
enlarged and flashes yellow. Once the system is merge.
passive the è symbol is greyed out in the Active Lane Change Assist
multifunction display. R If the road is narrow and winding.
% The availability of the following function is
The system may be impaired or may not function R If there are highly variable shade conditions country-dependent.
in the following situations: on the road.
Steering Pilot remains active even if the turn sig‐
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
R If there are obstacles such as traffic guid‐ nal indicator is switched on. Steering Pilot then
cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, ance posts on the lane or projecting out into assists the driver when changing lanes by apply‐
rain, fog or spray. the lane. ing steering torques to initiate the lane change.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, The system does not provide assistance in the
direct sunlight or reflection from other vehi‐ following conditions:
cles (e.g. if the road surface is wet). R On very sharp bends.
202 Driving and parking

Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all message to remind you to take control of the
the following conditions are met: vehicle.
R You are driving on a motorway or high-speed The warning message does not appear or disap‐
multi-lane major road with multiple lanes in pears if one of the following conditions are met:
the direction of travel. R The driver steers the vehicle.
R The neighbouring lane is free and separated R The driver presses a steering wheel button or
by a broken lane marking. operates Touch Control.
R The driven speed is between 80 km/h and
180 km/h. Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continues to ignore the acoustic
R The turn signal indicator is switched on for Steering and contact detection warning, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC reduces the
longer than two seconds. Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to keep speed. If the driver still does not respond, the
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change your hands on the steering wheel at all times so vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Assist may be interrupted. If an interruption that you are able to intervene at any time to cor‐ The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
occurs, display 1 appears in the multifunction rect the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. time by performing one of the following actions:
display along with a warning tone prompting you The driver must expect a change from active to
passive mode or vice versa at any time. R Steering
to take control of the vehicle.
If you are not steering yourself or if you take R Braking or accelerating
your hands off the steering wheel for a pro‐ R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat‐
longed period of time, the system will, depend‐ ing Touch Control
ing on the situation, first alert you with a visual R Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot or
warning. 1 appears in the multifunction display. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
If you are still not steering the vehicle yourself or
if you have not taken hold of the steering wheel, The driver must be ready to take control of the
a warning tone sounds in addition to the warning vehicle at any time.
 Driving and parking 203

Activating Steering Pilot Information on Hill Start Assist System limits

The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Requirements: Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle when pulling
R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven‐ away on a hill under the following conditions: Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
ing. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be activated. The transmission is in position h or k. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being active when you
R The electric parking brake is released.
leave the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
caused by the vehicle rolling away function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away. R If there is a malfunction in the system or

# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from

in the power supply.
the brake pedal to the accelerator R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐ depressing the accelerator pedal or the
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
R If the electrics in the engine compart‐
ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐
HOLD function pered with.
HOLD function R If the battery is disconnected.
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
# Always deactivate the HOLD function
# If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2. and secure the vehicle against rolling
pedal, such as when pulling away on steep
slopes. away before leaving the vehicle.
204 Driving and parking

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking Activating the HOLD function In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
# Depress the brake pedal and after a short the transmission position j or by the electric
If Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot time depress further until the ë display parking brake:
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activa‐ appears in the multifunction display. R When the seat belt is unfastened and the
ted, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ driver's door is opened.
# Release the brake pedal.
tain situations.
R When the engine is switched off.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Deactivating the HOLD function
these systems in the following or similar sit‐ # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. R When there is a malfunction in the system or
uations: if the power supply is insufficient.
or
# During towing # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ Vehicles with manual transmission:
# In a car wash play disappears from the multifunction dis‐ The Brake immediately message may also
play. appear in the multifunction display:
Requirements: The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
R The vehicle is stationary. ing situations: until the warning message disappears.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been activa‐ The HOLD function is deactivated.
the driver's side is fastened. ted.
R The engine is running or has been automati‐ A horn sounds at regular intervals if you turn off
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the engine, remove your seat belt and open the
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop When transmission position j is selected.
function. driver's door while the HOLD function is activa‐
R When the vehicle is secured with the electric ted. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the horn
R The electric parking brake is released. tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be
parking brake.
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not activated. locked until you have deactivated the HOLD
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: function.
The transmission is in position h, k or i.
 Driving and parking 205

% Once you have switched off the engine, you R The drive program selected reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually
cannot restart the engine until you have R Vehicle load adjusting the vehicle level is also available.
deactivated the HOLD function. AIR BODY CONTROL comprises:
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch. R Air suspension with variable spring rate
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL R Automatic level control system
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL has the following AIR BODY CONTROL R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
characteristics: consumption
R Variable damping characteristics
AIR BODY CONTROL function
R Manual level adjustment
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
R Continual adjustment of the damping forces with variable damping for improved driving com‐ R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
The damping characteristics adapt to the current fort. The all-round level control system ensures constant damping force adjustment)
operating and driving situation. the best possible suspension and constant R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered
and is affected by the following factors: automatically to improve driving safety and to
R The road surface conditions
206 Driving and parking

Available suspension settings

Drive program Characteristics

C R Comfortable suspension tuning
(Comfort) R Normal level
R When driving at speeds above 125 km/h the vehicle is lowered by 15 mm
R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again
E R Comfortable suspension tuning
(Economy) R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
S R Firmer suspension tuning
(Sport) R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
S+ R Even firmer suspension tuning
(Sport Plus) R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
 Driving and parking 207

Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ Raising the vehicle
cle lowering
& WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle level is too high Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or
level control system: When you unload lug‐
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐ gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first
ing characteristics may be impaired due to rises slightly and then returns to the set level
the higher vehicle centre of gravity. shortly afterwards.
The vehicle may tip over more quickly on a You or anyone else in the vicinity of the
bend, for example. wheel arches or the underbody could thus
# Always select as low a vehicle level as become trapped.
possible and adapt your driving style The vehicle can also be lowered after being
accordingly. locked.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ that nobody is in the vicinity of the
cle lowering wheel arches or the underbody.
When lowering the vehicle, other people
could become trapped if their limbs are Requirements: # Press button 1.
between the vehicle body and the tyres or R The vehicle's engine must be switched on. Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
underneath the vehicle. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than The vehicle is raised by 25 mm compared to
# Make sure no one is underneath the 60 km/h. the normal level.
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of Your selection is saved.
the wheel arches when you lower the
vehicle.
208 Driving and parking

The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ Parking Assist PARKTRONIC the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and
uations: parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Functions of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R When driving faster than 100 km/h. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
R When driving between 80 km/h and tone sounds from a distance of approximately
100 km/h for approximately three minutes. 0.3 m to an obstacle. A continuous tone sounds
from a distance of approximately 0.2 m. You can
R After selecting a drive program using the
set the warning tone in the multimedia system
DYNAMIC SELECT switch. so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last of approximately 1.0 m (→ page 211).
active drive program. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Lowering the vehicle Parking Pilot is unavailable.
# Press button 1. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic multimedia system
adjusted to the height of the last active drive parking assistance system with ultrasound. It If Parking Pilot is deactivated and an obstacle is
program. monitors the area around your vehicle using six detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up win‐
sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors dow for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears
in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system at speeds up to
indicates visually and audibly the distance approximately 10 km/h.
between your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring and parking remains with you. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
 Driving and parking 209

System limitations the sensors in the front and rear bumper must
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ detect the object while you are driving past it.
rily take into account the following obstacles: During the parking procedure or manoeuvring,
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.
persons, animals or objects. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
warning is issued. The lateral segments light up
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading orange or red, depending on the distance to the
ramps of lorries. obstacle.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Vehicles with Parking Pilot and reversing cam‐ Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Colour Lateral distance in cm
era Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. Red < 30
Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist Orange 30 - 60
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone
when you establish an electrical connection In order for lateral front or rear segments to be
between your vehicle and a trailer. displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance
of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the
Passive side impact protection vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all
Passive side impact protection is an additional of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which played.
warns the driver about obstacles at the side of
the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
Vehicles with Parking Pilot and 360° Camera are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object to be detected,
210 Driving and parking

System limitations
The system limitations for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro‐
tection.
Objects placed next to the vehicle, or pedes‐
trians who approach the side of the vehicle will
not be detected.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects

1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐ at close range
tional in the front and rear
2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
and can also warn the driver about obstacles certain objects at close range.
at the side of the vehicle # When parking the vehicle, pay particular
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange) attention to any objects which are # Press button 2.
and rear (red) above or below the sensors, e.g. flower‐
pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
When you switch off the ignition, the stored objects could otherwise be damaged. button may also be located in the centre
obstacles are deleted. After the engine is restar‐ console.
ted, obstacles must be detected again, before a If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
new warning can be issued. PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit activated when the vehicle is started.
or the é symbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
 Driving and parking 211

Adjusting the warning tones of Parking # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. show the path the vehicle will take with the
Assist PARKTRONIC steering wheel in its current position. This helps
Multimedia system: you to orientate yourself and to avoid obstacles
Reversing camera
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Cam. & when reversing.
Parking Pilot . Set warning tone Function of the reversing camera The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
# Select Warning tone volume. parking remains with you. Make sure that there
# Adjust the value. are no persons, animals or objects in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐
Specifying the starting point for the warning ing in parking spaces.
tones You can select from the following views:
You can specify whether the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence R Normal view
when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐ R Wide-angle view
cle. R Trailer view
# Select Warn early.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout System limitations
You can specify whether the volume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be The reversing camera will not function or will
If you have activated the function in the multime‐ only partially function in the following situations:
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives dia system, the image from reversing camera 1
an audible warning. R If the boot lid or tailgate is open.
is displayed in the multimedia system when
# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones. reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog.
212 Driving and parking

R If the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.

R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐
ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
reversing camera (→ page 374).
R If the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the
reversing camera may be restricted due to addi‐
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. Normal view 5 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
licence plate bracket or bicycle rack). 1 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ imately 1.0 m from the rear area
Vehicles without Parking Pilot imately 4.0 m from the rear area 6 Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
The following camera views are available in the 2 White guide line without turning the steering 7 Bumper
multimedia system: wheel, vehicle width including the outside 8 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
mirrors (static) 0.3 m from the rear area
3 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
4 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
 Driving and parking 213

2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch 0.3 m from the rear area
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch 4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of
Vehicles with Parking Pilot between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
The following camera views are available in the
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist
multimedia system:
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
Wide-angle view tance away (between approximately 0.3 m
and 0.6 m)
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
Normal view If the system fails at the rear:
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will R the rear segments are shown in red when
take at the current steering wheel angle reversing.
(dynamic) R the rear segments are hidden when driv‐
Trailer view 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ ing forwards.
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
214 Driving and parking

When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
displayed in green. stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
the warning display fades out. parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐
ing in parking spaces.
The system evaluates images from the following
cameras:
R Reversing camera
Trailer view R Front camera
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch Views of the 360° Camera
Wide-angle view 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch You can select from different views:

360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
 Driving and parking 215

Top view When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational

and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in grey.
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear:
R the rear segments are shown in red when
1 Wide-angle view, front reversing.
2 Top view with image from the front camera R the rear segments are hidden when driv‐
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
3 Top view with images from the side cameras ing forwards.
take with the steering wheel in its current
in the outside mirrors position If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
4 Wide-angle view, rear 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist the warning display fades out.
5 Top view with image from the reversing cam‐ PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of
era approximately 1.0 m or less
6 Top view with trailer view 3 Your vehicle from above
If the distance to the object lessens, the colour
of the warning display changes 2. From a dis‐
tance of approximately 0.6 m the warning dis‐
play is shown in orange. From a distance of
approximately 0.3 m the warning display is
shown in red.
216 Driving and parking

Guide lines The guide lines in the multimedia system dis‐ On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or
play show the distances to your vehicle. The if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
distances only apply to road level. In trailer standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
mode, the guide lines are shown at the level guide lines and in the display of the generated
of the trailer hitch. images, depending on technical conditions.
System limitations The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
The 360° Camera will not function or will only tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
partially function in the following situations: licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).
R If the doors are open.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
R The side mirrors are folded in. (→ page 374).
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will R If the boot lid or tailgate is open.
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera
take at the current steering wheel angle R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog. The Auto reversing camera function is selected
(dynamic) R If the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. in the multimedia system.
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐ # Engage reverse gear.
face) depending on the current steering ted up. # In the multimedia system, select the desired
wheel angle (dynamic)
R If the vehicle components in which the cam‐ view.
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
eras are fitted are damaged. In this event, Switching reversing camera automatic mode
0.3 m from the rear area
have the camera position and setting on/off
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
% When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum‐ substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
displayed in green. stances. You could otherwise injure others or The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
collide with objects when parking the vehicle. parking remains with you. Make sure that no
 Driving and parking 217

persons, animals or objects etc. are in the # Navigate downwards twice. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking
manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur‐ The Favourites menu appears. direction can be selected as desired. Parking
roundings and be ready to brake at all times. # Select New favourite. Pilot calculates a suitable vehicle path and
Multimedia system: assists you in the parking and exiting procedure.
# Select Vehicle.
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking Vehicles with automatic transmission: Park‐
# Select Camera. ing Pilot changes gear, accelerates, brakes and
Pilot . Auto reversing camera
steers the vehicle.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Parking Pilot Vehicles with manual transmission: Parking
Opening the camera cover of the reversing Function of Parking Pilot Pilot supports you by intervening actively in the
camera Parking Pilot is an electronic parking assistance steering.
Multimedia system: system which uses ultrasound and is automati‐ % The active brake application and automatic
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking cally activated during forward travel. The system gear change is only available on vehicles
Pilot is operational at speeds of up to approximately with automatic transmission.
# Select Open camera cover. 35 km/h. When all the conditions are fulfilled, Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute
the c symbol appears in the multifunction for your attention to the surroundings. The
% The camera cover closes automatically after display and the system automatically searches
some time or after an ignition cycle. responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
for and measures parking spaces on both sides remains with you. Make sure that no persons,
Assigning the camera as a favourite of the vehicle parallel and perpendicular to the animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
You can call up the camera view directly in the direction of travel. If Parking Pilot is activated, range.
multimedia system by assigning it as a favourite. suitable parking spaces are displayed in the mul‐
timedia system. The ë symbol appears in the Parking Pilot is cancelled if, among other things,
# Press the ò button on the touchpad or one of the following actions is carried out:
multifunction display. The arrows show which
controller. side of the road free parking spaces are located. R You switch off Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
The main functions are displayed.
R You switch off Parking Pilot.
218 Driving and parking

R You begin steering. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Do not use Parking Pilot, for example, in the fol‐
R You apply the parking brake. objects located above or below the lowing situations:
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: detection range of Parking Pilot R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or
You engage j. packed snow or in heavy rain.
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, the following situations may R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
R ESP® intervenes.
arise: beyond the vehicle.
Parking Pilot system limitations R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
R Parking Pilot may steer too early.
Objects located above or below the detection uphill gradient.
range of Parking Pilot are not detected when the R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of R If you have installed snow chains.
parking space is being measured. These are also
not taken into account when the parking these objects. Parking Pilot may also display parking spaces
manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
This could cause a collision.
overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
boundaries of the parking space. In some cir‐ # In these situations, do not use Parking

cumstances, Parking Pilot may therefore guide Pilot. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
you into the parking space prematurely. Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer in the following situations:
drawbars might not be identified as such or be R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐
measured incorrectly. Only use Parking Pilot on ately next to each other.
level, high-grip ground. R If the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low kerb.
 Driving and parking 219

Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking

spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction
of travel in the following situations:
R If the parking space is on a kerb.
R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Parking Pilot
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the centre console. # If you have driven past a suitable parking
space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.
# Select desired parking space 4.
# Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or reverse.
# Press button 1. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the
The Parking Pilot view appears on the display selected parking space and parking direc‐
of the multimedia system. Area 2 displays tion.
detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path # Confirm the selected parking space.
3.
% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia
system display may differ from the actual
vehicle path.
220 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ before. Depending on the message or as Exiting a parking space with Parking Pilot
cle swinging out while parking or pulling required, engage forward or reverse gear.
Requirement:
out of a parking space You can only exit a parking space with Parking
On completion of the parking procedure, the
While parking or pulling out of a parking Parking Pilot finished, take control of the vehi- Pilot if you have previously parked the vehicle
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive cle. display message appears. Further manoeu‐ with Parking Pilot.
onto areas of the oncoming lane. vring may still be necessary. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
This could cause you to collide with objects # After completion of the parking procedure, cle and surroundings during the entire parking
or other road users. safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. procedure.
# Pay attention to objects and other road When required by legal requirements or local # Start the vehicle.

users. conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or % Vehicles with automatic transmission:
cancel the parking procedure with Park‐ You can stop the vehicle and change the
ing Pilot. transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
# If, for example, the Engage reverse gear mes‐ vehicle path. The parking procedure can
sage appears in the display of the multimedia then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
system: select the corresponding transmis‐ available, the transmission position will be
sion position. changed again. If the vehicle has not yet
Vehicles with automatic transmission: reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
The vehicle drives into the selected parking cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be
space. changed.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Stop
as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
 Driving and parking 221

# Pay attention to objects and other road

users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Park‐
ing Pilot.
# If, for example, the Engage forward gear mes‐
sage appears in the display of the multimedia
system: select the corresponding transmis‐
sion position.
% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia Vehicles with automatic transmission:
system display may differ from the actual The vehicle exits of the parking space.
vehicle path. # Vehicles with manual transmission: Stop
# Confirm to start the exiting process. as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
# Press button 1. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ before. Depending on the message or as
The Parking Pilot view appears on the display cle swinging out while parking or pulling required, engage forward or reverse gear.
of the multimedia system. out of a parking space
As soon as the Parking Pilot finished, take con-
# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles While parking or pulling out of a parking trol of the vehicle. message appears in the dis‐
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select space, the vehicle swings out and can drive play of the multimedia system, you must acceler‐
direction of travel 3. onto areas of the oncoming lane. ate, brake, steer and change gears yourself
This could cause you to collide with objects again.
or other road users.
222 Driving and parking

Function of Remote Parking Pilot The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and R Exiting a parking space at right angles to the
% Remote Parking Pilot is an additional func‐ parking remains with you. Make sure that no direction of travel (exploration mode).
tion of Parking Pilot. Comply with local traf‐ persons, animals or objects etc. are in the R Parking in a garage (exploration mode).
fic laws and regulations when using Remote manoeuvring range. Comply with local traffic
laws and regulations when using Remote Parking R Exiting a garage (exploration mode).
Parking Pilot on public roads.
Pilot on public roads. If technical problems arise during a parking
Remote Parking Pilot supports the parking
manoeuvre while you are outside your vehicle. For the Remote Parking Pilot function, you manoeuvre (e.g. the permitted downhill gradient
Once you have selected a suitable parking require a mobile phone and the current Remote is exceeded), the following actions are per‐
space, you then exit the vehicle and guide it into Parking Pilot app. formed automatically:
the parking space using a suitable mobile phone. The following operating systems are supported: R The parking manoeuvre is cancelled.
Remote Parking Pilot accelerates, brakes, steers R Android™ R The vehicle is brought to a standstill.
the vehicle and changes gear. You can cancel the R Transmission position j is engaged.
R Apple® iOS
parking manoeuvre at any time using your
mobile phone. R The vehicle is switched off.
If the connection between the vehicle and the
You can also use your mobile phone to move mobile phone is interrupted while a parking If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corre‐
your vehicle backwards and forwards in the manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeuvre sponding message is displayed on the mobile
straight-ahead position (exploration mode). This can be continued if the connection is re-estab‐ phone. You can then take over and manoeuvre
is useful, for example, if a garage is so narrow lished within about two minutes. the vehicle into the parking space yourself. Alter‐
that it is difficult or impossible to get in and out The following scenarios are supported: natively, you can move the vehicle back to its
of the vehicle after it has been parked. Parking original position, if necessary.
R Parking in a parking space parallel to the
Pilot automatically performs any minor steering Whilst the vehicle is being parked with Parking
corrections that are required. direction of travel.
R Parking in a parking space at right angles to
Pilot, you can interrupt the process to take con‐
Remote Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a trol of the vehicle with Remote Parking Pilot and
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. the direction of travel.
manoeuvre it into its final position.
 Driving and parking 223

You can find further information in the operating Remote Parking Pilot is cancelled if, among Operating Remote Parking Pilot
instructions for the Remote Parking Pilot app other things, one of the following actions is car‐
http://www.mercedes.me. ried out: & WARNING Risk of accident due to
R You switch off Parking Pilot. objects located above or below the
System limitations detection range of Parking Pilot
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking R You press a button on the key.
space being measured inaccurately or, in certain R ESP® intervenes.
If there are objects above or below the
cases, to connection problems with the mobile detection range, the following situations may
phone. Parking spaces that are partially occu‐ During the parking manoeuvre, you must not arise:
pied by trailer drawbars might not be identified stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the R Parking Pilot may steer too early.
as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use vehicle. Otherwise, the procedure will be inter‐ R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
Remote Parking Pilot on a level, high-grip sur‐ rupted and a corresponding message will be dis‐ objects.
face. The parking space must be at least 0.60 m played on the mobile phone. If you move closer
wider than the vehicle without the outside mir‐ to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the This could cause a collision.
rors. procedure. # In these situations, do not use Parking
Do not use Remote Parking Pilot, for example, in Further information on cancelling the function Pilot.
the following situations: can be found in the operating instructions for
R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or the Remote Parking Pilot app. Objects located above or below the detection
packed snow or in heavy rain. range of Parking Pilot are not detected when the
parking space is being measured. These are also
R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
not taken into account when the parking
beyond the vehicle. manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads,
R If you have installed snow chains. overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the
R If the parking space is on a downhill or uphill boundaries of the parking space. In some cir‐
incline. cumstances, Parking Pilot may therefore guide
you into the parking space prematurely.
224 Driving and parking

& WARNING Danger due to insufficient Keep in mind that the system limits must be Parking
view of the vehicle surroundings observed at all times. If necessary, cancel the
parking manoeuvre.
If the vehicle is being parked with Remote Please note that you can only use Remote Park‐
Parking Pilot, the view of the vehicle's sur‐ ing Pilot if you have a valid driving licence.
roundings may be limited.
No persons or pets are permitted to remain in
# When you park the vehicle with Remote
the vehicle during the parking manoeuvre.
Parking Pilot, observe the following
points, for example: Always make sure that other road users can
R Make sure that you have the best access their vehicles.
view possible of the vehicle and the % Keep the key with you during the parking
vehicle's surroundings. manoeuvre. You can cancel the parking
R Make sure that no persons, animals manoeuvre and bring the vehicle to a stand‐
or objects are in the path of your still by pressing a button on the key.
vehicle. Requirement:
R Make sure that you maintain a suita‐ R The mobile phone and Parking Pilot are con‐
ble distance to the vehicle and that nected (→ page 226)
neither you nor other road users # Press button 1.
could be endangered. The Parking Pilot view appears on the display
R Be aware of the vehicle's surround‐ of the multimedia system. Area 2 displays
ings at all times and identify possi‐ detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path
ble dangers. 3.
R If necessary, cancel the parking
process.
 Driving and parking 225

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia # Park the vehicle in the parking space using # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app.
system display may differ from the actual your mobile phone. # Park the vehicle in the parking space using
vehicle path. # After completion of the parking procedure, your mobile phone.
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. # After completion of the parking procedure,
When required by legal requirements or local safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. When required by legal requirements or local
% On completion of the parking manoeuvre, conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
the vehicle is automatically locked. % On completion of the parking manoeuvre,
% You can find further information in the oper‐ the vehicle is automatically locked.
ating instructions for the Remote Parking % You can find further information in the oper‐
Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me. ating instructions for the Remote Parking
Taking over a parking manoeuvre of Parking Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me.
Pilot Parking with exploration mode
# If you have driven past a suitable parking
space: bring the vehicle to a standstill. # Park the vehicle with Parking Pilot

Area 2 is activated. (→ page 219).

# When the vehicle is in the desired position,
# Select transmission position j.
select transmission position j.
# Select the desired parking space in area 2 Parking Pilot is ended and Remote Parking
and confirm. Pilot is activated.
# Exit the vehicle. # Exit the vehicle.
# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and # Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and
the boot lid or the tailgate are closed. the boot lid or the tailgate are closed.
# Start the Remote Parking Pilot app.
226 Driving and parking

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill. Exiting a parking space with exploration # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app and
Area 2 is activated. mode search for the vehicle name.
# To activate Remote Parking Pilot, select # Unlock the vehicle. A connection prompt is displayed.
transmission position j. # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app within # Enter the PIN.
# Select your own vehicle 3 and confirm. one minute. De-authorising a mobile phone
# Exit the vehicle. # Using the mobile phone, drive the vehicle for‐ # Select ¥ Options .
# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and wards or backwards to the desired position.
# Select the mobile phone.
the boot lid or the tailgate are closed. % The outside mirrors are not automatically fol‐
# Select De-authorise.
# Start the Remote Parking Pilot app. ded out after exiting a parking space.
# Select Yes.
# Using the mobile phone, drive the vehicle for‐ Authorising and de-authorising a mobile The mobile phone is deleted from the list of
wards or backwards to the desired position. phone for Remote Parking Pilot devices.
Multimedia system:
The parking manoeuvre requires a minimum , Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking Drive Away Assist
parking space size. If clearances get smaller dur‐
ing the parking manoeuvre, e.g. if the vehicle is Pilot . Remote Parking Pilot % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi‐
being driven into a garage, a message will cles with automatic transmission.
Authorising a new mobile phone
appear on the mobile phone. You will need to In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
confirm the reduced clearances. Pilot function, you must authorise your mobile impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
% On completion of the parking manoeuvre, phone. You can authorise up to six mobile detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
the vehicle is automatically locked. phones. speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a
critical situation is detected, a symbol appears
% You can find further information in the oper‐ # Select Devices:.
on the camera image of the multimedia system.
ating instructions for the Remote Parking # Select Connect new device.
Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me. Remote Parking Pilot is ready to connect.
 Driving and parking 227

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐ reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit‐
limited detection performance of Drive uations, for example: uation is detected, a warning symbol appears on
Away Assist R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and the camera image of the multimedia system. If
brake pedals. the driver does not respond to the warning, the
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To
tify objects and traffic situations. R If the wrong gear is selected.
do this, the function uses the radar sensors in
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: The Drive Away Assist function is active under the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is
R Warn you without reason and limit the the following conditions: continually monitored.
vehicle speed. R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
or other objects, detection is not possible.
speed. when the vehicle is at a standstill. The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
the following conditions:
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
1.0 m away. R If Blind Spot Assist is activated.
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ activated in the multimedia system. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is
essary. activated in the multimedia system.
Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and
when driving with a trailer. Cross Traffic Alert is unavailable on inclines and
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ when driving with a trailer.
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. Cross Traffic Alert
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and % Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
parking remains with you. Make sure that no Assist (→ page 232).
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Drivers can
also be warned of any crossing traffic when
228 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis‐ R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The You can have the following status information for
tance driver is warned earlier and the attention ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
Multimedia system: level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ menu of the on-board computer:
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking ted accordingly. R The length of the journey since the last
Pilot . Manoeuvring assist. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ break.
# Switch the function on O or off ª. tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐ ASSIST.
play. You can acknowledge the message and
ATTENTION ASSIST if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you System suspended message appears.
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk will be warned again after a minimum of If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators 15 minutes. the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
break. ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
until too late. The system is not a substitute for a Instrument Display when the engine is running.
well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour‐ ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow when the engine is re-started. The last selected
for adequate recuperation. sensitivity level remains stored.
You can choose between two settings.
R Standard: normal system sensitivity
 Driving and parking 229

System limitations R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the Traffic Sign Assist
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to driver's door (e.g. change drivers or take a
Function of Traffic Sign Assist
200 km/h speed range. break).
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not Multimedia system:
occur at all in the following situations: , Vehicle . k Assistance . ATTEN-
R If you have been driving for less than 30
TION ASSIST
minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road Selection options
surface or potholes). # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

R If there is a strong side wind.

R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R If the Steering Pilot function of Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is active.
R If the time has been set incorrectly.
R In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐
tifunction camera 1 and assists you by display‐
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐ tions in the instrument cluster. If the system
tinuing the journey in the following situations: detects that you are driving onto a section of
R If you switch off the engine. road in the wrong direction, it triggers a warning.
230 Driving and parking

The camera also detects traffic signs with a Display in the Instrument Display R When a village or town boundary is passed
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in which is stored in the digital map.
wet conditions).
Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
3 Additional sign with restriction tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in
the speedometer.
% The illustration shows the Instrument Display
Warning when approaching pedestrian cross‐
in the Widescreen Cockpit
ings
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
stored in the navigation system, it can update The system can warn you if you approach a
the display in the following situations without pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. A mes‐
detecting traffic signs: sage appears in the instrument cluster.
R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. motor‐
way exit or slip road.
 Driving and parking 231

R If the windscreen in the area of the multi‐ % If the Speed Limit Pilot has been activated,
function camera is dirty, or if the camera is the detected traffic signs are automatically
misted up, damaged or covered. displayed in the instrument cluster.
R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due Displays in the instrument cluster
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instru‐
or because of insufficient lighting. ment cluster.
R If the information in the navigation system's # Select Display in inst. cluster.
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
# Activate or deactivate the function.
R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. Activating or deactivating the warning when
The warning occurs if appropriate traffic signs or a speed limit is exceeded
road markings are recognised and pedestrians Setting Traffic Sign Assist The point at which a warning is given once a
are present in the danger zone. Multimedia system: speed is exceeded (warning threshold) can be
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Traffic set according to individual preferences.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function Sign Assist # Select Speed limit warning.

in the following situations: Speed Limit Pilot for Distance Pilot # Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ DISTRONIC
Setting a speed
cient illumination of the road, if there are Speed limitation is set automatically if
highly variable shade conditions or in rain, DISTRONIC is activated. # Select Warning threshold.
snow, fog or spray. # Select Speed Limit Pilot. # Set the desired speed.

R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, # Activate or deactivate the function.
direct sunlight or reflections from other vehi‐
cles.
232 Driving and parking

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind R If narrow vehicles are within the monitoring
Assist Spot Assist range, e.g. bicycles.
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles Warnings may be issued in error when driving
Blind Spot Assist approaching and overtaking you at a greatly close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing different speed. ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a
behind your vehicle and 3 m directly next to your As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn prolonged time.
vehicle. drivers in this situation.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ gear is engaged.
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
enters the monitoring range directly next to your tance at the side of the vehicle. Brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
lights up red. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. designed to help you avoid a collision.
the lateral monitoring range and you switch on Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the turn signal indicator in the corresponding The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
the side for other road users and obstacles. ble in the speed range between approximately
direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red
warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the System limitations 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec‐ The detection capability of Blind Spot Assist can
ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of & WARNING Risk of accident despite
be restricted in the following situations: brake application of Active Blind Spot
the red warning lamp. R If the sensors are dirty or covered. Assist
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
given. A course-correcting brake application cannot
heavy rain, snow or spray. always prevent a collision.
 Driving and parking 233

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ System limitations

self, especially if Active Blind Spot Either a course-correcting brake application
Assist warns you or makes a course- appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
correcting brake application. all, may occur in the following situations:
# Always maintain a safe distance at the R There are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
sides. barriers, on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
Active Blind Spot Assist high cornering speeds.
Blind Spot Assist does not react to the fol‐ If a course-correcting brake application occurs, R You clearly brake or accelerate.
lowing: the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
R Overtaking vehicles closely on the side, ror and an acoustic warning signal sounds. In
ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
placing them in the blind spot area addition, a display 1 indicating the danger of a
side collision appears in the multifunction dis‐ R ESP® is deactivated.
R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
play. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
at a very different speed
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ detected.
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐ priate brake application. This brake application R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐ may be interrupted at any time if you steer nection to the trailer hitch has been correctly
uations. slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. established.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
234 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist and a course-correcting brake application guides
Active Blind Spot Assist you back into your lane.
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Multimedia system: You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Blind ing wheel in the following circumstances:
Spot Assist R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. markings.
R A front wheel passes over the lane markings.

You will also be guided back into your lane by

means of a course-correcting brake application
if the following conditions are met:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both sides.
R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.
Whether a warning is issued and when this
occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity
setting (standard or adaptive).
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐ Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned accident nor override the laws of physics. It can‐
by means of a vibration in the steering wheel not take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
 Driving and parking 235

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
good time and for staying in lane. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: If the eration.
lane markings are solid lines and you do not R ESP® is deactivated.
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
application can bring the vehicle back into the nection to the trailer has been correctly
original lane. established.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
Driving Assistance Plus package: If you do not has been detected and displayed.
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake
application can bring the vehicle back into the If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐ The system may be impaired or may not function
original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark‐ play 1 appears in the multifunction display. in the following situations:
ing being detected, a brake application will only System limits R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
be made if a vehicle has been detected in the illumination of the road, highly variable shade
adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
the following situations: conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy
vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be spray.
detected. R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
R There is glare, e.g. from the sun, reflections
The brake application is available in the speed erate.
or oncoming traffic.
range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
R There is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
tor.
of the multifunction camera or the camera is
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as misted up, damaged or obscured.
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind R No or several, unclear lane markings are
Spot Assist.
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
area.
236 Driving and parking

R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R The distance to the vehicle in front is too self, especially if Active Lane Keeping R give an unnecessary warning
small and the lane markings thus cannot be Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor‐
R not give a warning
detected. recting brake application.
R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes # Always pay particular attention to the
branch off, cross one another or merge. & WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐ traffic situation and keep within the
R The road is very narrow and winding. vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist alerts you.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane traffic conditions or road users. In very rare Requirement:
Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor cases, the system may make an inappropri‐ The driving speed is at least 60 km/h.
several areas around the vehicle. If the radar ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally
sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered driving over a solid lane marking.
with snow, the system may be impaired or may The brake application can be interrupted at
not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which any time if you steer slightly in the opposite
you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor‐ direction.
recting brake application occurs. # Always make sure that there is suffi‐

Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist cient distance to the side for other traf‐
fic or obstacles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Lane Keeping Assist warning & WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane
A lane-correcting brake application cannot Keeping Assist
always bring the vehicle back into the origi‐ Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
nal lane. detect lane markings.
 Driving and parking 237

In both the standard and adaptive settings, no Trailer hitch

warning vibration occurs in the following situa‐
tions: Notes on trailer operation
R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐ Observe the following notes on the tongue
tor. weight:
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as R use a tongue weight as close as possible to
ABS, BAS or ESP®. the maximum tongue weight
R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
In the adaptive setting, there will also be no falls below the permissible tongue weight
warning vibration in the following situations:
R The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid‐ Do not exceed the following values:
erably. R permissible towing capacity
R You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an R the permissible rear axle load of the towing
obstacle or change lane quickly. vehicle
R You cut the corner on a sharp bend. R the permissible gross mass of the towing
# Press button 2. vehicle
If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist R the permissible gross mass of the trailer
Assist is activated. When lane markings are
detected, the lines in the assistance graphic Multimedia system: R the maximum permissible speed of the trailer
are shown in white. , Vehicle . k Assistance . Act.
Make sure of the following before starting a jour‐
Lane Keep. Assist ney:
Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist
With the standard or adaptive setting, you can Selection options R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow‐
influence when the warning vibration of Lane # Select Adaptive or Standard. ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
Keeping Assist takes place. R the headlamps are adjusted correctly
238 Driving and parking

Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec‐ Requirements: # Pull switch 2.

trically Make sure of the following before retracting the Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer
ball neck fully electrically: coupling extending… display message
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the appears in the multifunction display.
R trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
ball neck not being engaged The ball neck extends fully electrically.
removed
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer R the range of movement is clear Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.
may come loose. The ball neck is securely locked into place
# Make sure that the ball neck securely Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec‐
once indicator lamp 1 goes out.
engages and locks into place. trically
If the ball neck is not securely locked in
place, the Check trailer hitch lock display
* NOTE Damage to the fully-electric trailer message appears in the multifunction dis‐
hitch play.
The fully-electric trailer hitch could be
mechanically damaged by applying additional
pressure when the ball neck is being exten‐
ded or retracted.
# Do not make the ball neck extend/
retract faster by applying additional
pressure.
 Driving and parking 239

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, # The doors or tailgate are not opened or
the Check trailer hitch lock display message closed.
appears in the multifunction display.
# Do not initiate the level control system
Observe any information which may be displayed and do not operate the DYNAMIC
in the instrument cluster: SELECT switch.
R warning and indicator lamps (→ page 493) # The vehicle is not locked or unlocked.
R display messages (→ page 437)
Requirements:
Before coupling up the trailer, the ball neck must
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
extend fully electrically, securely engage and
lock into place.
& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle
level being changed Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to
the vehicle:
Vehicles with level control system: the vehi‐
R adapter plug
cle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g.
# Pull switch 2 again. by other persons. If this happens when you R adapter cable
Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer are coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, you In order for the trailer to be recognised by the
coupling extending… display message could become trapped. In addition, other vehicle:
appears in the multifunction display. people could become trapped if their limbs
are between the vehicle body and the tyres R the electrical connection must be set up cor‐
The ball neck retracts fully electrically. rectly
or underneath the vehicle.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, R the trailer lighting system must be in working
The ball neck is securely locked into place once make sure that: order
indicator lamp 1 goes out.
240 Driving and parking

The operation of the following systems depends and check whether the corresponding turn
on the trailer being connected correctly: signal light on the trailer is flashing.
R ESP® A display message may appear in the multifunc‐
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC tion display even if the trailer has been connec‐
ted correctly:
R Parking Pilot
R LEDs have been installed on the trailer light‐
R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ing system
R Active Lane Keeping Assist R the current has fallen below the trailer light‐
Coupling up a trailer ing system's minimum current (50 mA)
# Open the socket cover. % Accessories can be connected to the perma‐
* NOTE Damage to the battery due to full nent power supply and the power supply that
# Insert the plug connector with lug 1 into
discharge is switched on via the ignition lock with max‐
groove 3 on the socket.
Charging the trailer battery using the power imum power consumptions of 180 W.
# Turn bayonet coupling 2 around clockwise
supply of the trailer can damage the battery. to the stop. Uncoupling a trailer
# Do not use the power supply to charge # Let the cover engage.
the trailer battery. & WARNING Risk of being crushed and
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
becoming trapped when uncoupling a
Remove the protective covering from the ball (if you are using an adapter cable).
# trailer
head and store it in a safe place. # Make sure that cable is always slack for ease
of movement when cornering. When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind inertia-activated brake, your hand may
the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. # Check the trailer lighting system. Push the become trapped between the vehicle and the
combination switch upwards/downwards trailer drawbar.
 Driving and parking 241

# Do not uncouple trailers with an * NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from Bicycle rack
engaged overrun brake. installing adapter cables or adapter plugs
& WARNING Risk of an accident when
The following parts could be damaged when using the bicycle rack incorrectly
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped retracting the ball neck fully electrically:
when disconnecting the trailer cable The bicycle rack may become detached from
R bumper
Vehicles with level control system: the the vehicle in the following cases:
R adapter cable
vehicle lowers when the trailer cable is dis‐ R the permissible load capacity of the
R adapter plug trailer hitch is exceeded.
connected.
This could result in you or other people # Always remove the adapter cable or R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
becoming trapped if your or their limbs are adapter plug before retracting the ball R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball
between the vehicle body and the tyres or neck fully electrically. neck beneath the ball head.
underneath the vehicle.
# Make sure nobody is underneath the
# Safeguard the trailer against rolling away. Observe the following for your own safety
Disconnect the electrical connection and that of other road users:
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of #
the wheel arches when you disconnect between the vehicle and the trailer. R always adhere to the permissible load
the trailer cable. # Uncouple the trailer. capacity of the trailer hitch.
R only use the bicycle rack to transport
# Place the protective covering on the ball
head. bicycles.
R always mount the bicycle rack properly by
attaching to the ball head and the ball
neck guide pin, if possible.
242 Driving and parking

R when transporting four bicycles, always R when mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin
use bicycle racks which have additional 2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg.
support on the ball neck guide pin. Up to four bicycles can be transported.
R only use bicycle racks approved by The load capacity is calculated from the weight
Mercedes-Benz. of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.
R always observe the bicycle rack operating For bicycles weighing a total of between 75 kg
instructions. and 100 kg only use bicycle racks with addi‐
tional support on guide pin 2.
* NOTE Damage to or cracks on the trailer The vehicle's handling characteristics change
hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or when a bicycle rack is fitted. The vehicle:
bicycle racks being used incorrectly R is heavier

# Only use bicycle racks approved by R is restricted in its acceleration and gradeabil‐
Mercedes-Benz. ity
R has an increased braking distance
Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pins)
This can impair the vehicle's handling character‐
Depending on the design, up to four bicycles can istics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive
be transported on the bicycle rack: carefully and maintain a safe distance.
R when mounted by attaching to ball head 1, When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure
the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to for maximum load on the rear axle of the vehicle.
three bicycles can be transported. Further information on the tyre pressure can be
found in the tyre pressure table (→ page 403).
 Driving and parking 243

Notes on loads impaired. In addition, the wind resistance and Observe the following information when
The larger the distance between the load's load on the trailer hitch increase. loading the bicycle rack:
centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater Number Total Max. dis‐ Max. dis‐
the load on the trailer hitch. of bicy‐ weight tance 1 tance 2
Observe the following notes: cles of bicy‐
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle cle rack
as possible. and load
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack 3 Up to 420 mm 300 mm
as evenly as possible across the vehicle's 75 kg
longitudinal axis.
41 Up to 420 mm 400 mm
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all 90 kg1
detachable parts from the bicycles, e.g. baskets, Distribution of the load on the bicycle rack
child seats or batteries, before loading them 41 Up to 420 mm 400 mm
1 Vertical distance between the centre of grav‐
onto the bicycle rack. This improves the wind 100 kg1
resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle ity and ball head
rack. 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav‐
ity and ball head
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
moving around and check they are secured at 3 Centre of gravity located on the vehicle's
regular intervals. centre axis
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The han‐
dling characteristics and rear view may be

1 When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin.
244 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Instrument display overview Instrument display (standard) Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an

instrument display malfunction
If the instrument display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognise function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
1 Speedometer 1 Speedometer
# Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop. 2 Multifunction display 2 Multifunction display
3 Rev counter 3 Rev counter
If the operating safety of your vehicle is 4 Coolant temperature display 4 Coolant temperature display
impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos‐ 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐ 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. tor tor
The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the
system status for the following:
R Cruise control (→ page 190)
R Limiter (→ page 190)
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 193)
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 245

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist and wide‐ contact with hot gases or other escaping Overview of the buttons on the steering
screen cockpit: detected instructions and traf‐ operating fluids. wheel
fic signs appear in the speedometer
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the
(→ page 229).
engine to cool down.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
high engine speeds partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call the fire service.
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range. Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the
# Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ separate Owner's Manual. Otherwise, you may
revving range. fail to recognise dangers.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the

engine when the red band in rev counter 3 1 Button group:
(overrevving range) is reached. % Main menu and back button (on-board
computer)
During normal operating conditions, coolant
temperature display 4 may rise to 120 °C. 8 Switches sound off/on
W Increases the volume
& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ X Decreases the volume
ing the bonnet 2 Touch Control (on-board computer)
If you open the engine bonnet when the 3 Touch Control (multimedia system)
engine has overheated or during a fire in the 4 Button group:
engine compartment, you could come into % Main menu and back button (multime‐
dia system)
246 Instrument Display and on-board computer

ó LINGUATRONIC or Voice Control Sys‐ You must observe the legal requirements for the R Radio
tem country in which you are currently driving when R Media
6 Makes/accepts a call operating the on-board computer.
R Telephone
~ Rejects/ends a call % The on-board computer displays appear in
the multifunction display (→ page 247). R Vehicles with an instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit: Content
Operating the on-board computer R HUD
R Vehicles with an instrument display in
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ the widescreen cockpit: Design
mation systems and communications
equipment The menus can be called up from the menu bar
in the multifunction display.
If you operate information and communica‐
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
The on-board computer is operated using Touch
# Only operate this equipment when the
Control 2 and back button 1 on the left-hand
traffic situation permits. side of the steering wheel.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
The following menus are available:
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
R Service
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. R Assistance
R Trip # To call up the menu bar: press the back
button on the left.
R Navigation
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 247

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left Displays in the multifunction display é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
or right on the left-hand Touch Control. ¯ Cruise control (→ page 190)
# To call up the menu or confirm the selec‐ È Limiter (→ page 190)
tion: press the left-hand Touch Control.
ç Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 200)
# To scroll through displays or lists in the (→ page 193)
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the
a Steering Pilot (→ page 200)
left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up the submenu or confirm the è ECO start/stop function
selection: press the left-hand Touch Control. ë HOLD function (→ page 203)
# To exit the submenu: press the back button _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on the left. (→ page 128)
1 Outside temperature ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded
If you are browsing a submenu and you press (for certain countries only)
and hold the back button on the left, the menu 2 Drive program
bar appears. 3 Transmission position (→ page 162)
4 Time
5 Display section
% Vehicles with the instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit:the position of the
displays deviates from those displayed here.
Further displays in the multifunction display:
Z Gearshift recommendation (→ page 165)
ë Parking Pilot activated
248 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Adjusting the instrument lighting Menus and submenus R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
(→ page 363)
Functions in the Service menu of the on-
board computer R Engine oil level
On-board computer:
, Service
Calling up the Assistance graphic display
# To select the function: swipe upwards or On-board computer:
, Assistance
downwards on the left-hand side of Touch
Control. % Vehicles with the instrument display in
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. the widescreen cockpit: when you have
Functions in the Service menu: the design set to Progressive, you can view
the assistance graphic in the left-hand por‐
R Message memory (→ page 437) tion of the instrument display.
R AdBlue: Adblue® range The following displays are available from the
R Tyre pressure: Assistance graphic menu:
- Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning R Assistance graphic
# Turn brightness control 1 up or down. system (→ page 409) R Attention level (→ page 228)
The lighting of the instrument display and in - Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre # To switch between the displays: swipe
the controls in the vehicle interior is adjus‐ pressure monitoring system
(→ page 405) upwards or downwards on the left-hand side
ted.
of Touch Control.
- Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system (→ page 405)
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 249

R Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis‐
Assist activated play shows a vehicle being refuelled instead
R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot of the range.
Assist actived R ECO display (→ page 159)
R Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC R Trip computer From start and From reset
(→ page 193) R Digital speedometer
% Vehicles with an instrument display in
Calling up displays in the Trip menu the widescreen cockpit: the digital speed‐
On-board computer: ometer only appears in the Classic or Sport
, Trip display setting.
% Vehicles with the instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit: when you have set
the progressive display setting, you can view
information on the journey in the Content
Status displays in the Assistance graphic: menu.
R é: ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated # To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
R æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Displays in the Trip menu:
Assist activated R Standard display
R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping R Range and current fuel consumption Example: standard display
Assist actived A recuperation display is also available for 1 Trip distance
certain engines. If there is only a small 2 Total distance recorder
250 Instrument Display and on-board computer

view for the instrument display Calling up navigation instructions in the on-
(→ page 246). board computer
You can reset the values of the following func‐ On-board computer:
tions: , Navigation
R Trip distance
R Trip computer "From start" and "From reset"
R ECO display

# To select the function to be reset: swipe

upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Example: trip computer Touch Control.
1 Total distance recorder # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
2 Driving time # Select Yes.
3 Average speed
4 Average fuel consumption
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand side of Touch Example: no change of direction announced
Control, the function will be reset immediately. 1 Distance to the next destination
Resetting values in the Trip menu of the on-
board computer 2 Estimated arrival time
3 Distance to the next change of direction
On-board computer: 4 Current road
, Trip

% The spelling may differ in the main menu dis‐

played. Therefore, observe the menu over‐
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 251

R New route... or Calculating route…: a new # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
route is calculated. Route guidance is started.
R Road not mapped: the road is unknown, e.g. If route guidance has already been activated,
newly built roads. a request will appear asking whether you
R No route: no route could be calculated to the wish to end the current route guidance.
selected destination. # Select Yes.
R Off map: the map for the current location is # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
not available. Route guidance is started.
R Area of destination reached: you have
Example: change of direction announced reached the area of destination.
1 Road to which the change of direction leads R O: you have reached the destination or an
2 Distance to the change of direction intermediate destination.
3 Change-of-direction symbol # To exit the menu: press the back button on
4 Recommended lane and new lane during a the left.
change of direction (white) Vehicles with the COMAND Online multime‐
5 Possible lane dia system: you can also start the navigation to
6 Lane not recommended (dark grey) one of the recent destinations in the Navigation
menu:
Further possible displays in the Navigation # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
menu:
# To select the destination: swipe upwards or
R Direction of travel: display of direction of
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
travel and road currently being travelled on.
252 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Selecting radio stations using the on-board # To select a radio station: swipe upwards or Playing back media using the on-board com‐
computer downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. puter
On-board computer: Selecting the frequency range or station pre‐ On-board computer:
, Radio set , Media
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To select the frequency range/station

preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

1 Frequency range 1 Media source

2 Station 2 Current track and track number
3 Name of track 3 Name of artist
4 Name of artist 4 Name of album
When you select a station in the presets, the # To change tracks in the active media
preset appears next to the station name. When source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
you select a saved station in the frequency left-hand side of Touch Control.
range, an asterisk appears next to the station
name.
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 253

% This is how to change the channel on the On-board computer: tions (dialled, received and missed calls) are dis‐
media source TV. , Telephone played in the Telephone menu.
# To select the telephone number: swipe
Changing the media source
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ upwards or downwards on the left-hand
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
mation systems and communications Touch Control.
# To select a media source: swipe upwards equipment # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch If there is only one telephone number
If you operate information and communica‐
Control. saved to an entry: the telephone number is
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. when driving, you will be distracted from the selected.
traffic situation. This could also cause you to # If there are multiple telephone numbers
Dialling telephone numbers using the on- lose control of the vehicle. saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
board computer # Only operate this equipment when the wards on the left-hand Touch Control to
traffic situation permits. select the desired telephone number.
Requirements:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
R Mobile phone connected to the multimedia
system vehicle whilst paying attention to road The telephone number is dialled.
and traffic conditions and operate the The following displays may appear instead of the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. telephone numbers dialled:
R Please wait...: the application is starting.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are When a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile
currently driving. phone is not established, the menu for
Vehicles with the COMAND Online multime‐ authorising and connecting a mobile phone is
dia system: the most recent telephone connec‐ displayed in the multimedia system
(→ page 308).
254 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Updating data...: the call list is being upda‐ You can select the following display content: Progressive style: the selected display con‐
ted. R Right display: select contents for the right- tent appears on the left-hand side of the
R Importing contacts...: the contacts from the hand display content (Progressive style) instrument display.
mobile phone or from a storage medium are R Assist. graphic (Progressive style) Contents for right-hand display contents
imported. (Progressive style)
R Power meter: power meter (Progressive
Accepting/rejecting a call style) # Select Right display and press the left-hand
When you receive a call, a message appears in R Revs: rev counter (Classic and Sport styles) side of Touch Control.
the Head-up-Display Incoming callIncoming call. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
R Power meter: power meter (Classic and
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
Sport styles) hand side of Touch Control to select display
hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept) content.
R Date (Progressive style)
or ~ (Reject). # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. R Navigation The selected display content appears on the
R ECO display right-hand side of the instrument display.
The call may be accepted/rejected using the
R Consumption
6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel.
# To select display content: swipe upwards Adjusting the head-up display settings in the
on-board computer
Setting display content or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch
Control. On-board computer:
On-board computer: # Press the left-hand Touch Control. , HUD
, Content
Classic and Sport style: the selected display The following head-up display settings can be
% This function is only available for vehicles contents are shown in the right-hand instru‐ adjusted:
with a widescreen cockpit. ment display.
R Position
R Brightness
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 255

R Display content Setting designs

# To select the setting: swipe upwards or On-board computer
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. , Design
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. % This function is only available for vehicles
# To adjust the value: swipe upwards or with a widescreen cockpit.
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The following designs may be selected:
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. R Sport
R Classic
R Progressive

# To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐

wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The instrument display is shown in the selec‐
1 Currently selected setting ted design.
2 Digital speedometer
3 Traffic Sign Assist Head-up Display
4 Navigation displays
Function of the Head-up-Display
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance
system above the cockpit into the driver's field
of vision.
256 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Display elements R the positioning of the display image # Press button 1.

R light conditions
R wet road surfaces
R objects on the display cover
R polarisation in sunglasses

Switching the head-up display on/off

1 Navigation messages
2 Current speed
3 Detected instructions and traffic signs
4 Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
When you receive a call, a message appears in
the Head-up-Display 6 Incoming call.
System limits
The visibility is influenced by the following condi‐
tions:
R seat position
 LINGUATRONIC 257

Operating safety from the traffic situation. This could also Operation
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Operating the multifunction steering wheel
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐
mation systems and communications cle is stationary. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately
equipment thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on.
If you operate information and communica‐ For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle ing points when operating mobile communica‐
when driving, you will be distracted from the tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
traffic situation. This could also cause you to trol system:
lose control of the vehicle. R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
# Only operate this equipment when the try in which you are driving.
traffic situation permits. R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the cations equipment and your voice control
vehicle whilst paying attention to road system when the traffic conditions permit it.
and traffic conditions and operate the You may otherwise be distracted from the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. traffic conditions and cause an accident, 1 8 Switches the sound off/on (ends LIN‐
injuring yourself and others. GUATRONIC)
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ R Do not use the voice control system in an 2 ó Starts LINGUATRONIC
ating mobile communication equipment emergency as your voice can change and 3 6 Makes/accepts a call
while the vehicle is in motion your telephone call can be unnecessarily 4 ~ Rejects/ends a call (ends LINGUA‐
delayed. TRONIC)
If you operate mobile communication equip‐
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control 5 W Increases the volume
ment when driving, you will be distracted
system functions before starting the journey. 6 X Decreases the volume
258 LINGUATRONIC

Voice prompting R Text messages

# To start or continue a dialogue: press the R Navigation
ó button on the multifunction steering R Address book
wheel. R Radio
You can say a command after an acoustic
signal. R Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth® audio)
# To correct an entry: say the Correction
command. R TV
# To select an entry from the selection list: R Vehicle
say the line number or the contents. 1 Global commands
# To browse the selection list: say the Con- Command types 2 Application-specific commands
tinue or Back command. A distinction is made between the following On the display next to the active application,
# To interrupt the dialogue: say the Pause command types: varying global commands and the corresponding
command. R Global commands can be said at any time application-specific commands are displayed on
# To cancel the dialogue: say the Cancel and regardless of the current application, an autocue. This makes entry easier and sup‐
command. e.g. the Navigate to, Call or Text message to ports interactive operation. The list can be scrol‐
commands. led or it can be operated by speech or the con‐
Operable functions R Application-specific commands are only troller/touchpad.
available for the active application.
You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice control Entering numbers
system to operate the following equipment
regardless of the features: Entering numbers:
R Telephone R The numbers allowed are zero to nine.
 LINGUATRONIC 259

R Telephone numbers can be entered as single Using LINGUATRONIC effectively R prevent loud noises, e.g. the blower, from
digits. interfering while you make an entry.
Audible help functions
R say the voice tag with the same intonation
Changing the language setting You receive information and help for: when creating voice tags.
R optimal operation: say the Help LINGUA-
You can change the language of LINGUATRONIC If an address book entry voice tag is not rec‐
TRONIC command ognised:
via the system language settings. If the set sys‐
tem language is not supported by LINGUA‐ R current application: press the ó button
R only create sensible address book entries in
TRONIC, English will be selected. on the multifunction steering wheel and say the system/mobile phone, e.g. surname and
LINGUATRONIC is available in the following lan‐ the Help command first name in the correct field.
guages: R continued dialogue: say the Help command R do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary
R German
during a voice dialogue spaces or special characters.
R specific system: call up the help command
R English If a station list entry is not recognised:
for the desired system, e.g. Help telephone
R French R say the Read out station list command.
R Italian
Speech quality improvement
R Dutch
If LINGUATRONIC does not understand you: Essential commands
R Spanish
R only operate LINGUATRONIC from the driv‐
Switch commands
er's seat. Switch commands can be used to open certain
R say the commands coherently and clearly, applications. The command selection can be
but do not exaggerate the words. used regardless of the application that is cur‐
rently active.
260 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Navigation To switch to navigation mode
Map To switch to map display
Address book To switch to address book
Telephone To switch to telephone mode
Text message To switch to text messages
Radio To switch to radio mode
TV To switch to TV mode
Media To switch to media mode
USB To switch to USB
Memory card To switch to memory card
Internet application <Name> To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior
to use.
Mercedes-Benz Apps To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps
Connect To switch to Internet mode
 LINGUATRONIC 261

Command Function
Vehicle To switch to vehicle settings
System settings To switch to system settings

Navigation commands With the navigation commands, you can enter

POIs or conventional addresses as well as make
important navigation settings.

Command Function
Navigate to <Address/POI/Contact> Universal search for destinations of all types. A search is also performed in the address book con‐
tacts, in the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street
or house number, can be changed.
Address in <Country> Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France
POI <POI> Destination entry for a POI, e.g. POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is also performed in the navigation
database and on the Internet.
POI online search <POI> To conduct a POI search on the Internet only
Navigate to contact <Name> Destination entry to a contact in the address book
262 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Enter country To enter a country/town/district/street/junction/house number/postcode
Enter town
Enter district
Enter street
Enter junction
Enter house number
Enter postcode
Nearest restaurant To search for nearby restaurants, parking spaces and filling stations
Nearest car park
Nearest rest area with toilets
Nearest filling station
Last destinations To select a destination from the list of last entered destinations
Alternative routes To switch route guidance to another route
Start route guidance To start route guidance after entering a valid destination
Cancel route guidance To cancel route guidance
 LINGUATRONIC 263

Command Function
Guidance instructions on To switch the route guidance voice output on/off
Guidance instructions off
Show traffic map To switch the traffic map on/off
Hide traffic map
Switch on POI symbols To switch the POI symbols display on the map on/off
Switch off POI symbols

Telephone commands You can use the telephone commands to make

phone calls or search through the address book.

Command Function
Call <Name> To make a phone call. All address book names are available.
Search for contact <Name> To search for and display a contact. All address book names are available.
Last phone number To display the last call
Redial number To select the last phone number dialled
264 LINGUATRONIC

Radio and TV commands Radio and TV commands can also be used when
the radio or TV application runs in the back‐
ground.

Command Function
Station <Name> To call up receivable or saved stations
<Frequency> Direct frequency entry
Next station To switch to the next available station
Previous station
Save station Station is saved in the station list
Show station list To display the names of all receivable stations
Read out station list To listen to the names of all receivable stations
Switch on traffic announcement To switch the traffic information service on/off
Switch off traffic announcement
Radio info on To switch the current station information on/off
Radio info off
 LINGUATRONIC 265

Media player commands Media player commands can also be used when
the media player runs in the background.

Command Function
Play <Track> The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search
Media search <Track> The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search
Show all albums Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for
Show all artists
Show all composers
Show all genres
Show all tracks
Show all playlists
Next track To select the next track
Previous track To select the previous track
Random track list on To switch the random track list on/off
Random track list off

Message commands Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐

tened to using the message commands.
266 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Text message to <Name> To create a message. All address book names are available.
Reply To reply to a message
Forward text message To forward a message

Vehicle commands You can use the vehicle commands to directly

call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle
settings.

Command Function
Ambient light To display ambient light settings
Display settings To show display settings
Assistance settings To display assistance settings
Scent To display fragrancing settings
Energy flow To display energy flow settings
Ionisation To display ionisation settings
Climate control To display climate control settings
 LINGUATRONIC 267

Command Function
Light To display light settings
Massage To display massage settings
Engine data To display engine data
Seats To display seat adjustment settings
Consumption To display the consumption
Visualisation To display visualisation
268 Multimedia system

Overview and operation 6 Button group: Avoid touching the display.

Overview of the multimedia system ß Switches navigation on Observe the notes on cleaning.
$ Switches on the radio
ÕSwitches to media mode Observe the notes on caring for the interior
% Activates telephone mode (→ page 376).
Ø Sets vehicle functions Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
7 Touchpad off feature: if the temperature is too high, the
8 Control knob brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
media display may then switch off completely for
Adjusts volume and switches the sound a while.
on/off
9 % If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it
Button Ü
may be difficult to read the media display.
Switches multimedia system on/off
A Controller
Touch Control 4, Touchpad 7 and Controller
A are the central control elements.

1 Switches the sound on/off Notes on the media display

2 Decreases the volume
* NOTE Scratching of the display
3 Increases the volume
4 Touch Control The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
5 Media display surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
 Multimedia system 269

Central controls overview Touch Control # To call up the menu list/favourites: hold
Operating Touch Control button 2.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity
Multimedia system:
, System . w Input . Touch Control

sensitivity
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

1 Touch Control
2 Controller
3 Touchpad

# To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left

or right on Touch Control 1.
# Press Touch Control 1.
# To open a list: press Touch Control 1.
# To close a list: press the 2 button.
270 Multimedia system

Operating the controller # Turn 3 left or right.

# Slide 1 left or right.
# Slide 4 up or down.
# Slide 2 diagonally.
# Press 7 briefly or press and hold.

Touchpad
Switching the touchpad on/off
Requirement:
The vehicle is equipped with a controller.
Multimedia system:
, System . w Input

# Switch Touchpad on O or off ª.

1 Touchpad
Operating the touchpad 2 © button, calls up main functions and
1 % button, to return to the previous dis‐
favourites
play (press briefly), to call up the main func‐ Requirement:
tions and favourites (press and hold) 3 D button, calls up the menu of the most
For vehicles with a controller: the touchpad is
2 ò button, to call up main functions and recently active media source
switched on (→ page 270).
favourites 4 % button, returns to the previous display
3 Controller (press briefly), calls up the main functions
and favourites (press and hold)
Controller operating options:
 Multimedia system 271

You can navigate in menus and lists via touch- Handwriting recognition: switching the read- # 1 ß button: switches navigation on
sensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger aloud function on/off # 2 $ button: switches the radio on
swipe. Multimedia system:
, System . õ Audio
# 3 Õ button: switches the audio source
# To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
on
left or right. # Switch Read out handwriting recognition on
# 4 % button: switches telephone mode
# Press touchpad 1. O or off ª. on
# To open or close lists: swipe left or right. Handwriting recognition: selecting an input # 5 Ø button: calls up vehicle functions
# To move the digital map: swipe in any language
# Select B. Alternatively:
direction.
# When the basic menu of a main function is
# Select an input language.
Use the following functions with a two-finger shown, press the % button.
swipe:
# To select a main function: swipe left or
# To call up main functions and favourites: Main functions
right on the touchpad.
swipe down with two fingers. Calling up the main functions # Press the touchpad.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart. Calling up lists and menus on the multimedia
system
Setting the sensitivity
Multimedia system: Calling up a list
, System . w Input # Call up a main function (→ page 271).

# Select Touchpad sensitivity. # To open a list: swipe left on the touchpad.

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

The list is opened.
272 Multimedia system

# To select a menu item: swipe up or down R delete a favourite Adding a favourite

on the touchpad. R restore all favourites settings Adding a pre-defined favourite
# Press the touchpad.
Calling up favourites
# Press the © button.
Favourites The main functions are displayed.
Overview of favourites # Navigate downwards once.
Favourites offer you quick access to frequently Leaving the Favourites menu
used applications. It is possible to create 20
# Press the © button.
favourites in total.
The following functions are available:
R add pre-defined favourites from the follow‐
ing categories:
- Navigation
- Entertainment
- Telephone
- Connect
- Vehicle # Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
- System settings
R add your own favourites
# Navigate downwards twice.
The Favourites menu appears.
R rename a favourite
R move a favourite
 Multimedia system 273

# Select New favourite. # Select Rename. # To delete: select Clear.

The categories are displayed. # Enter characters. # Select Yes.
# Select a category. # To confirm the entry: select ¡. # To restore all favourites: select Reset all.
The favourites are displayed. A prompt appears.
# Select a favourite. Moving a favourite
# Press the © button. # Select Yes.
# Add a favourite at the desired position. The main functions are displayed. The favourites will restore to factory settings.
If a favourite has already been added at this
# Navigate downwards once.
position, it will be overwritten.
# Select a favourite. Switching the sound on/off
Adding your own favourite (example)
# Navigate downwards once.
# Select Vehicle.
The Favourites menu appears.
# Select Full screen: Consumption.
# Select Move.
# Press and hold the © button until the
# Move the favourite to the desired position.
favourites are displayed. If a favourite has already been added at this
# Add a favourite at the desired position. position, it will be overwritten.
Renaming a favourite Deleting a favourite
# Press the © button. # Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed. The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once. # Navigate downwards once.

# Select a favourite. # Select a favourite.

# Navigate downwards once. # Navigate downwards once.

The Favourites menu appears. The Favourites menu appears.
274 Multimedia system

# To switch off: press control knob 1. Adjusting the volume The volume of the navigation announce‐
The 8 symbol appears in the status line. ment changes in accordance with the vol‐
You will also hear traffic announcements and ume of the current media source.
navigation announcements even when the R during a telephone call
sound is muted. # Alternatively: select System.
# To switch on: change the media source or # Select Audio.
adjust the volume.
# Select volume settings.
# Set the volume.

Entering characters
Using the character input function
The following functions are available:
R selecting a character in the character bar
R writing a character on the touchpad
# Turn control knob 1. Character input can be started with a control
The volume of the current radio or media and resumed with another.
source is set. You can set the volume of
# On the Touch Control and controller:
other sound sources separately.
select a character in the character bar.
Adjust this in the following situations:
Depending on the destination entered, the
R during a traffic announcement following is available:
R during a navigation announcement R the full set of characters
 Multimedia system 275

R characters which are useful for the cur‐ Character input using the controller Ä To switch to special characters and sym‐
rent input string bols.
Example: renaming a favourite
Other characters are greyed out. X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
# On the touchpad: Select a character in the ters.
character bar. B To change the language.
or
v Handwriting To switch to character entry
# Write the characters on the touch-sensitive on the touchpad.
surface of the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition supports you by % The available editing functions depend on
means of character suggestions and a read- the editing task, the language set and the
aloud function. character level.
Characters can be entered using the following # To confirm the entry: select ¡.
methods: # Calling up the "Renaming a favourite" func‐ Example: entering a destination (navigation)
R using a keyword search for a track or artist tion (→ page 273). # Enter a POI or address (→ page 285).
R connecting the mobile phone to the multime‐ # To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4
dia system by entering the passkey and press the controller. Entering characters on the touchpad
R entering a phone number The character is entered in the input line. Requirements:
R entering a web address Use the following entry functions: The touchpad is switched on (→ page 270).
£ To delete a character: press the control‐ The entered or selected character should be
ler. read out: the handwriting recognition read-aloud
To delete an entry: press and hold the function is switched on (→ page 271).
controller until the entire entry is deleted.
276 Multimedia system

Example: renaming a favourite # To delete a character: swipe left when the display area comprises the left-hand or right-
cursor is located in the input line. hand third of the display.
# To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. # Select Additional display area.
# To finish character entry: swipe upwards. The following display content can be selected:
or R Dynamic
# Press the % button. R Navigation map
Example: entering a destination (navigation) R Consumption
# Enter a POI or address (→ page 285). R Time and date

Display brightness
# Calling up the "Renaming a favourite" func‐ System settings # Select Display brightness.
tion (→ page 273). Display # Select a brightness value.

# To enter a character: use your finger to Configuring display settings Switching the display off/on
write characters on the touchpad. Multimedia system: # Off: select Display off.
The character is entered in the input line. If , System . G Display and styles
different interpretations are possible, charac‐ # On: press a button, e.g. %.
ter suggestions are displayed. Designs
Display design
# To select a character suggestion: turn the # Select Design.
# Select Day/night design.
controller. # Select Sport, Classic or Progressive.
# Select Automatic, Day design or Night
# Resume character input.
Additional display area design.
# To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐ Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐
sor is located in the input line. tional information can be shown. The additional
 Multimedia system 277

Time and date Setting summer time Multimedia system:

The Automatic Summer Time and Summer Time , System . Time and date . Time set-
Setting the time and date automatically
options cannot be selected in all countries. ting
Multimedia system:
, System . Time and date . Automatic Multimedia system: # Set the hours.
, System . Time and date
time setting # Navigate to the right to set the minutes.

The correct time is required for the following Automatically # Set the minutes.
functions: # Switch Automatic Summer Time on O or off # Confirm changes when exiting the menu.
R route guidance with time-dependent traffic ª.
guidance The date is set automatically via GPS.
Manually
R calculation of expected time of arrival
# Deactivate ª Automatic Summer Time.
Bluetooth®
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Select Summer Time.
Bluetooth® settings
Setting the time zone # Select On or Off.
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-
Multimedia system:
Setting the time and date format range wireless data transfer up to approximately
, System . Time and date . Time zone:
Multimedia system: 10 m. You can use Bluetooth® to connect your
A list of countries is displayed. , System . Time and date . Set format mobile phone to the multimedia system and use
# Select a country #. the following functions, for example:
# Set the date and time format #.
Depending on the country, time zones are R hands-free system with access to the follow‐
displayed. Setting the time manually ing options:
# Select a time zone. Requirement: - contacts (→ page 312)
The time zone set is displayed after Time The Automatic time setting function is deactiva‐ - call lists (→ page 314)
zone:. ted or is not supported in a time zone. - text messages (→ page 314)
278 Multimedia system

R Internet connection (→ page 329) The Wi-Fi connection is established with a Multimedia system:
R listening to music via Bluetooth® audio Wi-Fi-enabled device, e.g. to the customer's , System . ö Connectivity

(→ page 346) mobile phone or tablet PC.

R multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
R transferring business cards (vCards) into the # Switch Wi-Fi on O or off ª.
vehicle Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
for example can be connected. If Wi-Fi is deactivated ª, communication via
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐ means that a connection to the HERMES
lowing methods: communication module cannot be estab‐
% Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
R WPS PIN lished. Functions such as dynamic route
available in all countries. guidance with Live Traffic Information are
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is then unavailable.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® made via a PIN.
Multimedia system: Connecting the multimedia system with a
R WPS PBC
, System . ö Connectivity device via Wi-Fi
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
# Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth®. made by pressing a button (push button). cation module is not installed.
R security key
The type of connection established must be
Wi-Fi The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is selected on the multimedia system and on the
Wi-Fi connection overview made via a security key. device to be connected.
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with Setting up Wi-Fi % The connection procedure may differ
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
any other network device. Requirement: tions that are shown in the display. Further
The following connection options are available: The device to be connected supports one of the information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
three means of connection described. ing instructions).
R Wi-Fi connection
 Multimedia system 279

# Select Internet settings. # Have the security key displayed on the device Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
# Select Search for Wi-Fi networks. to be connected (see the manufacturer's Multimedia system:
operating instructions). , System . ö Connectivity
# Via WPS PIN: highlight a Wi-Fi network in
# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
the list. Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-
tem.
# Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN. Fi hotspot
# Confirm the entry by pressing ¡.
The multimedia system generates an eight- The type of connection established depends on
digit PIN. % All devices support a security key as a the device to be connected. The function must
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. means of connection. be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
# Confirm the entry. Device has already been connected tion established must be selected on the multi‐
# By pressing a button: highlight a Wi-Fi net‐ # To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi media system and on the device to be connec‐
work in the list. network in the list. ted.
# Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC. # Activate O ¥ Connect automatically. # Select Set up hotspot.

# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options # To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the # Highlight Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
on the device to be connected. list. # To generate a WPS PIN: select ¥ Con-
# Press the WPS button on the device to be # Select ¥ Connect. nect using WPS PIN generation.
connected. The connection is established again. These # Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys‐
# Select Continue in the multimedia system. functions are possible when the device has tem display on the device to be connected
already been connected to the Wi-Fi network. and confirm.
# Using a security key: highlight a Wi-Fi net‐
work in the list. # Connect via WPS pin: select ¥ Con-

# Select ¥ Connect using security key. nect using WPS PIN input.
# Select Enter WPS PIN.
280 Multimedia system

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external # Select Generate security key. Multimedia system:
device's display on the multimedia system. A connection will be established with the , System . COMAND Touch
# Select Continue. newly created security key.
Connecting a new device
# To connect by pressing a button: select # To save a security key: select Save.
When a new security key is saved, all existing # Select Authorise a new device.
¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If # Select Connect new device.
# Press the push button on the device to be the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐ A security key is displayed.
connected. lished, the new security key must be entered. # Enter the security key in the external device.
# Select Continue.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
# To connect via a security key: select Con- COMAND Touch device and follow the instructions. The App
nect device to vehicle hotspot. is available in the App Store. message
A security key is displayed. Authorising a COMAND Touch device
appears
# Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ Requirements: Selecting an already connected device
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the R The COMAND Touch App is installed on the
SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX. external device (e.g. tablet) which is to be # Select Authorise a new device.
used as a Rear Seat Entertainment unit. The devices already connected are displayed.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the
R Wi-Fi is activated (→ page 278) and the mul‐ # Select Continue using connected devices.
multimedia system display on the device to
be connected. timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi Hot‐ The Please start COMAND Touch on your
spot (→ page 279). device and follow the instructions. The App
# Confirm the entry.
is available in the App Store. message
To generate a new security key: appears
# Select Set up hotspot.
# Select Generate security key.
 Multimedia system 281

Activating/deactivating the COMAND Touch % If you are using Arabic map data, the text R protecting your personal data against unwan‐
child safety lock information can also be shown in Arabic on ted export with PIN protection.
Multimedia system: the navigation map. To do so, select ‫ العربية‬as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐ You can either use an SD card or a USB storage
, System . COMAND Touch
tion announcements are then also made in device as temporary storage.
Child safety lock Arabic. % Please note that the NTFS file system is not
# Switch Parental control on O or off ª. supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
The content displayed on the external device mended.
Setting the distance unit
can only be set on the multimedia system. Importing/exporting data
Multimedia system:
, System . Units
System language * NOTE Data loss
# Select km or mi.
Notes on the system language # Do not remove the data storage
# Switch Additional speedometer on O to dis‐ medium when data is being exported.
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation play in the instrument cluster's multifunction
display. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
announcements. The selected language affects data.
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐ Data import and export Requirements:
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ R The vehicle is stationary.
tion announcements will be in English. Data import/export function
R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
The following functions are possible:
Setting the system language been started.
Multimedia system: R transferring data from one system or vehicle
R The SD card is inserted (→ page 338) or the
, System . Language
to another system or vehicle.
USB device is connected (→ page 341).
R creating a backup copy of your personal data
# Set the language.
and loading it again.
282 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Activating/deactivating PIN protection for User profile

, System . System backup data export
Selecting a user profile
Multimedia system:
# Select Import data or Export data. Multimedia system:
, System . System backup
, System . g Personalisation
Importing # To activate: activate PIN protection O.
# Select Guest or individual profile #.
# Select a data storage medium.
# Enter your four-digit PIN.
A prompt appears asking whether you really % Some settings from the user profile are only
# Enter your four-digit PIN again. loaded when the vehicle is stationary or
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐ PIN protection is activated when both PINs when the ignition is switched on.
nised during data reading. match.
# To deactivate: deactivate PIN protection ª.
Creating a user profile
The multimedia system is restarted once the Multimedia system:
data has been imported. # Enter your four-digit PIN. , System . g Personalisation . Cre-
% Current vehicle settings can be edited after % If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes- ate profile
the import. Benz service centre can deactivate your PIN
# Enter a name.
protection for you.
Exporting # Select a.
Alternatively: you can deactivate PIN protec‐
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
tion by resetting your personal data The user profile saves individual settings, e.g.:
ted.
(→ page 284). R system settings
# Enter your four-digit PIN.

# Select a data storage medium. R settings in the TV tuner's channel list

The data is exported. The data export may R navigation and traffic information
take several minutes.
The settings differ depending on the vehicle
equipment.
 Multimedia system 283

Importing/exporting user profiles # Export: select Export profiles to the server. Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
User profiles are exported. ous updates:
Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection % Certain settings such as address book Software update
(→ page 329). entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system are not exported. Source of the Update type
R A Mercedes me account exists at http:// update
www.mercedes.me. User profile options
R The Personalisation service is activated. Multimedia system: Internet Navigation maps, sys‐
, System . g Personalisation tem updates
Multimedia system:
# Highlight a profile. External storage Navigation maps
, System . g Personalisation . Man-
# ¥ Select an option.
medium, e.g. USB
ual export/import stick
This function is not available in all countries. The following options are available:
R Rename Performing a software update
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported. R Delete Requirement:
The individual profiles are always collectively R Reset An Internet connection is required for updates
imported or exported. which are obtained online (→ page 329).
% The guest profile cannot be deleted or
# Import: select Import profiles from the Multimedia system:
renamed.
server. , System . Software update

The The profile import overwrites the exist-

Software update Automatically
ing profiles. Do you want to continue? mes‐
sage appears. # Activate O the automatic software update.
Information on software updates
# Select Yes. The multimedia system provides a message Updates are performed.
User profiles are imported. when an update is available.
284 Multimedia system

The current status of the updates is dis‐ # Select Yes. Navigation

played. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to reset. Switching navigation on
The automatic software update is not availa‐
ble in all countries. No selected: the process is cancelled. Multimedia system:
, Navigation
Manually # Select Yes.
# Deactivate ª the automatic software
The multimedia system is reset to factory
settings and restarted.
update.
# Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
# Restart the system.

Reset function
Multimedia system:
, System . Reset

The multimedia system is reset to the factory

settings.
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R station presets
# Alternatively: press the ß button.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
R connected mobile phones position 1.
 Multimedia system 285

% If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐ or There are two available methods of destina‐
mate bar appears briefly. # Slide the controller to the right. tion entry:
R free search 2
Showing/hiding the navigation menu Destination entry R search step-by-step 3

Requirement: Entering a POI or address Method 1: free search

The map displays the current vehicle position. Multimedia system: # Enter a POI or address 2. The entries can
, Navigation . ¬ Destination be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The following entries may be made, for exam‐
ple:
R city, street, house number
R street, city
R postcode
# To show: swipe left on the touchpad or R POI name
Touch Control. # Select Enter destination. R POI category, e.g. Petrol station
or The country in which the vehicle is located is R city, POI name
# Slide the controller to the left. set 1.
# To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or
Touch Control.
286 Multimedia system

Examples: % This function is useful for countries in which # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
R if you are searching for Königsstraße in several character sets are supported. An ted, navigate upwards.
Stuttgart, for example, you can enter example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and # Select a destination in the list.
STUT and KÖN. Latin characters.
# To adopt a destination: select Adopt desti-
# To search online: select 6 ª ONLINE.
R if you are searching for a POI in the Uni‐ nation7.
ted Kingdom, for example, you can enter Once an Internet connection is established, a If there are several listings for a destination,
THE SHARD. list appears. It shows online destinations a list appears.
related to the previous entry.
To try both examples, the country setting # Select the destination.
must also be changed (Method 2). Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐ The destination address is shown.
net service provider.
# To switch to handwriting recognition: Method 2: search step-by-step
# Select the destination.
select 5. # Press the % button.
# Write characters on the touchpad. % Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries. or
# To switch to character selection: press the # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
% button. Requirements:
ted, navigate upwards.
or R You have a Mercedes me account.
The character bar is hidden. City or postcode
# Press the touchpad. R The service has been activated at a is highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
# To delete an entry: select 8 (if available). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. POI, are available.
R Press briefly: deletes the last character Further information can be found at http:// # Select City or postcode.
entered or the last suggestion adopted. www.mercedes.me. The character bar appears.
R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry. # To call up the list: press the % button. # Enter a city or postcode.
# To set the language: select 4. During destination entry, suggestions are
or made by the multimedia system. A selection
# Select a language. of destinations appears in a list.
 Multimedia system 287

The address may be entered in various # To adopt a destination: select Adopt desti- R the direction of the linear distance to the
orders, e.g.: nation. POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
R City or postcode, Street, House no. If there are several listings for a destination, for the vehicle's current position
a distance-orientated list appears. # Select a POI.
A street intersection may be entered, if
available. # Select the destination. # Alternatively, to filter the display by spe‐
The destination address is shown. cial characters: enter a search entry in the
R Street, City or postcode
top line.
R POI, e.g. Petrol station, City or postcode Selecting a POI The results list shows relevant POIs.
Multimedia system:
% The functions described for the free search Example: if you enter Italy, POIs are shown:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . POIs
may be used: R whose name includes the word Italy
# Select a category.
R switch to handwriting recognition
R which belong to the category Italian cui-
R switch to character selection or sine
# Select All categories.
R delete entry # Select ¡.
# Select a category. The first POI in the list is highlighted.
Entries in the POI field, for example, may
also be deleted with £. # Select a search position. # Select a POI.
R call up online search function (if availa‐ The special characters are displayed in a list.
The list is sorted by distance in ascending Setting the search position for the parking
ble) category, for example, during active route
order.
R call up a list guidance
The POIs show the following information:
# To change the country: select the country. # Select In the vicinity, Near destination or
R name of POI
# Enter a country. You only need to enter the Along the route.
R linear distance to the POI The list shows the located POIs or opens an
first character.
# Select a country in the list.
overview of the route.
288 Multimedia system

# Select a POI. # Alternatively, to filter the display by con‐ Selecting from the map
tacts: enter names or initials into the search Multimedia system:
Selecting the last destination field. , Navigation . Map menu
Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Previ-
# Select ¡. # Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
The first contact in the list is highlighted. screen mode, press the Touch Control, con‐
ous destinations
# Select the contact. troller or touchpad.
# Select the destination.
The map menu appears.
The destination address is shown. Entering geo-coordinates
# Select "move map" in map menu
# Alternatively: if a favourite has been saved Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Geo-
3(→ page 301).
(→ page 297), select From global favourites.
# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
# Select a favourite. coordinates
or touchpad.
The destination address is shown. # Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and or
Selecting a contact seconds. # Slide the controller in any direction.

Requirement: The map shows the relevant position. The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia # Confirm the entry.
tion under the crosshair. The more you move
system (→ page 308). your finger away from the middle on the
# To view or move a destination on the
touchpad, the faster the map moves.
Multimedia system: map: select Map. # Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Con- # To calculate a route: select Start route touchpad.
tacts guidance. If several destinations are located around the
# Select the contact. # If a route has already been created, select
crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and
The relevant contact details are displayed. roads.
Start new route guidance or Set as inter-
# Select an address. mediate destination.
 Multimedia system 289

If a destination is located exactly on the # Alternatively, to filter the display by POI # Select Set as destination.
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐ category: swipe down on the touchpad. The intermediate destination is set.
played. or # Alternatively: select an intermediate destina‐
# Select a destination in the list. tion via ¬ Destination during route guid‐
# Slide the controller down. ance.
The destination address is shown.
# Select a POI category. # Select Enter destination.
Showing traffic messages for the vicinity of # User defined allows personal POI symbols to
the map # Select Set as next intermediate destination
be selected (→ page 303). after entering the destination.
# Select Traffic messages for the vicinity.
The map appears. Entering an intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. Requirement: nations
or A destination is entered. Requirement:
# Slide the controller to the left or right. Multimedia system: Enter the destination and at least one intermedi‐
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐ , Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter- ate destination.
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic mediate destinations Multimedia system:
incident is displayed. , Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter-
# Select Search for an intermediate destina-
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map tion. mediate destinations
# Select Surrounding POIs. # Enter an intermediate destination. # Select Start new route guidance.
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. The search results are displayed. The route is calculated with the set inter‐
or # Select an intermediate destination. mediate destinations.
# Slide the controller to the left or right. The address of the intermediate destination Editing intermediate destinations
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the appears.
map. The name or address is displayed. Requirement:
A destination is entered.
290 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: The Fuel tank reserve level Do you want to start Set as next intermediate destination: the
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter- the search for filling stations? message is selected filling station is set as the next inter‐
mediate destinations shown. mediate destination. Route guidance begins.
# Select Yes.
Changing the order of the destinations If there are already four intermediate desti‐
The automatic filling station search begins. nations:
# Highlight the destination or intermediate des‐ The available filling stations along the route
# Select Yes in the prompt.
tination. or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi‐
tion are displayed. The selected filling station is entered into
# Select ¥ Move.
position 1 of the intermediate destinations
# Select the filling station.
# Move the intermediate destination to the menu. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted.
desired position. The address of the filling station is displayed. Route guidance begins.
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the # Variant 1: if a route has not been calculated,

touchpad. select Start route guidance. Route

The selected filling station is set as the desti‐
Deleting a destination nation. Route guidance begins. Calculating a route
# Highlight the destination or intermediate des‐ # Variant 2: if a route has been calculated,
Requirement:
tination. select Start new route guidance or Set as The destination is entered. The destination
# Select ¥ Delete. next intermediate destination. address is shown.
Start new route guidance: the selected filling # Variant 1: if a route has not been calculated,
Starting an automatic filling station search station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐ select Start route guidance.
Requirements: The route to the destination is calculated.
The automatic filling station search is activated tions are deleted. Route guidance to the fill‐
ing station begins. The map shows the route. Route guidance
O (→ page 293). then begins.
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
 Multimedia system 291

# Variant 2: if a route has been calculated, Selecting a route type A route with a short driving distance is
select Start new route guidance or Set as Multimedia system: calculated.
next intermediate destination. , Navigation . À Route
Start new route guidance: the selected desti‐ Dynamic route can be switched on O or off
# Select Route settings. ª for these route types. If Dynamic route is
nation address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate # Select a route type. switched on, Ask before changing the route
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to A route has already been created: the route can be selected.
the new destination begins. is calculated on the basis of the new route The route types Dynamic route and Ask
Set as next intermediate destination: the type. before changing the route are not available in
selected destination address is set as the A route has not been created: the next route every country.
next intermediate destination. Route guid‐ is calculated on the basis of the new route R Dynamic route
ance begins. type. The route is calculated with the currently
R Eco route set route type.
Taking alternative routes into consideration
# Select an alternative route (→ page 293).
An economical route is calculated. The Traffic messages via Live Traffic Informa‐
journey time may be somewhat longer tion or FM RDS-TMC are taken into
Other menu functions than for quicker routes. account.
# To save the destination: select ¥ Store The symbol for the current vehicle posi‐ Live Traffic Information is not available in
in "Previous destinations". tion is displayed in green. all countries.
# To display on the map: select ¥ Map. R Fast route R Ask before changing the route
# To call a telephone number: select ¥ A route with a quick journey time is cal‐ A prompt appears when a new route is
Call. culated. detected with a shorter journey time
# To call up an Internet address: select R Short route based on traffic reports. You can con‐
tinue to use the current route or use the
¥ www (if available). dynamic route instead.
292 Multimedia system

Selecting route options # Select Payment in cash or Electronic billing The multimedia system announces the
Multimedia system: or Off. names of the roads that will follow the
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid The route takes into account roads that upcoming change of direction.
options require the payment of a usage fee (toll). This function is not available in all coun‐
If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into tries and languages.
Avoiding areas account.
# Select Areas (→ page 304). Displaying destination information
These route options are not available in every
Avoiding motorways, ferries, motorail trains, Requirement:
country.
tunnels, unpaved roads A destination is entered. The route can also
The selected route options cannot always be include up to four intermediate destinations.
# Select O or deselect ª the avoid option. implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
Multimedia system:
ferry, for instance, even though the Ferries avoid
Using routes requiring a special toll sticker option is enabled. A message appears and you , Navigation . ¬ Destination
# Select Use vignette roads. will hear a corresponding message. # Select Intermediate destinations.
# Select O or deselect ª All or countries.
Selecting notifications The following information is displayed:
The route takes into account roads in the Multimedia system: R intermediate destinations and destination
selected countries which require you to pay a
, Naviga- R name, address
time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows
for the use of a route network for a limited tion . Z Options . Announcements R remaining driving distance
time period. # Switch announcements on O or off ª.
R time of arrival
R Announce traffic warnings
Using toll roads
# Select Use toll roads.
This function is not available in all coun‐
tries.
R Announce street names
 Multimedia system 293

Selecting an alternative route Route guidance The route may differ from the ideal route due to
Multimedia system: the following:
Notes on route guidance
, Navigation . À Route R roadworks
Route guidance begins once a route has been
# Select Alternative route. calculated. R incomplete digital map data
The routes are displayed in accordance with The road and traffic rules and regulations always
the setting made in the route settings. Changing direction
have priority over multimedia system driving rec‐
The currently selected route is shown with a ommendations.
dark blue line. Driving recommendations are:
# Select an alternative route. R Navigation announcements
Switching the automatic filling station R Route guidance displays
search on/off R Lane recommendations
Multimedia system:
, Navigation . Z Options If you do not follow the navigation announce‐
ments or if you leave the calculated route, a new
# Switch Reserve fuel level on O or off ª.
route is calculated automatically.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
Driving recommendations may differ from the
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
actual road and traffic conditions if:
you want to start searching for filling sta‐
tions. R the route is diverted
R the direction of a one-way street has
changed
For this reason, you must always observe road There are three phases when changing direction:
and traffic rules and regulations during your R Preparation phase
journey.
294 Multimedia system

If there is enough time between the changes cle position symbol has reached the white
of direction, the multimedia system prepares change-of-direction point.
you for the upcoming change of direction. A When the change of direction is complete,
navigation announcement, e.g. "Prepare to the map appears in full-screen mode.
turn right", is issued.
The map appears in full-screen mode. % Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
R Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the Lane recommendations
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by This display appears for multi-lane roads.
announcing "Turn right in 200 m". If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
The display is split into two parts. The map is multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a dations for the next two changes of direction.
detailed image of the junction or a 3D image
of the upcoming change of direction.
R Change-of-direction phase
1 Lanes not recommended
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
2 Recommended lane
nent change of direction with the announce‐
ment "Now turn right". 3 Approaching new lane
The display is split into two parts. R Lane not recommended 1
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐ In this lane, you will not be able to complete
tion when the light-coloured bar on the right the next change of direction without chang‐
drops down to 0 metres and the current vehi‐ ing lane.
R Recommended lane 2
 Multimedia system 295

In this lane, you will be able to complete both Switching navigation announcements on/off % You can access and add this function as a
the next change of direction and the one favourite under Spoken driving recommenda-
after that. Requirements: tions on/off.
R a route has already been created
R Possible lane (grey arrow) Switching navigation announcements on/off
R route guidance is active
In this lane, you will only be able to complete during a phone call
the next change of direction. # To switch off: during a navigation announce‐ # Select System.
R Approaching new lane 3 ment, press the 8 button on the multi‐
# Select õ Audio.
function steering wheel.
During the change of direction, new lanes # Switch Driving recommendations during
may be added. or
phone call on O or off ª.
# Press the controller on the right beside the
% Lane recommendations can also be dis‐ touchpad. Adjusting the volume of navigation
played in the instrument display and in the The Spoken driving recommendations have announcements
head-up display. been deactivated. message appears.
# To switch on: display the navigation menu
Requirements:
Destination reached R a route has already been created
Once the destination is reached, you will see the (→ page 285).
chequered flag Í. Route guidance is finished. # Select Driving recommendation.
R route guidance is active

When an intermediate destination has been In the following situations, navigation announce‐ # Press the W or X button on the multi‐
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐ ments are switched on automatically: function steering wheel during a navigation
tion flag with the number of your intermediate R the route is recalculated.
announcement.
destination Î. After this, route guidance is or
continued. R the multimedia system is switched off and
then on again. # Turn the controller on the right beside the
R the vehicle is restarted.
touchpad.
296 Multimedia system

% When you start the vehicle, the volume is set Multimedia system: % If the journey was interrupted for less than 2
to the lowest setting. , Navigation hours, route guidance continues automati‐
# Alternatively: select System. cally.
# Select Driving recommendation.
# Select õ Audio. The current navigation announcement is Multimedia system:
repeated. , Navigation . ¬ Destination
# Select Driving recommendation volume.

# Set the volume. % You can access and add this function as a # Select Continue route guidance.
favourite under Repeat spoken driving rec- The route is recalculated.
Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi‐ ommendation.
gation announcements Route guidance to an off-road destination
Cancelling route guidance Off-road destination: the destination is within
# Select System.
the digital map. However, the map contains no
# Select õ Audio.
Requirements: roads that lead to the destination.
R A route has already been created.
# Switch Audio fadeout during driving recom- You can enter off-road destinations on the map.
R Route guidance is active.
mendation on O or off ª. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
Multimedia system: ble with navigation announcements and displays
Repeating navigation announcements on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
, Navigation . ¬ Destination
Requirements: tem.
# Select Cancel route guidance.
R a route has already been created Shortly before you reach the last known position
R route guidance is active Resuming route guidance on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement. The display
Requirements: shows a direction arrow and the linear distance
R a route has already been created to the destination.
R route guidance is interrupted
 Multimedia system 297

Route guidance from an off-road location to R a direction arrow showing the linear direction # Select a position on the map.
a destination to the POI A list appears if there are several map posi‐
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is tions.
located within the digital map on roads that are When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as # Highlight a map position.
not available.
normal. # Select ¥ Store in "Previous destinations".
The following displays appear when route guid‐ The map position is saved to the "Last desti‐
ance begins: nations" memory.
Destination
R the Road not mapped message
Saving the current vehicle position Editing the last destinations
R a direction arrow showing the linear direction Multimedia system:
to the POI Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Previ-
, Navigation . Á Position
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the ous destinations
# Select Store position.
multimedia system, route guidance continues as # Highlight one of the last destinations.
normal. The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Last destinations" memory. # To save as a favourite: select ¥ Save as
Off-road status during route guidance global favourite.
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐ Storing a map position
Multimedia system: # To save as "Home" address: select ¥
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases, , Navigation Save as "Home" address.
the multimedia system will temporarily be # To save as "Work" address: select ¥
The map is in full-screen mode.
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on Save as "Work" address.
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. # To delete a single or all destinations:
touchpad.
The following displays appear when the vehicle select ¥ Delete or Delete all.
# Select "move map" 3 in the map menu
is off-road: A prompt appears.
(→ page 301).
R the Road not mapped message # Select Yes.
298 Multimedia system

# To display destination information: select Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐ R Registration is carried out at a Mercedes-
¥ Details. tion: Benz Service Centre on the Mercedes me
R Current traffic reports are received via the website.
Route guidance with current traffic reports Internet connection or via data roaming (for R If registration is not completed within this
selected European countries). time period, Live Traffic Information will be
Traffic information overview deactivated. If Live Traffic Information contin‐
R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
% The services are not available in every coun‐ lar intervals. ues to be used after this period, e.g. after six
try. months, the remaining time for free usage is
R In selected European countries, the subscrip‐
Traffic reports can be received with the following 2 and a half years.
tion service is available free of charge for a
services: period of three years from the manufacturing Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
R Live Traffic Information date. sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
R FM RDS-TMC The status of the subscription can be dis‐ dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
played (→ page 299). to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
It is not possible to use both services simul‐ fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
taneously. Registering Live Traffic Information sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC is R The service is initially activated for three for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
displayed with a symbol. months upon vehicle handover. quality of the traffic reports.
% Hazard alerts can be received using the Car- R The service must be registered If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐
to-X service. (→ page 299): tion, you can have this service deactivated at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
% There may be differences between the traffic - upon vehicle handover
reports received and the actual road and Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:
- within three months
traffic conditions. R This ensures the full, free usage period.
R A FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf‐
fic reports alongside the radio programme.
R FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
 Multimedia system 299

Displaying subscription information # Enter and confirm dates or follow the instruc‐ # Call up the Mercedes me user account.
tions. # Switch to the Mercedes me connect online
Requirement:
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Registering on Mercedes me store via the linked vehicle.
Information. Live Traffic Information must be registered. Reg‐ # Extend the Live Traffic Information service.
istration is carried out at a Mercedes-Benz # Select the extension period.
Multimedia system: Service Centre.
, Navigation . Z Options # Add the product to the shopping basket.
Requirement: you have a user account on the
The subscription expiry date is automatically dis‐ Mercedes me website.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.
played: Live Traffic Information remains activated for
# Create a user account with Mercedes me
the selected extension period. Activation
R one month before the expiry date. https://me.mercedes-benz.com. begins on the date of extension.
R one week before the expiry date. # A valid email address is required for this.
Displaying the traffic map
R on the expiry date. # Register the vehicle using the vehicle identifi‐
cation number (VIN). Requirements:
# To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub- R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is
# Have the vehicle linked to the Mercedes me
scription Info. equipped with a communication module fea‐
user account at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Depending on the status, one of the following Centre. The vehicle registration documents turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
messages appears: and a form of identification are required for When the vehicle is started, the communica‐
R The period of validity for the subscription this. tion module automatically establishes an
is displayed. # Accept the general and specific terms of use.
Internet connection. Traffic information is
R The subscription has expired. made available shortly afterwards.
Extending a subscription
# Select Extend subscription. Requirement: you have a user account on the
The website for extending the subscription is Mercedes me website.
called up.
300 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: R display for traffic delays on the route last‐ % The traffic delay is displayed for the current
, Navigation . Map menu ing at least one minute route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
R warning message symbols: longer are taken into consideration.
# Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, - d symbol Displaying details
the controller or the touchpad. - additional road safety note when # Display the traffic map (→ page 299).
The map menu appears. approaching a traffic incident, e.g. # Move the map (→ page 302).
# Select º. approaching tailback # Variant 1: when a traffic report symbol is
The traffic map can show the following infor‐ If the vehicle approaches a hazard under the crosshair, press the touchpad or
mation: spot on the route, a warning message the controller.
R traffic incidents, e.g.: is displayed on the map. A warning The traffic report details are displayed.
message may also be issued # Variant 2: press the touchpad or the control‐
- roadworks (→ page 301). ler.
- road blocks
Displaying traffic incidents # Select Traffic messages for the vicinity.
- warning messages Multimedia system: The map shows the traffic report symbols in
The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐ , Navigation . Z Options . Map con- the vicinity.
played in colour (on the route) or grey (off tent Traffic report information is displayed in the
the route). # Activate O Traffic incidents.
status line:
R traffic flow information: Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports R traffic report symbol
- traffic jam (red line) (e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐ R reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic
played. jam
- slow-moving traffic (yellow line)
Activating free flow and traffic delay R warning message (highlighted in red)
- free-flowing traffic (green line)
# Activate O Free Flow and Traffic delays.
 Multimedia system 301

# To select a traffic report symbol: select Map and compass The map and satellite images are shown in globe
Next or Previous. projection. This allows for a realistic map display
Map and compass overview
# Press on the touchpad or controller. in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
The traffic report details are displayed. ling.
In small map scales (20 m, 50 m), important
Issuing hazard alerts buildings are depicted realistically on the map in
Multimedia system: many cities; other buildings are shown as mod‐
, Naviga- els.
tion . Z Options . Announcements If online information is available, fuel prices and
# Activate O Announce traffic warnings. the availability of parking spaces in multi-storey
Warning messages are issued and approach‐ car parks are displayed, for example.
ing tailbacks which pose a risk are % Requirements:
announced.
R You have a Mercedes me account.
R The service has been activated at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Further information can be found at http://
www.mercedes.me.
1 To set the map scale
2 To select the map orientation and map view
3 To move the map
4 To call up the navigation map
5 To call up the traffic map
302 Multimedia system

% Company logos displayed on the map are Vehicles for left-side traffic: the map always # Slide the controller in any direction.
trademarks of the respective companies and shows the currently selected map scale at The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
used solely for the purpose of indicating the the bottom right. tion under the crosshair. The more you move
locations of these companies. The use of # Swipe up or down on the Touch Control or your finger away from the middle on the
such logos on the map does not indicate the touchpad. touchpad, the faster the map moves.
approval of, support of or advertising by or
these companies for the navigation system Selecting the map orientation
itself.
# Move two fingers apart or together on the Multimedia system:
touchpad. , Navigation . Map menu
Setting the map scale or # Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
Multimedia system:
# Slide the controller up or down. full-screen mode, press the Touch Control,
, Navigation . Map menu
the controller or the touchpad.
# Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
Moving the map The map menu appears.
full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, Multimedia system:
# In map menu 2 , select N, 2D or
the controller or the touchpad. , Navigation . Map menu
3D(→ page 301).
The map menu appears. # Alternatively: when the map is displayed in R N The map is aligned in 2D and displayed
# Select "Set map scale" in map menu full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, so that north is up.
1(→ page 301). the controller or the touchpad. R 2D The map is aligned in 2D and dis‐
The map scale appears with the currently The map menu appears.
played in the direction of travel.
selected scale. # Select "move map" in map menu
R 3D: The map is aligned in 3D and dis‐
Vehicles for right-side traffic: the map always 3(→ page 301).
# Move your finger in any direction on the
played in the direction of travel.
shows the currently selected map scale at
the bottom left. Touch Control or touchpad.
or
 Multimedia system 303

Selecting POI symbols Selecting text information Displaying the next intersecting street
Multimedia system: Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
, Navigation . Z Options . Map con- , Navigation . Z Options . Text , Navigation . Z Options

tent information # Activate O or deactivate ª Next intersect-

POIs include filling stations and hotels, for exam‐ # Select the setting. ing street.
ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the Current street shows the street you are cur‐ The function is activated O: if route guid‐
map. Not all POIs are available everywhere. rently driving on at the bottom of the display. ance is not active, the name of the next inter‐
# Select POI symbols. When the map is moved, the street name, secting street is displayed on the top edge of
The # dot indicates the current setting. the POI name or the area name appears the screen.
Standard displays symbols of predefined cat‐ under the crosshair. Displaying traffic signs on the map
egories in the map. Geo-coordinates displays the following infor‐ Requirement:
User defined allows you to personally select mation:
The vehicle is equipped with Traffic Sign Assist.
the symbols for the available categories. R longitude and latitude
Multimedia system:
None switches the display off. R elevation , Navigation . Z Options
# Select the setting. The elevation shown may deviate from # Switch Traffic signs on O or off ª.
# User defined: select categories. the actual elevation.
If the function is switched on O you will see
The POI symbols of the selected categories R number of satellites from which a signal the traffic signs recognised by Traffic Sign
are displayed O or not displayed ª. can be received Assist.
When the map is moved, this information The following traffic signs are displayed:
does not appear.
R speed limitations
None switches the display off. R overtaking restrictions
304 Multimedia system

R traffic signs with a restriction indicated # Variant 2: select Address entry. # Select ¥ Edit.
by an additional sign (e.g. in wet condi‐ # Enter the address.
tions) Moving the area on the map
# Select Adopt destination. # Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
Displaying the map version The map appears. or touchpad.
Multimedia system: # To display an area: press the Touch Control, or
, Navigation . Z Options the touchpad or the controller. # Slide the controller in any direction.
# Select Map version. A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided. Changing the size of the area
# Select Details.
# To change the size of the area: swipe up or # Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
% Information about new versions of the digital controller.
down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
or # Swipe up or down on the Touch Control or
service centre.
# Slide the controller up or down. the touchpad.
Avoiding an area or
The map scale is enlarged or reduced and
You can define areas along a route that you
changes the size of the area. # Slide the controller up or down.
would like to avoid. # To set the area: press the Touch Control, # Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
Avoiding a new area the controller or the touchpad. controller.
Multimedia system: The area is entered into the list.
Taking the area for the route into account
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid Changing an area # Avoid O or do not avoid ª an area in the
options . Areas Multimedia system: list.
# Select Avoid new area. , Navigation . À Route . Avoid Route guidance active: a new route is calcu‐
# Variant 1: select Using map. options . Areas lated.
# Move the map. # Highlight an area in the list.
 Multimedia system 305

No route has been created: the setting is car‐ conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. Map data
ried over to the next route guidance. Information about new versions of the digital Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
The route can include an area that is to be map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz tory. Depending on the country, map data for
avoided in the following cases: service centre. There you can receive updates to your region is either pre-installed or the map
the digital map. data is supplied on a data storage medium. You
R the destination is located in an area that
do not require an activation code for the map
is to be avoided Online map update data which is provided with your vehicle.
R there is no sensible alternative route % The online map update service is not availa‐ If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
ble in all countries. led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system: The online map update service from Mercedes do not need to enter the activation code.
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid
me connect can be used to update map data. An activation code is required for purchased
options . Areas The update is performed: map data.
# Highlight an area in the list.
R for one region (automatic map update) The activation code:
# Select ¥ Delete or ¥ Delete all.
R for several or all regions (manual map R can be used in one vehicle
update) R is non-transferable
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
One or all areas are deleted. The service must be activated at a Mercedes- R has six digits
Benz service centre in order to use automatic
Updating the map data updates. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre
if you are experiencing the following problems:
Updating at the Mercedes-Benz service Further information on the online map update
http://www.mercedes.me. R the multimedia system does not accept the
centre
The digital maps generated by the map software activation code
Further information on updates http://
become outdated in the same way as conven‐ manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/ R you have lost the activation code
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can de_DE/index.html.
only be provided by the navigation system in
306 Multimedia system

Displaying the compass The number of satellites received is shown. % Requirements:

Multimedia system: R You have a Mercedes me account.
Displaying the satellite map
, Navigation . Á Position
Multimedia system: R The service has been activated at a
# Select Compass. , Navigation . Z Options . Map con- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The compass display shows the following tent Further information can be found at http://
information: Satellite maps can be displayed in map scales www.mercedes.me.
R the current direction of travel with bear‐ from 2 km.
ing (360 degree format) and compass # Switch Satellite map on O or off ª. Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual (navi‐
direction By doing so, satellite maps in map scales gation)
R longitude and latitude coordinates in from 2 km to 10 km can be switched off.
degrees, minutes and seconds Information on navigation
% Satellite maps for these map scales are not Multimedia system:
R height (rounded) above sea level available in all countries. , Navigation . Information on navigation
R number of GPS satellites from which a
Displaying weather information # Select a topic.
signal can be received Multimedia system:
Displaying Qibla , Navigation . Z Options . Map con-
Multimedia system: tent
, Navigation . Á Position
# Switch Weather information on O or off ª.
# Select Qibla (if available). When the function is switched on O, current
The arrow on the compass shows the direc‐ weather information is displayed on the navi‐
tion of prayer to Mecca in relation to the cur‐ gation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover‐
rent direction of travel. This function is not age.
available in all countries. This function is not available in all countries.
 Multimedia system 307

Telephone 4 ¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active) Notes on telephony

Telephony 5 Contacts (→ page 312)
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
6 Call list - Device_name (→ page 314)
Telephone menu overview ating integrated communication equip‐
7 Text message (→ page 314) ment while the vehicle is in motion
8 Connect device (→ page 308)
If you operate communication equipment
9 Options integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
The Bluetooth® interface is available to you for will be distracted from the traffic situation.
telephony. The mobile phone is connected This could also cause you to lose control of
directly via the multimedia system. the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
You can also use the optionally available tele‐
phone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) for traffic situation permits.
telephony. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a vehicle whilst paying attention to road
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐ and traffic conditions and operate the
media system. The symbols depend on your equipment with the vehicle stationary.
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider. & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
If the mobile phone connected supports the ating mobile communication equipment
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access while the vehicle is in motion
connected mobile phone Profile), the i menu item is available. If you operate mobile communication equip‐
2 Mobile phone network provider ment when driving, you will be distracted
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network from the traffic situation. This could also
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
308 Multimedia system

Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐ Further information can be obtained from a R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
cle is stationary. Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http:// the network with the second SIM card at the
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. same time
You must observe the legal requirements for the HD Voice® Connecting a mobile phone (authorising)
country in which you are currently driving when R To improve voice quality, the multimedia sys‐
operating mobile communication equipment in Requirements:
tem supports telephone calls in HD Voice®.
the vehicle. Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see
R In order to use this function, the mobile the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Telephony is possible via:
phones and the mobile phone network pro‐
R the Bluetooth® interface vider of the person you are calling must sup‐ Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys‐
tem (→ page 278).
R the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP port HD Voice®.
profile) Multimedia system:
Depending on the quality of the connection, the , Telephone . á Connect device - no
Bluetooth® profile overview voice quality may fluctuate.
device connected
Function The following situations can lead to the call
Bluetooth® profile Searching for a mobile phone
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
of the mobile phone
motion: # Select Connect new device.
PBAP (Phone Book Contacts are auto‐ R there is insufficient network coverage in the # Select Start search.
Access Profile) matically displayed in area The available mobile phones are displayed. If
the multimedia sys‐ R you move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐ a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
tem ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no by the á symbol.
MAP (Message Message functions communication channels are free
Access Profile) can be used R the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
 Multimedia system 309

Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation Disconnecting a mobile phone (de-authoris‐ Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
using Secure Simple Pairing) ing) munication (NFC)
# Select the mobile phone. Multimedia system:
Requirements:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system , Telephone . á Connect device -
R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
and on the mobile phone. Mobile phone the manufacturer's operating instructions)
# If the codes match: confirm the code on # Select the mobile phone from the device list. R the mobile phone's screen is switched on
the mobile phone. # Select ¥. and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation by # Select De-authorise.
ating instructions)
entering a passkey) # Select Yes. NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer.
# Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile
phone. Switching mobile phones
# Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐ Requirement:
nation as a passkey. The mobile phones are authorised (→ page 308).
# Multimedia system: enter the passkey and Multimedia system:
select a. , Telephone . á Connect device -
# Mobile phone: enter the passkey again and Mobile phone
confirm. # Select the mobile phone from the device list.
% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised % Only one mobile phone can be connected at
on the multimedia system. any one time. The connected mobile phone
All telephones are automatically reconnec‐ is displayed at the top of the list.
ted.
310 Multimedia system

# To switch mobile phones: lightly press the Multimedia system:

NFC area of the mobile phone (see the man‐ , Telephone . á Connect device -
ufacturer's operating instructions). Mobile phone
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system, it is now con‐ This function ensures optimal language quality.
nected. # Highlight the mobile phone in the device list.

If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐ # Select ¥.

timedia system for the first time, it is connec‐ # Select Reception volume or Transmission
ted after confirming the mobile phone volume.
instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐
# Set the volume.
ing instructions).
Further functions without having a mobile phone Further information on the recommended recep‐
authorised on the multimedia system: tion and transmission volume: http://
R transferring a contact or a business card, www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
e.g. for direct navigation to an entered Adjusting the call and ringtone volume
# To connect a mobile phone: open stowage address Multimedia system:
compartment cover 1. R transferring a URL to the enlarged view in the , System . õ Audio
# Lightly press NFC area 2 on the inside of multimedia system # Select Telephone speech volume or Phone
the cover. Setting the reception and transmission vol‐ ringtone volume.
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ ume # Set the volume.
media system.
Requirement:
A mobile phone is authorised (→ page 308).
 Multimedia system 311

Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐ # Select Dial number. Conducting calls with several participants
nition The call is made.
Requirements:
Requirement: Accepting a call R there is an active call (→ page 311)
the mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ # Select Accept. R another call is being made
dia system (→ page 308).
Rejecting a call Switching between calls
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
# Select Reject. # Select call #.
# Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐
The selected call is active. The other call is
function steering wheel for more than one Ending a call on hold.
second. # Select =.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition. Activating or ending a call on hold
Activating functions during a call # Select Continue call or End call.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition # To show all functions, navigate down.
# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
The following functions are available during a Conducting a conference call
function steering wheel. call: # Select Create conference call in the tele‐
R End call phone menu.
Calls The new participant is included in the confer‐
R Make additional call
ence call.
Telephone operation R Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones)
Multimedia system: Ending an active call
R Microphone off or Microphone on
, Telephone . ª Contacts # Select =.
R Private Mode (an active call in hands-free
Making a call mode is transferred over to the telephone) % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
# Enter a number.
312 Multimedia system

Incoming call during an existing call (call R 3,000 entries are for permanently saved con‐ Manually
waiting) tacts. # Deactivate ª Call up contacts automati-

Requirement: R 3,000 for contacts loaded from the mobile cally.

There is an active call (→ page 311). phone. # Select Call up contacts.

If you receive a call while already in a call, a From the contacts menu, you can perform the Calling up contacts
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also following actions: Multimedia system:
sounds. R Telephone operation (→ page 313) , Telephone . ª Contacts
# Select Accept.
R Navigation (→ page 288)
The incoming call is active. The previous call The following options can be used to search for
R Writing messages (→ page 313) contacts:
is on hold.
# Select Reject. If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia R search by initials

% This function and behaviour depends on your system (→ page 308) and automatic calling up R search by name
mobile phone network provider and the (→ page 312) is activated, the mobile phone's R search by phone number
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ contacts are displayed in the address book.
# Enter characters into the search field.
ating instructions). Downloading mobile phone contacts A selection of possible contacts appears.
Multimedia system: Entering more characters into the search
Contacts , Telephone . Z Options field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
Information about the contacts menu Automatically
The contacts menu contains all contacts from # Select the contact.
# Activate O Call up contacts automatically.
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or A contact can contain the following details:
memory card. R phone numbers
It is possible to store up to 6,000 contacts: R navigation addresses
 Multimedia system 313

R geo-coordinates Overview of importing contacts as electronic Saving a mobile phone contact

business cards Multimedia system:
Editing the format of a contact's name
, Telephone . ª Contacts
Multimedia system: Source Requirements:
, Telephone . Z Options . Name # Call up a mobile phone contact ó
ò Memory card The SD memory card (→ page 312).
format is inserted.
# Select ¥.
The following options are available:
ò USB device The USB device is # Select Save in vehicle.
R Surname, first name inserted into the USB The contact saved in the multimedia system
R Surname First name port. is identified by the f symbol.
R First name Surname If the sending of
ñ Bluetooth® con‐ Calling a contact
# Select an option. nection vCards is supported Multimedia system:
via Bluetooth®, , Telephone . ª Contacts
Importing contacts into the contacts menu vCards can be
Via Z Options, you can import contacts into received on mobile # Enter characters into the search field.
the telephone book as electronic business cards phones or netbooks, # Select the contact.
from different sources. for example. # Select a telephone number.
Bluetooth® is activa‐ The number is dialled.
ted in the multimedia
system and on the Further options in the contacts menu
respective device Multimedia system:
(see the manufactur‐ , Telephone . ª Contacts

er's operating instruc‐ # Select ¥.

tions).
314 Multimedia system

The following options are available: # Select the contact. Making a call from the call list
R Contact details # Select ¥. Multimedia system:
, Telephone . ø Call list -
R Save in vehicle # Select Delete contact.
Device_name
R Delete contact # Select Yes.
# Select an entry.
Within contact details # Make the call.
# Select ¥. Call list
Call list overview Options in the call list
The following options are available:
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue‐ Multimedia system:
R Call , Telephone . ø Call list -
tooth® profile, the call lists from the mobile
R Send text message Device_name
phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
R Save as global favourite When connecting the mobile phone, you may # Highlight the entry.
R Show website (when a web address is have to confirm the connection for the PBAP # Select ¥.
stored) Bluetooth® profile.
The following options are available:
R Navigate (when an address is stored) If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP
R Send text message
R Send DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF Bluetooth® profile, the multimedia system gener‐
ates its own call lists. These are not the same as R Open contact
tones)
the call lists in your mobile phone.
Deleting a contact Text messages
Multimedia system:
, Telephone . ª Contacts Notes on the text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.
MAP Bluetooth® profile, the text message func‐
# Search for a contact. tions can be used on the multimedia system.
 Multimedia system 315

You can obtain further information about set‐ R New and unread messages # Select Write new text message.
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®- R New messages Adding a recipient
capable mobile phones from a Mercedes-Benz R Off (The text messages are not displayed
service centre or at: http://www.mercedes- # Select Press to add recipient.
automatically.)
benz.com/connect # Select the contact.
# Select an option.
Some mobile phones require further settings Dictating text
after being connected to the multimedia system Reading text messages
# Select Press to dictate.
(see manufacturer's Owner's Manual). Multimedia system:
The App for the dictation function is loaded.
New messages are identified by the 1 symbol , Telephone . i Text message
in the multimedia system's display and an audi‐ If there was no prior Internet connection, a
ble signal. Reading a text message connection is now established.
# Select a text message. # To start the dictation function: press the con‐
R The multimedia system displays the 100
newest text messages. The message text is displayed. troller or touchpad.
Using the read-aloud function # Say your message.
R The ú symbol is displayed when the
mobile phone's message memory is full. The dictation ends automatically after you
# Highlight the text message. have finished speaking.
Configuring the text messages displayed # Select ¥.
After the voice message has been processed,
Multimedia system: # Select + Read aloud. it is shown as text.
, Telephone . Z Options . Call up The text message is read aloud.
messages Editing text
Composing and sending a text message # Select the word.
# Select ¥. Multimedia system:
A menu with the following options is shown: , Telephone . i Text message

R All messages # Navigate to the left twice.

316 Multimedia system

# To call up the correction menu: press the Calling a text message sender The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the
controller or touchpad. Multimedia system: Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa‐
The following options are available: , Telephone . i Text message ble for you around the clock.
R adjusting the capitalisation of words (if # Select a text message. The Info call button, the breakdown assistance
supported by the character set) button and the emergency call button can be
# Select ¥.
found on the overhead control panel of the vehi‐
R expanding the choice of words # Select Call sender. cle (→ page 317).
R deleting the selection
Deleting text messages You can also use the multimedia system to make
R recording a new dictation the call (→ page 317).
Multimedia system:
# To leave the menu: select Done. , Telephone . i Text message Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
Sending text messages # Select ¥.
call the national emergency services first using
# Select Send text message. # Select Delete. the standard national emergency service phone
Replying to a text message numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Multimedia system: Mercedes me connect Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(→ page 319).
, Telephone . i Text message
Notes on Mercedes me connect Further information on Mercedes me connect,
# Select a text message. Mercedes me connect provides the following the provided service scope and operation:
# Select ¥. services: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/
# Select Reply. R Breakdown management connectme/de_DE/index.html
R Appointment requests or similar
R Accident management
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
 Multimedia system 317

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre Further information on Mercedes me connect,

using the multimedia system the provided service scope and operation is
available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/
Requirements: cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html
In order to be able to use the Mercedes me con‐
nect service in the vehicle, the following is Making a call via the overhead control panel
required: Requirements:
R You have access to a GSM network. In order to be able to use the Mercedes me con‐
R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ nect service in the vehicle, the following is
age is available in the respective region. required:
R The ignition must be switched on so that R You have access to a GSM network.
vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
cally. age is available in the respective region.
Multimedia system: R The ignition must be switched on so that
, Telephone . ª Contacts vehicle data can be transferred automati‐
cally. 1 Breakdown assistance call
# Call Mercedes me connect.
2 SOS button cover
After confirmation, the multimedia system
3 MB Info call
sends the required vehicle data.
4 SOS button
The data transfer is shown in the display.
Then, you can select a service and be con‐ # To make a breakdown assistance call:
nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz press button 1.
Customer Centre. # To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 2 briefly to open.
318 Multimedia system

# Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least R other products and services from Mercedes- An emergency call is made to the Mercedes-
one second. Benz Benz emergency call centre after an accident:
# To make an MB Info call: press button 3. Data is transmitted during the connection to the R a voice connection is made to a contact per‐
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (→ page 319). son at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
An emergency call can be initiated even if a centre.
breakdown assistance or MB Info call is active. Information on the breakdown assistance R if necessary, the contact person at the
This has priority over all other active calls. call Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for‐
Calls via the overhead control panel are only A breakdown assistance call to the Mercedes- wards the call to Mercedes me connect acci‐
possible with an available mobile phone net‐ Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the dent management.
work. overhead control panel (→ page 317) or the mul‐
timedia system (→ page 317). R if necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a
More information on Mercedes me connect and Mercedes-Benz service centre.
further services can be found at: http:// R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries
www.mercedes.me out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be Mercedes me connect service message
towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
Information on the MB Info call centre. ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre has been initiated via the overhead con‐ You may be charged for these services.
Centre. You will then receive individual recom‐
trol panel (→ page 317) or the multimedia sys‐ Data is transferred during the connection to the mendations regarding the maintenance of your
tem (→ page 317). Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (→ page 319). vehicle.
You can find information on the following topics: Regardless of whether you have consented to
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
R activation of Mercedes me connect dent management the maintenance management service, the multi‐
R operating the vehicle The Mercedes me connect accident manage‐ media system reminds you after a certain
ment is an extension of the Mercedes-Benz amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
R nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
emergency call system (→ page 319). appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment.
 Multimedia system 319

# To arrange a service appointment: select improve the processing of your request? mes‐ Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Call. sage appears.
Notes on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
After your confirmation, the vehicle data is # Select Yes. system
sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre The relevant vehicle data is sent automati‐ The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only
employee deals with your appointment. The cally. functions in areas where mobile phone coverage
information is then sent to your desired
More information on Mercedes me: http:// is available from the relevant contract partner.
service outlet.
www.mercedes.me Insufficient network coverage from the relevant
This service outlet will then contact you contract partner may result in an emergency call
within 24 hours. Transferred data during a service call not being transmitted.
% If you select Call later after the service mes‐ In certain countries you must confirm the data The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
sage appears, the message is hidden and transfer. matic emergency call can be made.
reappears after a certain period of time. Data transferred includes the following:
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
Consenting to the data transfer for Mercedes Overview of transferred data call system
me connect The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can
Service call Transferred data
Requirement: help to decisively reduce the time between an
There is an active breakdown assistance or Info MB Info call R current vehicle accident and the arrival of emergency services
call on the multimedia system (→ page 317) or Breakdown assis‐ location at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
the overhead control panel (→ page 317). tance call R vehicle identifica‐ accident site in places that are difficult to
tion number access.
If the breakdown and Mercedes me connect
concierge services are not activated on R service code The emergency call can be made automatically
Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehi- (→ page 320) or manually (→ page 321). Only
R selected data make emergency calls if you or others are in
cle data and the vehicle's position to the about the status need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to of the vehicle
320 Multimedia system

in the event of a breakdown or a similar situa‐ dent, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
tion. may automatically initiate an emergency call. cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
The emergency call has been made: gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
Messages in the multimedia system display: ically sent to the public emergency services call
SOS READY: emergency call available R a voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
centre.
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or there Benz emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public
is a malfunction with the emergency call system. R a message with accident data is transmitted
emergency services, a relevant message
During an active emergency call, G appears to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. appears in the display.
in the display. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre # Dial the emergency call number 999 or 112
You can find more information on the regional can transmit the vehicle position data to one on your mobile phone.
availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call of the public emergency services call cen‐
tres. If an emergency call has been initiated:
system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
R in certain situations additional data is trans‐ R remain in the vehicle, if the road and traffic
connect_ecall
mitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call conditions permit you to do so, until a voice
% If an emergency call is unavailable, a mes‐ connection is established with the emer‐
sage to this effect also appears in the multi‐ centre.
gency call centre operator.
function display of the instrument cluster. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or
towing to a Mercedes-Benz service centre to R on the basis of the call, the operator decides
Automatic emergency call be initiated quickly. whether it is necessary to deploy rescue
teams and/or the police to the accident site.
Requirements: If your vehicle is equipped with an SOS button in
R The ignition is switched on. R if no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
the overhead control panel, it flashes until the lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
R The starter battery has been sufficiently emergency call has been completed.
charged. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
If restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt matic emergency call.
tensioners have been activated after an acci‐
 Multimedia system 321

Manual emergency call This allows measures for rescue, recovery or R the last GPS position data on the route (a few
# If the vehicle has an SOS button in the over‐ towing to a Mercedes-Benz service centre to hundred metres before the incident)
head control panel: press and hold the but‐ be initiated quickly. R direction of travel
ton for at least one second.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R vehicle identification number
The emergency call has been made: cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ R the vehicle drive type
R a voice connection is made to the Mercedes- gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
ically sent to the public emergency services call R the estimated number of people in the vehi‐
Benz emergency call centre. cle
centre.
R remain in the vehicle, if the road and traffic R whether Mercedes me connect is available or
conditions permit you to do so, until a voice If no connection can be made to the public
emergency services, a relevant message not
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call centre operator. appears in the display. R whether the emergency call was initiated
# Dial the emergency call number 999 or 112
manually or automatically
R on the basis of the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to deploy rescue on your mobile phone. R the time of the accident
teams and/or the police to the accident site. Ending an unintentional emergency call R the language setting on the multimedia sys‐
R a message with accident data is transmitted tem
# Select ~ on the multifunction steering
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. wheel. For accident clarification purposes, the following
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre measures can be taken up to an hour after the
can transmit the vehicle position data to one Transmitted data with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call has been initiated:
of the public emergency services call cen‐ emergency call system
R the current vehicle position can be called up
tres. The following data is transmitted to the
R a voice connection to the vehicle occupants
R in certain situations additional data is trans‐ Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre:
can be established
mitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call R the vehicle's GPS position data
centre.
322 Multimedia system

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP pro‐ Multimedia system:
traffic information, cannot be performed for file) , Telephone
up to two hours after sending an emergency
call. Fitting/removing the telephone module Connecting the telephone module
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
(Russia)
Requirements:
R The starter battery has sufficient charge.
R The ignition is switched on.
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
# To start the test mode: press and hold the
~ button on the multifunction steering # To fit: Slide module 2 in the centre console # Select á Connect device - no device con-
wheel for at least five seconds. stowage compartment up into bracket 1 nected.
The test mode is started and automatically until it audibly engages.
ends after the language test has been per‐ # Select Connect MB SAP module.
formed.
# To remove: press release knob 3. # Press button 2.
To end the test mode manually: switch off
# Slide module 2 down and remove it.
# # As soon as indicator lamp 1 starts flashing
the ignition. Connecting, activating and deactivating the yellow, release the button.
The test mode is ended. telephone module # Select Start search and confirm.
Requirement: # Select OK.
The module is fitted (→ page 322).
 Multimedia system 323

Activating the telephone module # To insert a SIM card: insert SIM card 1 A list of mobile phones which are compatible
# Select á Connect device - Mobile phone. into the card slot with the contact surface with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
facing down until it engages. profile) can be found at:
# Select Activate MB SAP module and confirm.
A Bluetooth® connection with a mobile http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Disconnecting the telephone module phone is no longer possible.
Multimedia system:
# Select á Connect device - Mobile phone. # To remove a SIM card: press and release , Telephone
# Select ¥. SIM card 1.
The SIM card is pushed out slightly and can Searching for a mobile phone
# Select Disconnect MB SAP module.
then be removed. # á Connect device - no device connected
# Select Yes.
Establishing a connection between the # Select Connect new device.
Inserting/removing a SIM card mobile phone and telephone module # Select Connect SAP telephone and confirm.
Requirements: # Select Start search.
R The telephone module is fitted (→ page 322) Detected mobile phones are displayed.
and activated (→ page 322).
Authorising and connecting a mobile phone
R Terminate the active Bluetooth® connection
# Select the mobile phone.
of the mobile phone.
# Enter a random 16-digit PIN and confirm.
R Use the telephone module without the SIM
card. # Enter and confirm the same PIN on the
mobile phone.
Depending on the type, settings must also be
# If necessary, enter the SIM card PIN.
made on the mobile phone (see the manufactur‐
er's operating instructions).
324 Multimedia system

Observe the following notes: Multimedia system: Storing the SIM card PIN in the telephone
R a mobile phone which has already been , Telephone . á Connect device - module
authorised is automatically connected. Mobile phone Multimedia system:
, Telephone . á Connect device - no
R the multimedia system always searches for # Select the mobile phone on the SAP module
the last connected mobile phone. If this is device list. device connected . SIM Card
not available, the previously connected The mobile phone is searched for and con‐ # Select ¥.
mobile phone is searched for. nected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if # Switch Store PIN on O.
R only one mobile phone can be connected to Bluetooth® is activated.
the module at any one time. Telephone module settings
# Confirm the module's connection request on

Switching to the mobile phone on the tele‐ the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's Settings for using the telephone module with
phone module operating instructions). the mobile phone
# Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN Num‐ Function
Requirement: into the multimedia system and confirm.
You can only switch to another authorised ber
mobile phone if you are not currently making a The currently connected mobile phone is indica‐ 00031 Activates caller ID transmission
call. ted by the # dot in the Bluetooth® phone list.
A maximum of 15 mobile phones can be author‐ 00030 Deactivates caller ID transmission
ised on the module. 00061 Activates data roaming
00060 Deactivates data roaming
00071 Activates network provider restric‐
tion
 Multimedia system 325

Transferring the phone book via the tele‐ R depending on the mobile phone, text mes‐
00070 Deactivates network provider
phone module sages are not directly visible and must first
restriction
The transfer takes place automatically once a be selected (see the manufacturer's operat‐
00081 Activates text message transfer connection has been established via Bluetooth®: ing instructions).
00080 Deactivates text message transfer R If the mobile phone supports the PBAP A list of mobile phones which are compatible
(Phone Book Access Profile), the system with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
00082 Sets situation-related dimming of gives priority to loading phone book entries profile) can be found on the Internet at:
the indicator lamp from the phone memory. http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
00083 Does not change the brightness of R If there are no entries in the phone memory,
the phone book entries from the SIM card Deleting call lists in the telephone module
the indicator lamp Call lists are only available in the telephone mod‐
are imported.
Setting the ringtone for the telephone mod‐ ule if the connected mobile phone supports the
ule A list of compatible mobile phones can be found Bluetooth® PAP (Phonebook Access Profile) pro‐
Multimedia system: at: file.
, Telephone . á Connect device - http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Deleting call lists
Mobile phone Notes on receiving text messages when Number Function
# Highlight a mobile phone. using the telephone module
Observe the following notes when using the tele‐ 0002 Call lists in the tele‐
# Select ¥.
phone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile): phone module are
# Select Ringtones. deleted
R it is only possible to access the text message
# Select a ringtone.
memory of the SIM card.
The ringtone is played.
R incoming text messages are saved on the
The settings are applied once you exit the
SIM card.
menu.
326 Multimedia system

Terminating the connection between the Charging a mobile phone via the telephone Resetting the telephone module to factory
mobile phone and the telephone module module settings
There are two ways of disconnecting the
mobile phone and module:
Automatic discon‐ Occurs after leaving
nection the reception range
Manual disconnec‐ Occurs by terminating
tion the Bluetooth® con‐
nection on the mobile
phone (see the manu‐
facturer's operating
instructions) # Slide and remove module cover 2. # Press and hold button 2 on the module.
# Connect the mobile phone using a data cable # As soon as indicator lamp 1 lights up
with USB port 1. orange, release button 2.
# Press button 2 again.

Apple CarPlay™
Overview of Apple CarPlay™
iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay™. It is operated
using the controller or the Siri® voice-operated
control system.
 Multimedia system 327

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ Multimedia system: Exiting Apple CarPlay™
ted via Apple CarPlay™ to the multimedia sys‐ , Connect . Apple CarPlay # Select Ú in Apple CarPlay™.
tem.
While using Apple CarPlay™, various functions of Setting automatic or manual start Calling up Apple CarPlay™ tone settings
the multimedia system, e.g. the navigation, are A message appears when connected for the first Multimedia system:
not available. time. , Connect . Apple CarPlay . Sound
# Automatic start: select Automatically. # Select the tone menu (→ page 360).
The availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary
according to the country. Start automatically is activated O.
Ending Apple CarPlay™
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ Apple CarPlay™ will now start immediately
Multimedia system:
cation and the services and content connected after the iPhone® is connected to the multi‐
, Connect . Apple CarPlay
to it. media system using a USB cable.
# Manual start: select Manually. # Select Disconnect.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay™ The connection is ended.
# Select the iPhone® in the device list.
Requirements: The mobile phone continues to be supplied
R Apple CarPlay™ can be used with Apple® Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ with electricity.
operating system version iOS 8.3 or above. ulations or
A message with the data protection regulations
R The full range of functions for Apple Car‐ # Disconnect the connecting cable between
appears.
Play™ is only possible with an Internet con‐ the mobile phone and multimedia system.
# Select Accept and start.
nection. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐ # Select Reject and end. stationary.
ble cable (→ page 341). If you selected automatic start, you will have
to start Apple CarPlay™ manually the next
time you want to use it.
328 Multimedia system

Android Auto R The mobile phone supports Android Auto # Select Accept and start.
from Android 5.0. or
Android Auto overview
Mobile phone functions can be used with R The Android Auto App is installed on the # Select Reject and end.
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐ mobile phone.
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated R In order to use the telephone functions, a Activating automatic start
using the controller or the voice-operated con‐ mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐ # Select Start automatically O.
trol system. timedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 308). Starting manually
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ If there was no prior internet connection, this # Select the mobile phone from the device list.
ted via Android Auto® to the multimedia system. is established with the use of the mobile
While using Android Auto™, various functions of phone with Android Auto. Exiting Android Auto
the multimedia system, e.g. the navigation, are R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ # Press the ò button.
not available. media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (→ page 341). Calling up the Android Auto tone settings
The availability of Android Auto® and Android Multimedia system:
Auto® Apps may vary according to the country. R The full range of functions for Android Auto is , Connect . Android Auto . Sound
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ only possible with an Internet connection.
# Select the tone menu (→ page 360).
cation and the services and content connected Multimedia system:
to it. , Connect . Android Auto Ending Android Auto
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Multimedia system:
# Select the mobile phone from the device list.
, Connect . Android Auto
Requirements: Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ # Select Disconnect.
R The first activation of Android Auto on the ulations The connection is ended.
multimedia system must be carried out when A message with the data protection regulations
the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. appears.
 Multimedia system 329

The mobile phone continues to be supplied To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the This data is only transferred while the navigation
with electricity. mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly gener‐ system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
or ated. can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
# Disconnect the connecting cable between This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ If you do not consent to vehicle data being trans‐
the mobile phone and multimedia system. tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ ferred, you can deactivate the automatic start of
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting media system is reset (→ page 284). Android Auto™ (→ page 328) or Apple CarPlay™
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is Driving status data: (→ page 327) and temporarily terminate the USB
stationary. connection between the mobile phone and the
R transmission position engaged
vehicle.
R distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
Transferred vehicle data when using Apple and driving
CarPlay™ and Android Auto R day/night mode of the instrument cluster
Online and Internet functions
Notes on transferred vehicle data Internet connection
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
When using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™, content is displayed to correspond to the driving Internet connection restrictions
certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile situation.
phone. This enables you to get the best out of & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is Position data:
mation systems and communications
not directly accessible. R co-ordinates equipment
System information: R speed
If you operate information and communica‐
R software release of the multimedia system R compass direction tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
R system ID (anonymised) R acceleration direction when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
The transfer of this data is used to optimise lose control of the vehicle.
communication between the vehicle and the
mobile phone.
330 Multimedia system

# Only operate this equipment when the The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐ The Internet connection via Wi-Fi may be restric‐
traffic situation permits. ted degree whilst driving. ted or not function if:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the Internet connection via communication mod‐ R the mobile phone is switched off
vehicle whilst paying attention to road ule R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
and traffic conditions and operate the On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐ phone
equipment with the vehicle stationary. ule, the Internet connection is established via an R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐
integrated SIM card. media system
You must observe the legal requirements for the If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil‐ R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the exter‐
country in which you are currently driving when ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
operating the multimedia system. nal device
The data volume must be purchased on
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can Mercedes me connect.
establish an Internet connection in the following the external device
ways: Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
Multimedia system:
R Vehicles with a communication module: Requirements: , System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
Internet use including Mercedes me connect R Activate the Wi-Fi function on the multimedia
net settings . Search for Wi-Fi networks
services and data roaming (→ page 330). system (→ page 278).
# Select network.
R Vehicles without a communication mod‐ R Activate the Wi-Fi function on the external
# Logging in to Wi-Fi network (→ page 278).
ule: device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions). Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐
- via Bluetooth® with a data-enabled
mobile phone (→ page 330) R Activate Internet access via Wi-Fi (see the tooth®
manufacturer's operating instructions).
- via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile Requirements:
phone (→ page 330) R Connect a mobile phone to the multimedia
- via the telephone module with SAP system via Bluetooth® (→ page 308).
 Multimedia system 331

R If you use the telephone module for Internet R neither the mobile phone network nor the Bluetooth® connection via DUN
functions, you require a SIM card in the tele‐ mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a # Select the mobile phone.
phone module or a Bluetooth®-capable SAP phone and an Internet connection
# To select the predefined access data of
mobile phone. R the mobile phone has not been enabled for the mobile phone network provider: select
To connect via Bluetooth®, the mobile phone Internet access via Bluetooth® Predefined settings.
must support one of the following Bluetooth® If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia A list of countries appears.
profiles: system for the first time via Bluetooth®, you will # Select the country of your mobile phone net‐
R DUN (Dial-Up Networking) be assisted through the process of setting up an work provider.
R PAN (Personal Area Network) Internet connection. The list of available providers appears.
The Internet connection can also be configured # Select your mobile phone network provider.
The Internet connection via Bluetooth® may be manually. When an overview of the provider settings
restricted or not function if: appears, make the necessary settings.
Further information can be obtained at http://
R the mobile phone is switched off www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a # Select Confirm settings.
R the mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐ Mercedes-Benz service centre. # To manually set the access data of the
ficient Multimedia system: mobile phone network provider: select
R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile , System . ö Connectivity . Inter- Manual settings.
phone net settings An overview of the provider settings appears.
R the Bluetooth® function is switched off on # Set access data.
the multimedia system and the desired Bluetooth® connection via PAN # Select Confirm settings.
phone is to be connected via Bluetooth® # Select the mobile phone.

R the Bluetooth® function is switched off on

The Internet connection is established.
the mobile phone and the phone is to be con‐
nected via Bluetooth®
332 Multimedia system

% Set the access data in accordance with your # Select ¥. Cancelling Internet access permission for a
data package. Otherwise, additional costs # Select Change configuration. mobile phone
may occur. You can contact your mobile Multimedia system:
phone network provider to obtain the precise # Deactivate ª Automatic configuration. , System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
access data. # Select Configure settings using COMAND. net settings
Switching the Bluetooth® profile # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐ # Highlight a mobile phone.
set or manual access data (→ page 330)
# Select ¥.
Requirement:
The mobile phone supports the DUN and PAN Editing the access data # Select Delete configuration.
Bluetooth® profiles. Requirement: # Select Yes.
Multimedia system: The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® DUN
profile. Displaying mobile phone details
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
Multimedia system:
net settings Multimedia system:
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
# To switch from DUN to PAN: select mobile net settings
phone. net settings
# Highlight a mobile phone.
# Select ¥. # Highlight a mobile phone.
# Select ¥.
# Select Change configuration. # Select ¥.
# Select Details.
# Activate O Automatic configuration. # Select Change configuration.

The Internet connection is automatically con‐ # For mobile phones with PAN and DUN: Establishing an Internet connection
figured using the PAN Bluetooth® profile. select Configure settings using COMAND. Multimedia system:
, Connect
# To switch from PAN to DUN: select mobile # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐
phone. set or manual access data (→ page 330) # For example, select z Browser.
 Multimedia system 333

% The multimedia system usually establishes Displaying the connection status % The available features are country-depend‐
the Internet connection automatically. If the Multimedia system: ent.
multimedia system is not connected to the , System . ö Connectivity Licence fees may be applicable.
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
# Select Internet status. Using Mercedes-Benz Apps voice control
% When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth® Requirements:
Connection status device, the approximate data volume trans‐ R Register to use Mercedes-Benz Apps.
mitted is displayed. The exact values can be R Confirm the general terms and conditions.
Overview of connection status requested from your mobile phone network
provider. R The o symbol indicates that a Mercedes-
Benz App can be used via voice control.
Mercedes-Benz Apps # Call up the Mercedes-Benz App
(→ page 333).
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps The basic menu for the App is displayed.
Requirements: # To use voice control: select o Language.
R Register to use Mercedes-Benz Apps.
# Say your question or command.
R Confirm the general terms and conditions.
% Voice control is not available in all countries
Multimedia system: and languages.
, Connect . Ú MB Apps
1 Display of existing connection and reception
field strength of the communication module # Select the App.

or of the connected Bluetooth® device Further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information

can be obtained at: http://apps.mercedes-
benz.com/apps/
334 Multimedia system

Web browser Overview of the web browser Calling up the web browser options
Multimedia system:
Calling up a website
, Con-
Multimedia system:
, Con- nect . z Browser . Z Options
nect . z Browser . z Enter URL The following functions are available:
# Entering a web address R Bookmarks

# To finish entry and call up a website: R Zoom

select ¬. R Browser settings
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle R Delete browser data
is in motion.
# Select an option.
1 URL entry
2
# Change the settings.
Web page, back
3 Web page, forwards Calling up the web browser settings
4 To refresh/stop Multimedia system:
5 , Con-
Options
6 To close the browser nect . z Browser . Z Options . Bro
wser settings
The following functions are available:
R Block popups
R Enable Javascript
R Enable cookies
 Multimedia system 335

R Smartscroll Setting Internet favourites Closing the browser

Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
# Switch the function on O or off ª. , Con- , Connect . z Browser
Deleting Internet history nect . z Browser . Z Options . Bo # Select å Close browser.
Multimedia system: okmarks
, Con-
nect . z Browser . Z Options . Del Selecting favourites Internet radio
ete browser data # Select bookmarks. Calling up the Internet radio
The following options are available: Creating favourites Requirements:
R All # Select Add new bookmark. R There is an account on http://
R Cache # Enter URL and name. www.mercedes.me.
# Select ¡.
R The Internet radio service is activated.
R Cookies
R The data volume is available.
R Entered URLs Editing favourites
R Form data Depending on the country, data volume may
# Select bookmarks.
need to be purchased.
# Select an option. # Select Edit.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
# Select Yes. # Enter URL and name. sion free of interference.
# Select ¡. The services are country-dependent.
Deleting favourites For more information, consult a Mercedes-
Benz service centre.
# Select Delete.

# Select Yes.
336 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Internet radio overview Selecting and connecting to Internet radio
, Radio . Ý Internet radio stations
Multimedia system:
# Select TuneIn radio.
, Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
The Internet radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing. radio . è Search
% The connection quality depends on the local # Select a category.

mobile phone reception. # Select a station.

The connection is established automatically.
or
# Select Search.

# Enter the station name using the entry field.

% A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using Internet radio.
Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as
favourites
1 Internet radio provider Multimedia system:
2 Selected category , Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
3 Display (if connected to private user radio
account) # Select a station.
4 Data rate
5 Current station is stored as a favourite
6 Additional information on the current station
 Multimedia system 337

# Press and hold the touchpad or controller Setting the Internet radio options traffic conditions. This could also cause you
until an audible signal sounds. Multimedia system: to lose control of the vehicle.
The ß symbol appears by the station , Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
# Only handle a data storage medium
name. radio . Z Options when the vehicle is stationary.
# Select ß Favourites. The following options are available:
The list of saved favourite stations appears. Permissible file systems:
R Select stream: select the stream quality.
or R FAT32
R Login to TuneIn account: login to your TuneIn
# Create an account for the online provider user account. R exFAT
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn R NTFS
media system.
Your favourites are imported to the multime‐ user account. Permissible data storage medium:
dia system. # Select an option. R SD card
Deleting favourites R USB storage device
# Select ß Favourites. Media R iPod/iPhone
# Select a station. Audio mode R MTP devices
# Press and hold the touchpad or controller R Bluetooth® audio equipment
Information on audio mode
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by the station name disap‐ % The multimedia system supports a total of
& WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐ up to 50,000 files.
pears. dling data storage medium
Supported formats:
If you handle a data storage medium while
R MP3
driving, your attention is diverted from the
R WMA
338 Multimedia system

R AAC formats Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and the lettering

R WAV (up to 16-bit resolution) are brands or registered brands of Gracenote,
Inc. in the USA and/or other countries.
R FLAC (up to 16-bit resolution)
R ALAC (up to 16-bit resolution) Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
% Observe the following notes: for playback are generally subject to copyright
R Due to the large variety of available protection. In many countries, reproductions,
music files regarding encoders, sampling even for private use, are not permitted without
rates and bit rates, playback cannot the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
always be guaranteed. sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
Produced under licence by Dolby Laboratories. right regulations and that you comply with these.
R Due to the wide range of USB devices Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks
available on the market, playback cannot of Dolby Laboratories. Activating media mode
be guaranteed for all USB devices. Multimedia system:
R Copy-protected music files or DRM , Media . à Devices
encrypted files cannot be played back. # Select the media source.
R MP3 players must support Media Trans‐ Playable music files are played back.
fer Protocol (MTP).
Inserting/removing an SD card

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐

lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
 Multimedia system 339

They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐ # Remove the SD memory card after use # Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
ing. and take it out of the vehicle. slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐
Multimedia system: Playable music files are played back.
dren.
, Media . à Devices . Memory card Removing
# Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed. Inserting # Press the SD card.
The multimedia connection unit is located in the # Remove the SD card.
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ stowage compartment under the armrest.
tures
High temperatures can damage the SD mem‐
ory card.
340 Multimedia system

Overview of the audio mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Album cover 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Track, artist, album 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen (for video playback)
track list
 Multimedia system 341

Connecting USB devices Selecting a track # Select Normal track sequence.

Multimedia system: The current track list is played in the order it
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ , Media appears on the data storage medium.
tures # Select Random playback of the current track
Via the skip function
High temperatures can damage USB devices. list.
# To skip backwards or forwards to a track: The current track list is played in random
# Remove the USB device after use and
navigate up or down. order.
take it out of the vehicle.
Via the current track list # Select Random playback of the current
The multimedia connection unit is found in the # Select è. medium.
stowage compartment under the armrest and All tracks on the active data storage medium
# Select Current track list.
has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's are played in random order.
equipment, additional USB ports may be found # Select a track.
% The available playback options depend on
in the stowage compartment of the centre con‐ Selecting playback options the connected media source.
sole or rear folding compartment.
Multimedia system: Pause and playback function
# Connect the USB device to the USB port.
, Media . Z Options Multimedia system:
Playable music files are played back only if
, Media
the corresponding media display is activated. Playing back similar tracks
# Press the touchpad.
% Use the USB port identified by ç to use # Select Play similar tracks.
Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto™. A track list with similar tracks is created and # To pause playback: select Ë.
played back. # To continue playback: select Ì.

Playback mode Fast forward/rewind

# Select Play mode. # Press the touchpad.

# Slide the controller to the left or right 1.

342 Multimedia system

Video mode % The multimedia system supports the follow‐ Due to the large variety of available video
ing formats: files regarding encoders, sampling rates and
Switching to video mode
R MPEG data transfer rates, playback cannot always
Multimedia system: be guaranteed.
, Media . à Devices R AVI, DivX, MKV
% Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
# Select a data storage medium. R MP4, M4V
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot
Playable video files are played back. R WMV be played back
 Multimedia system 343

Overview of video mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Video playback 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Title and scene 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen
track list
344 Multimedia system

Activating/deactivating full-screen mode Adjusting the brightness manually R Videos

Multimedia system: # Select Brightness. R Podcasts (Apple® devices)
, Media . à Devices
# Adjust the brightness. R Audiobooks (Apple® devices)
# Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back. # Select a category.
Media search
# To activate full-screen mode: select # % The categories are available as soon as the
Full screen. Starting the media search entire media content has been read and ana‐
Multimedia system: lysed.
# To deactivate full-screen mode: press the
, Media . ª Search
touchpad.
Depending on the connected media sources and Media Interface
Changing video settings files, the following categories are listed:
Multimedia system: Information about the Media Interface
R Current track list Media Interface is a universal interface for the
, Media . Z Options . Video set-
R Keyword search connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
tings timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
R Playlists
The following picture formats are available: ports are located in the stowage compartment
R Artists under the armrest.
R Automatic
R Albums
R 16:9 Supported devices
R Tracks
R 4:3 The Media Interface allows you to connect the
R Folder following data storage media:
R Zoom
R Music genres R iPod®
# Select the picture format. R Year
R iPhone®
R Composers
R MP3 player
 Multimedia system 345

R USB devices Switching to Media Interface # Select the media device.

Multimedia system: Playable music files are played back.
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
, Media . à Devices
our website at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in # Connect the data storage medium with the
the "Media Interface" section. USB port (→ page 341).
346 Multimedia system

Overview of Media Interface

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Cover 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Artist, title and album 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen
track list

Bluetooth® audio Information about Bluetooth® audio

 Multimedia system 347

Before using your Bluetooth® audio equipment

with the multimedia system for the first time,
you will need to authorise it (→ page 348).

Bluetooth® Audio overview

1 Active data storage medium 4 Search 7 Options

2 Cover 5 Devices 8 Owner's Manual
3 Artist, title and album 6 Tone settings
348 Multimedia system

Searching for and authorising the Bluetooth® # Select Start search. # Select Search from device.
audio equipment The multimedia system searches for Blue‐ # Start the authorisation on your Bluetooth®
tooth® audio equipment within range and audio equipment (see the manufacturer's
Requirements:
adds them to the Bluetooth® device list. operating instructions).
Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys‐
tem (→ page 278). # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment. A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
Authorisation starts. tem and on the mobile phone.
Check your Bluetooth® audio equipment for the
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐ # If the codes are identical, confirm on both
following (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions): tem and on the mobile phone. devices by pressing Yes.
After successful authorisation, the Blue‐
R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must sup‐ # Confirm on the Bluetooth® audio equipment
tooth® audio equipment is connected and
port the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio if the codes are identical.
starts playing.
profiles After successful authorisation, the Blue‐
tooth® audio equipment is connected and With some Bluetooth® audio equipment, play‐
R the Bluetooth® function must be activated
starts playing. back must be initially started on the device itself
R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must be so that the multimedia system can play the
"visible" for other devices Selecting Bluetooth® audio equipment that audio files.
has already been authorised
Multimedia system: % Device-specific information on authorising
# Select ¥.
, Media . à Devices . á Blue- and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
# Select Bluetooth® audio equipment. phones can be obtained at http://
tooth audio www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
Authorising new Bluetooth® audio equipment Mercedes-Benz service centre.
tooth® audio equipment
# Select ¥. The Bluetooth® device name of the multimedia
# Select Add new Bluetooth audio device. system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.
 Multimedia system 349

Activating Bluetooth® audio If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐ Radio
Multimedia system: timedia system as Bluetooth® audio equip‐ Switching on the radio
, Media . à Devices ment for the first time, it is connected after
confirming the instructions for the mobile Multimedia system:
# Select á Bluetooth audio.
phone (see the manufacturer's operating , Radio
The multimedia system activates the connec‐ instructions).
ted Bluetooth® audio equipment. # Alternatively: press the $ button.
De-authorising (de-registering) Bluetooth® The radio display appears. You will hear the
Switching Bluetooth® audio equipment via audio equipment last station played on the last frequency
NFC Multimedia system: band selected.
Requirements: , Telephone . á Connect device -
Observe the notes on using NFC (→ page 309). Mobile phone
The Bluetooth® audio overview is displayed # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment.
(→ page 349). # Select ¥ De-authorise.
# Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile
# Select Yes.
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system as Bluetooth®
audio equipment, it is now connected.
350 Multimedia system

Radio overview

1 Active frequency band 4 Search/station list 7 Internet radio

2 Station name 5 Presets 8 Sound (tone settings)
3 Artist, title, album and radio text 6 Waveband 9 Options
 Multimedia system 351

Setting the frequency band Searching for radio stations using station # Select Delete highlighted station.
names or direct frequency entry Select Yes.
Multimedia system: #

, Radio . Þ Waveband Multimedia system: Moving stations:

, Radio . è . è
# Select a frequency band. # Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
# Enter a station name or frequency. left.
Selecting a radio station # Select ¬. # Select Move highlighted station.
Results are displayed. # Select a preset.
Multimedia system:
# Select a station.
, Radio

# Navigate up or down.
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system: , Radio . Þ Waveband . FM/DAB
, Radio . ß Presets
radio stations
Multimedia system:
# Select Save current station.
, Radio . è

# Select a station.
Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
, Radio . ß Presets

Deleting stations:
# Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
left.
352 Multimedia system

Slide show 1 displays additional information Tagging music tracks Setting the traffic information service vol‐
provided by the station as an image. This can ume increase
Multimedia system:
include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐
grammes, news or service information, for exam‐ , Radio . Z Options # Select Traffic announcements volume
ple. The additional information is shown in full- increase.
If radio stations provide the relevant information,
screen mode by selecting 2. this function allows you to transfer information # Select No increase or a value.
# To activate full-screen mode: select # on the music track currently playing to an
Full screen. Apple® device. You can then purchase the audio Activating/deactivating radio text
# To deactivate full-screen mode: select file from the iTunes Store®.
Multimedia system:
%. # Select Tag this song.
, Radio . Z Options . Display radio
The track information is saved.
text information
Frequency fix function # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Switching traffic announcements on/off
Multimedia system:
, Radio . Z Options . Frequency fix Multimedia system:
, System . õ Audio . Traffic
TV
#
announcements Information on TV mode
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
If the function is activated, the set frequency # Switch the function on O or off ª. Ubiquitous DTCP-MOST
is kept even if the reception is poor. or Copyright® 2015 Ubiquitous Corp.
# Hold the 8 button on the multifunction The TV tuner enables reception of digital chan‐
steering wheel. nels according to the following standards:
R DVB-T
R DVB-T2
 Multimedia system 353

In some countries, the standards may not be The TV tuner can receive programmes in Dolby TV reception may be impaired due to the follow‐
available, or may not be available in all areas. Digital Plus. ing factors:
A CA module (Conditional Access Module), R electronic devices being transported in the
which is not included in the scope of delivery, is vehicle
used to decrypt HD programmes according to R changing reception conditions while the vehi‐
the CI+ standard. In some countries, an addi‐ cle is in motion
tional smart card is required, which is inserted
into the CA module (see the manufacturer's Poor reception conditions can have the following
operating manual). effect:
The TV tuner is in the boot in the rear bag on the R the TV tuner switches to an alternative chan‐
right-hand side. The CA module is inserted into nel with better reception which is digitally
the TV tuner. broadcasting the same programme content
Produced under licence by Dolby Laboratories. R the TV tuner mutes the sound, freezes the
* NOTE Damage to the CA module and Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks screen or hides it. The t symbol appears
Smart Card of Dolby Laboratories. in the display.
The CA module is designed for use in the The TV tuner automatically sets the TV standard.
home. When used on the move, the CA mod‐ TV reception is dependent on the following fac‐ Switching to TV mode
ule may overheat in consistently high outside tors:
temperatures and may be damaged. Multimedia system:
R speed , Media . à Devices
# Make sure that the CA module is not
subject to high temperatures for exten‐ R characteristics of the selected TV channel # Select TV.
ded periods of time. The TV picture appears. If available, the
If the CA module is damaged, no channel and programme information is dis‐
encrypted channels can be received. played.
354 Multimedia system

If the vehicle is travelling faster than 5 km/h driver. If available, the channel and pro‐
the television picture is hidden from the gramme information is continuously dis‐
played.
TV mode overview

1 Active media source 3 Current programme with start and finish 4 Station lists
2 Channel name times 5 Presets
 Multimedia system 355

6 Devices 8 Sound
7 Streaming services 9 Full screen

Displays in the TV control menu Showing/hiding the TV menu Selecting TV channels from the channel list
Multimedia system:
The following information is displayed: Requirement: , Media . à Devi-
R current TV channel with ß symbol (if the The TV is shown in full screen.
channel has been saved as a favourite) ces . TV . ª Station lists
# To show: press the touchpad.
# Select TV channels.
R current programme with start and finish # Navigate to the left.
times # Select a TV channel.
# To hide: select Full screen in the list.
R FIX The TV tuner selects the channel from the
channel list. The control menu appears for
Channel fix, description of the function Selecting TV channels approximately twelve seconds.
(→ page 356)
Activating/deactivating channel fix Selecting TV channels from the control menu Searching for a TV channel
(→ page 356) Multimedia system: # Select TV channels.
, Media . à Devices . TV
R symbols, for example: # Select ª Search.
# Swipe up or down on the touchpad. # Select v on the touchpad.
p Teletext
The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel
z Audio languages available # Write characters on the touchpad.
from the channel list. The control menu
r Encrypted channel appears for eight seconds. # Select a TV channel.

Selecting a TV channel from the favourites

Requirement:
The TV channel has been saved in the favourites.
356 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Displaying current programme information regions that overlap. It prevents frequent switch‐
, Media . à Devi- for the selected channel (EPG) ing back and forth between channels.
ces . TV . ß Favourites Multimedia system: The FIX indicator is displayed after the name of
, Media . à Devi- the TV channel.
# Select a TV channel.
ces . TV . Z Options
Selecting TV channels in the background The function is switched off
# Select Electronic Program Guide. Depending on reception quality, the TV tuner
Situation: EPG displays the following information (if automatically switches to an alternative channel
R the navigation system is active, for example available): with the same programme content but better
R TV mode is switched on in the background R broadcast times
reception. Using this function, the best possible
and the sound from the selected TV channel television picture can be found, regardless of the
R the names of the current and upcoming reception quality.
can be heard programmes
# Press the D button on the touchpad. # Select programme information and confirm.
Activating/deactivating channel fix
The media menu is called up. The details are displayed. Multimedia system:
, Media . à Devi-
# Navigate up or down. # To scroll: swipe up or down on the touch‐
The next or previous TV channel is selected. pad. ces . TV . Z Options
# Activate O or deactivate ª Station fix.
# To exit the detailed display: press the %
button. Activated: automatic switching of channels is
prevented. TV channels are indicated with
Channel fix FIX.
The function is switched on Deactivated: automatic switching is possible.
The channel is not changed. This is useful if, for
example, you drive the vehicle through reception
 Multimedia system 357

Channel list overview Quick-saving a TV channel Deleting stations

Multimedia system: # Highlight a channel in the favourites.
The TV tuner shows the current programme on
, Media . à Devices . TV
the digital TV channels or radio stations with # Select ¥ Delete highlighted station.
adequate reception in its own channel list. # In full-screen mode, press the touchpad for
# Select Yes.
The order of the channel lists is alphabetical or longer than three seconds.
country-specific. The current TV channel is stored in the Using a voice tag
favourites in the next available position. Multimedia system:
The TV tuner requires a short amount of time to
, Media . à Devi-
update the information. Storing TV channels
Multimedia system: ces . TV . ß Favourites
The channel lists show the following information:
, Media . à Devi- # Highlight a TV channel in the favourites.
R receivable channel names
R program title
ces . TV . ß Favourites # Select ¥ Voice tag .

# Select Save current station. # Alternatively: use a voice tag in the channel
The information is shown under the following The current channel is stored in the favour‐ list.
conditions: ites in the next available position.
R it is broadcast by the digital channel
Creating a voice tag
# Alternatively: highlight the channel in the
# Select Add.
R the reception conditions are adequate channel list and store as a favourite.
# Say a voice tag.
Moving channels in the favourites A message appears when the voice tag has
Favourites # Highlight a channel in the favourites. been created.
Overview of favourites # Select ¥ Move highlighted station.
Listening to a voice tag
You can create a total of 40 digital TV channel # Highlight the new position.
favourites. # Select Listen.
# Confirm the position.
358 Multimedia system

Deleting a voice tag If a symbol is not shown, the programme is # Select Show subtitles.
# Select Delete. either broadcast in mono or the transmission The subtitles are switched on O or off ª.
A message appears asking whether you want properties are unknown. # Select one of the available languages for the
to delete the voice tag for the TV channel. Subtitles subtitles.
# Select Yes. The language selected only applies to the
R The function is switched on:
current programme.
Subtitles are shown in the selected language
TV programme for the current programme (if available).
Teletext
Audio language and subtitles Setting the audio language
Multimedia system: Teletext overview
Audio language Teletext pages are located between page 100
, Media . à Devi-
R It is possible to choose between several and page 899.
audio languages when a programme is broad‐ ces . TV . Z Options
A dynamic teletext page consists of several sub‐
cast in multiple languages. # Select Audio/subtitles. pages.
R If, for example, English is set as the system # Select one of the available audio languages. Information on MHEG-5 digital teletext:
language and a TV channel is broadcasting in The audio language selected only applies to
this language, English is selected automati‐ R digital teletext is only available in some coun‐
the current programme. tries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand
cally.
R The programme transmission may be indica‐
Setting subtitles R interactive multimedia applications such as
ted with the following symbols: Multimedia system: weather forecasts, news reports and sport
, Media . à Devi- results are available
m Programme with audio explanations for
the visually impaired ces . TV . Z Options R it may take some time before all the pages
# Select Audio/subtitles. load
o Stereo broadcast
n Programme for the hard of hearing
 Multimedia system 359

Displaying teletext # Select Red, Green, Yellow or Blue. # Select the picture format.
Multimedia system: The data content is displayed.
, Media . à Devi- To enter numbers: select 123.
# HD programmes
ces . TV . p Teletext # Enter the numbers in quick succession. Inserting the CA module
# To call up the previous or next teletext # To return to the TV programme: select TV.
page: swipe upwards or downwards on the * NOTE Damage to the CA module and
touchpad. Smart Card
Picture settings
# To enter numbers: press and hold the
Picture settings overview The CA module is designed for use in the
touchpad. home. When used on the move, the CA mod‐
# Enter the numbers in quick succession. The following picture format settings are availa‐ ule may overheat in consistently high outside
# To select a subpage: swipe left or right on ble: temperatures and may be damaged.
the touchpad. R Automatic # Make sure that the CA module is not

% The subpage currently selected is marked by R 16:9 subject to high temperatures for exten‐
a blue symbol. R 4:3 ded periods of time.
If the CA module is damaged, no
# To return to the TV programme: press and R Zoom encrypted channels can be received.
hold the % button. The brightness is automatically set.
MHEG-5 digital teletext The TV tuner is in the boot in the rear bag on the
Selecting picture settings right-hand side.
# If the teletext is displayed, press and hold on Multimedia system: # If required (country-dependent): insert the
the touchpad. , Media . à Devi-
A colour selection bar appears. Smart Card into the CA module slot.
ces . TV . Z Options # Remove the protective cap from the TV tuner.
# Select Picture format. # Insert the CA module into the TV tuner slot.
360 Multimedia system

# Replace the protective cap on the TV tuner. Calling up the sound menu Burmester® surround sound system
When the CA module is inserted correctly, Multimedia system:
encrypted HD programmes can be received , Media . à Sound
Information about the Burmester® surround
according to CI+ standard. sound system
The following functions are available: The Burmester® surround sound system has a
If the CA module is not compatible, a fault
message appears. R Equaliser total output of 590 watts and is equipped with
R Balance and Fader 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the
Calling up the CA module menu radio and media modes.
R Other sound settings
Multimedia system:
Calling up the sound menu in the
, Media . à Devi- # Select the sound menu. Burmester® surround sound system
ces . TV . Z Options Adjusting treble, mid and bass settings Multimedia system:
# Select CA module. Multimedia system: , Media . à Sound
# Select a menu option. , Media . à Sound . Equaliser
The following functions are available:
# Select Treble, Mid or Bass. R Equaliser
Sound # Change the settings. R Balance and Fader
Tone settings Adjusting the balance/fader R Surround sound

Information about the sound system Multimedia system: R Sound focus

The sound system has a total output of 100 , Media . à Sound . Balance and R Other sound settings
watts and is equipped with seven speakers. It is Fader
available for all functions in the radio and media # Select the sound menu.
# Adjust the balance and fader.
modes.
# To exit the menu: press the % button.
 Multimedia system 361

Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester® R VIP seat (seat-based sound optimisation)
in the Burmester® surround sound system surround sound system R Sound profiles
Multimedia system: Multimedia system: R Other sound settings
, Media . à Sound . Equaliser , Media . à Sound . Sound focus

# Select Treble, Mid or Bass. # Adjust the focus.

# Select the sound menu.
# Change the settings. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound on the Burmester® high-end 3D surround
Adjusting the balance/fader in the sound system
Burmester® surround sound system system
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: Information on Burmester® high-end 3D sur‐ , Media . à Sound . Equaliser
, Media . à Sound . Balance and round sound system
# Select Treble, Mid or Bass.
Fader The Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound
system has a total output of 1450 watts and is # Change the settings.
# Adjust the balance and fader.
equipped with 23 speakers. It is available for all Adjusting the balance/fader in the
# To exit the menu: press the % button.
functions in the radio and media modes. Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound
Switching surround sound on/off in the Calling up the sound menu in the system
Burmester® surround sound system Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: system , Media . à Sound . Balance and
, Media . à Sound . Surround Multimedia system: Fader
sound , Media . à Sound
# Adjust the balance and fader.
# Switch the function on O or off ª. The following functions are available: # To exit the menu: press the % button.
R Equaliser
R Balance and Fader
362 Multimedia system

Adjusting the seat-based sound optimisation

in the Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system
Multimedia system:
, Media . à Sound . VIP seat

This setting optimises the sound playback for

the selected seat position.
# Switch the function on O.

# Select the seat position.

Selecting the sound profile in the

Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound
system
Multimedia system:
, Media . à Sound . Sound profiles

The following profiles are available:

R Pure
R Easy Listening
R Live
R Surround
R 3D-Sound

# Select the sound profile.

 Maintenance and care 363

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ need to be performed more often if the vehicle
ted subject: is operated under arduous conditions or
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval increased loads, for example:
display R Operating the on-board computer
(→ page 246). R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the ate stops.
instrument display provides information on the R if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
remaining time or distance before the next Carrying out service work at regular inter‐
vals distances.
service due date.
R for frequent operation in mountainous terrain
You can hide this service message using the * NOTE Premature wear through failure to or on poor road surfaces.
back button on the left-hand side of the steering observe service due dates
wheel. R if the engine is often left idling for long peri‐
Service work which is not carried out at the ods.
You can obtain further information concerning
the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified right time or incompletely can lead to R in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz increased wear and damage to the vehicle. recirculation mode is frequently used.
Service Centre. # Always observe the prescribed service
In these or similar operating conditions, have, for
intervals. example, the interior air filter, engine air filter,
Displaying the service due date # Always have the prescribed service engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently.
work carried out at a qualified specialist The tyres must be checked more frequently if
On-board computer: workshop. the vehicle is operated under increased loads.
, Service . ASSYST PLUS Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
The next service due date is displayed. fied specialist workshop.
Special service requirements
# To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Service work will
364 Maintenance and care

Battery disconnection periods The active bonnet is not available in all coun‐
tries.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when Resetting the active bonnet
the battery is connected.
# Note down the service due date displayed in
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot
the instrument display before disconnecting component parts in the engine compart‐
the battery (→ page 363). ment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
Engine compartment the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # With your hand flat, push down active bonnet
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) 1 in the area around the hinges on both
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian # Let the engine cool down and only sides (arrows).
protection) touch the component parts described The engine bonnet must engage in position.
In certain accident situations, the risk of injury below: # If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at
to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
of the active bonnet. The rear area of the engine step until it engages correctly in position.
bonnet is raised by approximately 85 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐
gered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet
has been triggered, pedestrian protection may
be limited.
A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate
the full functionality of the active bonnet.
 Maintenance and care 365

Opening/closing the bonnet & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ # Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing the bonnet ing moving component parts, e.g. the
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ rotation area of the fan.
ing with the engine bonnet unlocked If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the # Remove jewellery and watches.
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up engine compartment, you could come into # Keep items of clothing and hair away
when the vehicle is in motion and block your contact with hot gases or other escaping from moving parts.
view. operating fluids.
# Never unlock the engine bonnet when
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the & WARNING Risk of injury from touching
driving. engine to cool down. component parts under voltage
# Before every trip, ensure that the
# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
engine bonnet is locked. The ignition system and the fuel injection
partment, keep the engine bonnet system work under high voltage. If you touch
closed and call the fire service. component parts which are under voltage,
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury you could receive an electric shock.
when opening and closing the engine & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving # Never touch components of the ignition
bonnet parts system or the fuel injection system
When opening or closing the engine bonnet, Certain components in the engine compart‐ when the ignition is switched on.
it may suddenly drop into the end position. ment may continue to move or suddenly
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the move again even after the ignition has been & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
engine bonnet's range of movement. switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. component parts in the engine compart‐
# Only open or close the engine bonnet Make sure of the following before performing ment
when there are no persons in the tasks in the engine compartment: Certain component parts in the engine com‐
engine bonnet's range of movement. # Switch the ignition off. partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
366 Maintenance and care

the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only

touch the component parts described
below:

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the

windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐
net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can
be trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before opening the
engine bonnet. # To open: pull lever 1 to release the bonnet. # Push bonnet catch 1 upwards and lift the
bonnet by approximately 40 cm.
Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the # To close: lower the bonnet and let it fall from
separate Owner's Manual. You could otherwise a height of approximately 20 cm.
fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high volt‐
age. # If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little
more force until it engages correctly.
 Maintenance and care 367

Engine oil Waiting time before checking the oil level: # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
R Engine at normal operating temperature: five tube to the stop, and take it out again after
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
minutes. approximately three seconds.
dipstick
R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
R Engine not at normal operating temperature
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot and 3.
(e.g. the engine was only started briefly): 30
component parts in the engine compart‐ minutes. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
ment below.
R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, # If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 l of
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. engine oil.
# If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
# Let the engine cool down and only engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
touch the component parts described workshop.
below:
Checking the engine oil level using the on-
Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the board computer (E 220 d)
separate Owner's Manual. You could otherwise The engine oil level is determined during driving.
fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high volt‐ The oil level display is only available after a driv‐
age. ing time of up to 30 minutes and if the ignition is
switched on, depending on the driving profile.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed in the engine compartment in different It is not possible to correctly measure the oil
locations. level if:
# Park the vehicle on a flat surface. R The vehicle is not level during the measuring
# Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe off. process.
368 Maintenance and care

R The bonnet was previously opened. off the excess engine oil. Consult a qualified & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
specialist workshop. engine oil
The engine must be restarted and the engine oil
level will be determined again during driving. # For engine oil level turn on ignition: switch on
the ignition to check the engine oil level. If engine oil comes into contact with hot
On-board computer: component parts in the engine compart‐
, Service . Engine oil level:
# Engine oil level System inoperative: sensor ment, it may ignite.
faulty or not connected. Consult a qualified # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
You will see one of the following display specialist workshop.
next to the filler opening.
messages in the multifunction display: # Engine oil level System currently unavail.: # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
# Engine oil level Measuring now: measure‐ close the engine bonnet.
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
ment of the oil level is not yet possible. Topping up engine oil nent parts before starting the vehicle.
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30
minutes' driving. & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
# Engine oil level OK and the bar display for
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an
component parts in the engine compart‐ incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
indicating the oil level in the multifunction ment tives
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the oil level is correct. Certain component parts in the engine com‐ # Do not use engine oils or oil filters
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, which do not correspond to the specifi‐
# Engine oil level Add 1.0 l and the bar display
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. cations explicitly prescribed for the
for indicating the oil level in the multifunction
display is orange and is below "min": top up service intervals.
with 1 l of engine oil.
# Let the engine cool down and only # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
touch the component parts described order to achieve longer change intervals
# Reduce engine oil level and the bar display
below: than prescribed.
for indicating the oil level in the multifunction
display is orange and is above "max": drain # Do not use additives.
 Maintenance and care 369

# Follow the instructions in the service Checking the coolant level

interval display regarding the oil
change. & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment
* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
Topping up too much engine oil can cause the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
damage to the engine or the catalytic con‐
verter.
# Let the engine cool down and only
# Have excess engine oil siphoned off at
touch the component parts described
a qualified specialist workshop. below:

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot

coolant
# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
The engine cooling system is pressurised,
# Top up the engine oil. particularly when the engine is warm. If you
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
as it will go. coolant spraying out.
# Check the oil level again (→ page 367). # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear gloves and
protective eyewear.
370 Maintenance and care

# Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow # Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to relieve # Let the engine cool down and only
pressure to escape. overpressure. touch the component parts described
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and below:
remove it.
The coolant level is correct: & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the engine bonnet
R If the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2
R If the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over If you open the engine bonnet when the
marker bar 2 engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
# If necessary, top up with coolant that has contact with hot gases or other escaping
been tested and approved by Mercedes- operating fluids.
Benz. # Before opening the engine bonnet,
R Further information on coolant (→ page 432) allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
Topping up the windscreen washer system partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot
component parts in the engine compart‐ & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to
# Park the vehicle on a flat surface. ment windscreen washer concentrate
# Check the coolant temperature display in the
Certain component parts in the engine com‐ Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
instrument cluster.
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
The coolant temperature must be below
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. contact with hot engine component parts or
70 °C.
the exhaust system.
 Maintenance and care 371

# Make sure that no windscreen washer Cleaning and care R The blower for the ventilation/heating is
concentrate spills out next to the filler switched off.
Information on washing the vehicle in a car
opening. wash R The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
R In car washes with a towing mechanism: neu‐
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to tral i is engaged.
reduced braking power after washing the R The key is at a distance of at least 3 m away
vehicle from the vehicle, otherwise the boot lid could
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing open unintentionally.
the vehicle. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
# After the vehicle has been washed, from the windscreen and wiper rubber, this
brake carefully while paying attention to will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
the traffic conditions until braking noise.
power has been fully restored.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
& WARNING Risk of an accident when
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
using high-pressure cleaners with circu‐
function are switched off. lar jet nozzles
R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirt
switched off.
# Top up the washer fluid. grinder) can cause externally invisible dam‐
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are age to the tyres or chassis parts.
completely closed.
Components damaged in this way may unex‐
pectedly fail.
372 Maintenance and care

# Do not use high-pressure cleaners with Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm Washing the vehicle by hand
circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in some
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle countries, washing by hand is only allowed at
replaced immediately. around whilst cleaning. specially equipped washing bays.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ R Observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ shampoo.
lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner: # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
ating instructions.
R Keep the key at least 3 m away from the a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could open R Do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
unintentionally. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
tyres, slits, electrical component parts, bat‐
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
teries, light sources and ventilation slots.
vehicle. the water jet directly towards the air inlet
R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your grille.
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
 Maintenance and care 373

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding damage to the paintwork

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the R Do not apply stickers, films etc.
treated areas afterwards. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases:
gently rub with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
Matt finish R The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. R Do not have your vehicle cleaned at an automatic car
R Only use care products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. wash too frequently and do not use wash programs which
finish with a hot wax vehicle treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products
such as a gloss preserver, e.g. wax.
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
374 Maintenance and care

Notes on care of vehicle parts # Always switch off the windscreen wip‐ # Always be particularly careful around
ers and the ignition before cleaning the the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen or wiper blades. # Allow the vehicle parts to cool down
windscreen wipers are switched on while
before you touch them.
the windscreen is being cleaned
& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion and tailpipe trim
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
wiper arm. very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake linings,
drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before
parking it. The brake discs and brake linings warm up and
dried out.
Windows Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products or cleaning agents
cloth and cleaning products recommended by Mercedes- containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Benz.
 Maintenance and care 375

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting Clean the lens with a wet sponge and mild detergent, e.g. car Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
shampoo. for plastic lenses.
AIRPANEL If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum
AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in distance of 30 cm.
the radiator trim may be restricted.
R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐
cally after approximately 120 seconds.
R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres‐
sure water jet.
Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers and in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum
radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. distance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys‐ Do not use a high-pressure water jet.
and 360° Camera tem(→ page 217) .
R Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
376 Maintenance and care

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Tailpipes Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, Use acid-free cleaning agents.
particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
Trailer hitch R Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. Do not clean the ball neck with solvents or a high-pressure
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. cleaner.
R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly.
R Observe the cleaning instructions in the operating instruc‐
tions of the trailer hitch manufacturer.

Notes on care of the interior When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
may break away. bleached seat belts
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
# Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
ucts containing solvents to clean the weaken them.
vent-based care products
cockpit.
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ This can, for example, cause seat belts to
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to tear or fail in an accident.
become porous. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
 Maintenance and care 377

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Seat belts Clean with warm water and soap solution. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 °C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and R Switch off the display and allow to cool.
TFT/LCD display cleaner. R Do not use any other cleaning products.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. R Do not apply stickers, films etc.
R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐ R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
ded by Mercedes-Benz. come in contact with the plastic trim.
Genuine wood/trim R Clean with a microfibre cloth. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
elements R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soap solution.
R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz.
Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
378 Maintenance and care

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Genuine leather R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
seat covers R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐ Do not use a microfibre cloth.
ommended by Mercedes-Benz.
DINAMICA seat cov‐ Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use a microfibre cloth.
ers
Artificial leather Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution. Do not use a microfibre cloth.
seat covers
Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to
dry.
EASY-PACK boot box Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol or abrasive
cleaning agents.
 Breakdown assistance 379

Emergency # Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the The requirements defined by the legal standard
safety vest. are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
Removing the safety vest size and is fully closed.
% There are also safety vest compartments in
The safety vests are located in the safety vest the rear door stowage compartments in Replace the safety vest if:
compartments in the driver's and front which safety vests can be stowed. R it is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips
passenger door stowage compartments. can no longer be removed
R the maximum number of washes is exceeded
R the fluorescence of the safety vest has faded

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not use a laundry dryer
6 Do not dry-clean
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by
7 This is a class 2 vest
loop 2.
380 Breakdown assistance

Warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft sided)
Removing the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐

angle and attach at the top using press stud
2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the boot in the

# To remove: push both sides of warning trian‐ left-hand stowage net.
gle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow
and open it.
# Remove warning triangle 2.
 Breakdown assistance 381

Removing the fire extinguisher Flat tyre In the event of a flat tyre, the following options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
Notes on flat tyres ment:
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos‐
tyre sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observe the
A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac‐ notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)
teristics as well as the steering and braking (→ page 381).
of the vehicle. R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
Tyres without run-flat characteristics: the tyre so that it is possible to continue the
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. journey for a short period of time. To do this,
# Left-hand drive vehicle: Pull tab 1 # Change the flat tyre immediately with use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 383).
upwards. the emergency spare wheel or spare R Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emer‐
# Right-hand drive vehicle: Pull tab 1 down‐ wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified gency call system: in the event of a flat
wards. specialist workshop. tyre, consult the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system Customer Assistance Centre.
# Remove fire extinguisher 2. Tyres with run-flat characteristics: R Change the wheel (→ page 414).
# Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat % The emergency spare wheel is only available
tyres). in certain countries.

MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
382 Breakdown assistance

total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How‐ nering, when accelerating strongly and when Driving distance possible in limp-home mode
ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly braking. after the pressure loss warning
visible damage. Load condition Driving distance pos‐
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the ble speed. sible in limp-home
MOExtended marking which appears on the side mode
# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
wall of the tyre.
manoeuvres as well as driving over Partially laden 80 km
Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys‐ obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road).
tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in This applies, in particular, to a loaded Fully laden 30 km
conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss vehicle.
warning system. R The driving distance possible in limp-home
# Stop driving in run-flat mode if you
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys‐ mode may vary depending on the driving
notice: style.
tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in
R banging noise
conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon‐ R Maximum permissible speed 80 km/h.
itoring system. R vehicle vibration
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced
If a pressure loss warning message appears in R smoke which smells like rubber
with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may
the multifunction display: R continuous ESP® intervention be used as a temporary measure.
R Check the tyres for damage R cracks in tyre side walls
R If driving on, observe the following notes TIREFIT kit storage location
# After driving in run-flat mode, have the
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving rims checked by a qualified specialist The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot floor.
workshop with regard to their further
in run-flat mode
use.
When driving in run-flat mode, the handling # The defective tyre must be replaced in
characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cor‐ every case.
 Breakdown assistance 383

The tyre inflation compressor is mainte‐ R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre
nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please larger than those previously mentioned.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
R the wheel rim is damaged.
R you have driven at very low tyre pres‐
Using the TIREFIT kit sures or on a flat tyre.
Have the following readily available: # Do not drive on.
R tyre sealant bottle # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R enclosed TIREFIT sticker
R tyre inflation compressor & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
1 Tyre sealant bottle
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal punctu‐ from tyre sealant
2 Tyre inflation compressor
res of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau‐
% You can find information on the power cate‐ contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into
gory and/or electrical details on the back of temperatures down to -20 °C. contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and
the tyre inflation compressor. do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours.
R LK2 – 12 V/15A, 180 W, 0.8 kg & WARNING Risk of accident when using Keep the tyre sealant away from children.
tyre sealant Observe the following if you come into con‐
At a distance of approximately 1 m to the
tyre inflation compressor and approximately In the following situations, the tyre sealant is tact with the tyre sealant:
1.6 m above the ground, the following sound unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐ # Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
pressure levels apply: tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre prop‐ using water immediately.
erly:
R Sound power level LLA 74.8 dB (A)
384 Breakdown assistance

# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four
oughly rinse them using clean water years at a qualified specialist workshop.
immediately. # Do not remove any foreign objects which

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, have penetrated the tyre.

thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme‐
diately and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
# Change out of clothing which has come
into contact with tyre sealant immedi‐
ately.
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med‐
ical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐ # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out
tion compressor running too long instrument cluster within the driver's field of
of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
vision.
# Do not run the tyre inflation compres‐ # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
sor for longer than ten minutes without # Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
interruption. valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres‐
the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. sor.
 Breakdown assistance 385

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres‐ # Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx‐
sor during this phase. imately 10 m.
# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a # Pump up the tyre again.
maximum of ten minutes. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ ieved
ble to use clean water.
# Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved
tyre. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ after the specified time, the tyre is too badly
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the
lene.
# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your tyre in this instance.
vehicle. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐ too low can significantly impair braking and
# Switch the ignition on. ieved: handling characteristics.
# Press on and off switch 3 on the tyre infla‐ # Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # Do not drive on.
tion compressor.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum‐ defective tyre.
ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
386 Breakdown assistance

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of # Therefore, place the filling hose in the & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved: plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
kit. ieved
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tyres If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental after a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam‐
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre
impairs handling characteristics and is not sponsible disposal in this instance.
suitable for higher speeds.
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of too low can significantly impair braking and
drive carefully. handling characteristics.
# Do not exceed the specified maximum
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
service centre. # Do not drive on.
speed with a tyre that has been sealed
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
using tyre sealant. # Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the Countries that have Mercedes-Benz
a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h. defective tyre. Service24h: a sticker with the phone number
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation can also be found in your vehicle, e.g. on the
# Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker B‑pillar on the driver's side.
to the instrument cluster where it will be eas‐ compressor and the warning triangle.
# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
ily seen by the driver. # Pull away immediately.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres‐
# Stop after driving for approximately ten sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant minutes and check the tyre pressure using
# To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the tyre inflation compressor.
After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out the tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
from the filling hose.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
 Breakdown assistance 387

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ You could lose control of the vehicle in the
shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle following situations:
and filling hose replaced there.
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu‐
Battery (vehicle) vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is
Notes on the 12 V battery not adapted to the road conditions
Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
separate Owner's Manual. You could otherwise lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high volt‐ ist workshop immediately.
# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres‐ age. # Do not continue driving.
sure release button 1 next to manometer
2. # Always have work on the battery carried
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tery R Further information on ABS (→ page 180)
tyre. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery R Further information on ESP®(→ page 181)
# Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
the sealed tyre. can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐ For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
inflation compressor. (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Elec‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot‐ tronic Stability Program). The operating Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
tle. safety of your vehicle may be restricted. protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in the event of an accident.
388 Breakdown assistance

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- # Do not inhale battery gases. specialist workshop or to a collection
ion battery point for used batteries.
# Keep children away from the battery.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con‐
trostatic charge oughly with plenty of clean water and tact a qualified specialist workshop.
seek medical attention immediately.
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which Comply with safety notes and take protective
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture All vehicles measures when handling batteries.
in the battery. Risk of explosion
# To discharge any electrostatic charge + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
that may have built up, touch the metal damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
vehicle body before handling the bat‐ teries
tery. Fire, naked flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created Avoid creating sparks.
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance. Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns rubbish. sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
from the battery acid #
clothing, in particular gloves, an
Battery acid is caustic. apron and a face mask. Immediately
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or Dispose of batteries in an rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
clothing. environmentally responsible manner. with clean water. Consult a doctor if
Take discharged batteries to a qualified necessary.
# Do not lean over the battery.
 Breakdown assistance 389

Wear safety glasses. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V * NOTE Damaging the battery through
battery overvoltage
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When using a battery charger without a maxi‐
Keep children away. # When charging the battery and during start‐ mum charging voltage, the battery or the
ing assistance, always use the jump-start vehicle electronics may be damaged.
connection point in the engine compartment. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Observe this Owner's Manual. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐
voltage
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
When charging using a battery charger with‐ gen gas igniting
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the on-board electronics may be damaged. A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an charging process. If there is a short circuit or
extended period of time: # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the
R Activate standby mode, or mum charging voltage of 14.4 V. hydrogen gas igniting.
R Connect the battery to a battery charger # Make sure that the positive terminal of
All other vehicles
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or the connected battery does not come
# When charging the battery and during start‐
R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to into contact with vehicle parts.
ing assistance, always use the jump-start
disconnect the battery. # Never place metal objects or tools on a
connection point in the engine compartment.
battery.
# When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.
390 Breakdown assistance

# When giving starting assistance, always If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument The service life of a battery that has been
make sure that you only connect bat‐ cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is thawed may be dramatically shortened.
tery terminals with identical polarity. very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐
zen. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for con‐ & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the
necting and disconnecting the jump zen battery separate operating instructions. You could other‐
lead. wise fail to recognise dangers, e.g. due to high
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ voltage.
tery clamps while the engine is running. tures slightly above or below freezing point. All vehicles
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
& WARNING Risk of explosion during ing, battery gas may be released. * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
charging process and starting assistance # Always thaw a frozen battery out first extended attempts to start the engine
before charging it or performing start‐ Numerous or extended attempts to start the
During the charging process and starting ing assistance.
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ engine may damage the catalytic converter
sive gas mixture. due to non-combusted fuel.
* NOTE Shortening the service life of the # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
# Avoid fire, naked flames, creating
battery by charging the battery at low to start the engine.
sparks and smoking. temperatures
# Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
Charging the battery at very low tempera‐ Observe the following points during starting
lation during the charging process and assistance and when charging the battery:
during starting assistance. tures may shorten the service life of the bat‐
tery and have a negative effect on starting. R Only use undamaged jump leads/charging
# Do not lean over a battery.
# Do not charge the battery at very low cables with a sufficient cross-section and
temperatures. insulated terminal clamps.
 Breakdown assistance 391

R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps R Petrol engine: Only accept starting assis‐
must not come into contact with other metal tance if the engine and exhaust system are
parts while the jump lead/charging cable is cold.
connected to the battery/jump-start connec‐
tion point. # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric
parking brake.
R The jump lead/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may # Automatic transmission: Shift the trans‐
move when the engine is running. mission to position j.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the # Manual transmission: Shift into neutral.
battery is electrostatically charged. # Make sure that the ignition and all electrical
R Keep away from fire and naked flames. consumers are switched off.
R Do not lean over the battery. # Open the engine bonnet.
R When charging: only use battery chargers
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
Observe the additional following points during tion of the arrow.
starting assistance: # Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to
R Starting assistance may only be provided positive pole of donor battery using the jump
using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 lead/charging cable. Always begin with posi‐
V. tive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first.
R The vehicles must not touch.
392 Breakdown assistance

# During the starting assistance proce‐ consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear Tow starting or towing away
dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle window heater or lighting.
and run at idle speed. Permitted towing methods
# Connect the negative pole of the donor vehi‐ When the starting assistance/charging process Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the permit‐
cle and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by is complete: ted towing methods in the separate Owner's
using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin # First, remove the jump lead/charging cable Manual.
with the donor battery first. from earth point 3 and negative pole of the Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
# During starting assistance: start the donor vehicle, then from positive clamp 2 vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
engine of your own vehicle. and positive pole of the donor vehicle. Begin towing it away.
each time with the contacts on your own
# During the charging process: start the vehicle first. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
charging process. # After removing the jump lead/charging ing away incorrectly
# During starting assistance: let the engines cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
run for several minutes. # Observe the instructions and notes on
You can obtain further information on starting towing away.
# During starting assistance: before discon‐
assistance at any qualified specialist workshop.
necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical
 Breakdown assistance 393

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No Yes if the steering wheel is fixed in
sion the centre position with a steering
wheel lock.
4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No No

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be # Make sure that the battery is connected and R vehicles with automatic transmission: the
performed by a towing company. charged. automatic transmission cannot be shifted to
position i or j.
When the battery is discharged:
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the R the engine cannot be started. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: if
ground the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
R the electric parking brake cannot be released
Observe the notes on the permitted towing ted to position i, transport the vehicle
# or applied.
methods (→ page 392) (→ page 393). (→ page 395). A towing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required for vehicle transport.
394 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at the permissible gross mass of your own # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ vehicle. (→ page 71).
tances # Do not activate the HOLD function.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, # Deactivate tow-away protection (→ page 89).
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ its weight must not exceed the permissible gross
ing at excessively high speeds or over long mass of the towing vehicle. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (→ page 189).
distances. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
# Information on the permissible gross mass of
# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ shift the automatic transmission to position
be exceeded. tification plate . i.
# A towing distance of 50 km must not be
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do
# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
exceeded. not open the driver's door or front passenger to neutral i.
door, otherwise the automatic transmission # Release the electric parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing automatically shifts to position j. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
a vehicle which is too heavy # Fit the towing eye (→ page 397).
switch on the ignition, otherwise the steering
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed # Attach the tow bar. wheel locking may engage.
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass, the following situations can occur: * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
R the towing eye may become detached. tion ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
R the car/trailer combination may swerve # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
or even overturn. the towing eyes. Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
# If another vehicle is tow-started or % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer R the ignition is switched off.
towed away, its weight must not exceed hitch.
 Breakdown assistance 395

R the brake system or power steering sys‐ Loading the vehicle for transport # Vehicles with manual transmission:
tem is malfunctioning. engage first or reverse gear.
# Observe the notes on towing away
R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐ (→ page 393). # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
cal system is malfunctioning. vehicle and prevent it from rolling away.
# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to
load the vehicle. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
and brake than is normally required. hitch. System PLUS)
# Use a tow bar. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
& WARNING Risk of accident when trans‐
# Make sure that the steering wheel can shift the automatic transmission to position
porting vehicles with AIR BODY CON‐
move freely, before towing the vehicle i. TROL
away.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: The reduced damping forces on the vehicle
the automatic transmission may be locked in being transported can cause the vehicle/
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive position j in the event of damage to the trailer combination to start to swing.
power electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power As a result, when transporting vehicles with
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power AIR BODY CONTROL the vehicle/trailer com‐
may be too high and the vehicles could be (→ page 389).
bination may start to skid. Consequently, you
damaged. # Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
could lose control of your vehicle.
# Pull away slowly and smoothly. to neutral.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the
# Vehicles with automatic transmission:
transporter.
shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
396 Breakdown assistance

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic Towing eye
with suitable tensioning straps. transmission
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐
ble speed of 60 km/h when transport‐
ing.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐

ing it incorrectly
# After loading, the vehicle must be
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the
# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards # Make sure that the front and rear axles come boot under the boot floor.
and 10 cm downwards must be kept to to rest on the same transport vehicle.
the transport platform.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after incorrect positioning
loading.
# Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.
 Breakdown assistance 397

Fitting the towing eye the towing eye. Connect the tow bar to the # Vehicles with automatic transmission
trailer hitch. must not be tow-started.
% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of
Vehicles with manual transmission
the towing eye
# Observe the notes on towing away
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐ (→ page 393).
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
# If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust
ess.
system to cool down.
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or
# Switch the ignition on.
tow start the vehicle.
# Engage second gear.

# Release the electric parking brake.

Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine
# Tow-start the vehicle while the clutch pedal
start)
is fully depressed.
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and Vehicles with automatic transmission # Slowly release the clutch pedal.
remove. # Immediately shift to neutral if the engine
Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
#
mission due to tow-starting starts.
stop. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a The automatic transmission may be damaged as possible, paying attention to road and traf‐
in the process of tow-starting vehicles with fic conditions.
trailer hitch do not have a bracket at the back for
automatic transmission.
398 Breakdown assistance

# Remove the tow bar. # Only use Mercedes-Benz approved ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
# Remove the towing eye. fuses with the correct fuse rating. Centre.
# Have the vehicle checked at a qualified spe‐ Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
cialist workshop. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
same rating, which you can recognise by the col‐
R All electrical consumers are switched off.
our and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in
Electrical fuses the fuse assignment diagram. R The ignition is switched off.

Notes on electrical fuses Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
the boot (→ page 400). boxes:
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
due to overloaded lines * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
driver's side (→ page 399)
by moisture
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
you replace it with a fuse with a higher Moisture may cause damage to the electrical (→ page 400)
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ system or cause it to malfunction.
R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
ded. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
(→ page 400)
This could result in a fire. that no moisture can enter the fuse
R Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ box.
of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
fied new fuses containing the correct # When closing the fuse box, make sure
of travel (→ page 400)
amperage. that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri‐ cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
cal components or systems.
 Breakdown assistance 399

Fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements:
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 398).
Have the following readily available:
R A dry cloth
R A screwdriver

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the

windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐
net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can # Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
be trapped by the wiper linkage. box using a dry cloth.
the left.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
# Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the # Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3
ers and ignition before opening the
arrow. from the top.
engine bonnet.
Closing
# Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in the lid.
400 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid into the bracket at the rear of the

fuse box.
# Fold down lid of the fuse box and tighten
screws 4.
# Insert cover 1 on both sides and engage
safety clips .
# Close the engine bonnet.

Fuse box on the dashboard

# Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the
The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard
arrow.
under a cover.
# Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre for The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
further information. the side of the fuse box.

# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow

Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell and remove it.
Requirements
Observe the notes on electrical fuses Fuse box in the boot
(→ page 398).
Requirements:
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 398).
 Wheels and tyres 401

Noise or unusual handling characteristics & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
insufficient tyre tread ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or R Check the tyre pressure (→ page 402).
tyre grip. The tyre tread is no longer able to
tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is dissipate water. R Visual inspection of wheels and tyres for
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop damage.
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular R Check the valve caps.
wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling where speed is not adapted to suit the condi‐ The valves must be protected against mois‐
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, tions. ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
specialist workshop. tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at R Visual check of the tread depth and the tyre
different locations on the tyre tread. contact surface across the entire width.
# Thus, you should regularly check the The minimum tread depth for summer tyres
Regular checking of wheels and tyres tread depth and the condition of the is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
tread across the entire width of all
& WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐ tyres.
aged tyres Notes on snow chains
Minimum tread depth for:
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
R Summer tyres: 3 mm & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
As a result, you could lose control of your rect snow chain fitting
vehicle. R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres
damage and replace any damaged tyres wheels, the snow chains may drag against
before the legally prescribed limit for
immediately. the vehicle body or chassis components.
the minimum tread depth is reached.
402 Wheels and tyres

This could cause damage to the vehicle or R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per‐ Tyre pressure
the tyres. missible speed is 50 km/h.
Notes on tyre pressure
# Never fit snow chains on the front R Vehicles with Parking Pilot: Do not use
wheels. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
are fitted. ficient or excessive tyre pressure
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels
in pairs. R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Only
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the
drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains following risks:
are fitted.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit‐ R The tyres may burst, especially as the
ted snow chains % You can permanently limit the maximum load and vehicle speed increase.
vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres R The tyres may wear excessively and/or
If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the (→ page 193).
wheel trims can be damaged. unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away traction.
before fitting snow chains. (→ page 184). This allows the wheels to R The driving characteristics, as well as
spin, achieving an increased driving force. steering and braking, may be greatly
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain impaired.
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
# Comply with the recommended tyre
Service Centre. pressure and check the tyre pressure of
all tyres including the spare wheel regu‐
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that larly:
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
R at least once a month
with the same quality standard. R when the load changes
 Wheels and tyres 403

R before embarking on a longer journey # Check whether the wheel or valve has a 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking
leak. the tyre pressure of warm tyres.
R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving # If you are unable to rectify the damage, Notes on trailer operation
contact a qualified specialist workshop. Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom‐
# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary. mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure
Information on the recommended tyre pressure table for increased load.
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found
low can: on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.
Tyre pressure table
fuel filler flap (→ page 403).
R Cause increased tyre damage. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the
R Adversely affect handling characteristics and pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does fuel filler flap.
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning. not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre
pressure.
& WARNING Risk of accident from repea‐ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
ted tyre pressure drop tem: You can also check the tyre pressure using
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the the on-board computer.
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
to burst. R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres
# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
objects. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

A rise in the tyre temperature of 10 °C increases

the tyre pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar,
404 Wheels and tyres

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by The tyre pressure appears in the multifunction
the + symbol, the tyre pressure information display (→ page 247).
following shows alternative tyre pressures. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's tyre temperature is excessive, a warning will be
ride comfort. Fuel consumption may then given:
increase slightly.
R Via display messages (→ page 473).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The cluster (→ page 508).
actual number of seats may differ from this. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
Be sure to also observe the following further pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
related subjects: suitable for the operating situation. Set the tyre
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402) pressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure for
the current operating situation must first be
Tyre pressure monitoring system taught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tem.
tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi‐ Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for tem In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
cold tyres under various operating conditions, The system checks the tyre pressure of the tyres tem will automatically update the new reference
i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure values after you have changed the tyre pressure.
sensor. You can, however, also update the reference val‐
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres‐ ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
sure, the tyre pressure information following is New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres,
are automatically taught-in the first time they are system manually (→ page 405).
only valid for those tyre sizes.
driven.
 Wheels and tyres 405

System limitations by pressure gauges are higher than those

The tyre pressure monitoring system does not shown by the on-board computer. In this
issue a warning: case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. Make sure you also observe the following related
subjects:
R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
tyre. Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
R If there is a malfunction caused by another tem
radio signal source.
Requirements:
Be sure to also observe the following further R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
related subjects: minutes of driving set for the respective operating condition on
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in each of the four wheels (→ page 402).
process of the system is not yet complete.
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre The tyre pressures are already being moni‐ Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in
pressure monitoring system tored. the following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.
Requirements: # Compare the tyre pressure with the recom‐
R The ignition is switched on. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or
mended tyre pressure for the current operat‐
ing condition (→ page 403). Observe the newly fitted.
On-board computer: notes on tyre temperature (→ page 402).
, Service . Tyre pressure
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
One of the following displays appears: play may deviate from those of the tyre pres‐
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel: sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated
406 Wheels and tyres

On-board computer: Radio-type approval of the tyre pressure Country Radio equipment approval
, Service . Tyre pressure monitoring system number
# Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on Radio equipment approval numbers
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Jordan Kingdom of Jordon Type approval
Country Radio equipment approval for Tyre Pressure sensor.
The Use current pressures as new reference number
values message is shown in the multifunction Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐
display. Abu Dhabi TRA ics Ltd. Model: AG5SP4
# Press a to confirm the restart. REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15. Type Approval Number:
The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is TRC/LPD/2015/21
DEALER NO: DA0047074/10
shown in the multifunction display. Kingdom of Jordon Type approval
Current warning messages are deleted and Argentina AFTIC:H14788 for Tyre Pressure sensor.
the h yellow warning lamp goes out. Dubai TRA Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐
After you have driven for a few minutes, the ics Ltd. Model: MFR
REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15.
system checks whether the current tyre pres‐ Type Approval Number:
sures are within the specified range. The cur‐ DEALER NO: DA0047074/10 TRC/LPD/2015/223
rent tyre pressures are then accepted as ref‐ European Hereby, Schrader Electronics
erence values and monitored. Malaysia RCDD/04A/0615/S(15-2095)
Union Ltd., declares that this TPMS is in
Be sure to also observe the following further compliance with the essential Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
related subjects: requirements and other provi‐ Numero d'agrement :MR 10216
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402) sions of directive 1999/5/EC. ANRT 2015
The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at emcteam@ Date d'agrement :18/3/2015
schrader.co.uk
 Wheels and tyres 407

Country Radio equipment approval Country Radio equipment approval Country Radio equipment approval
number number number
Mexico IFT:RCPSCAG15-0627 South Ukraine
IFT:RLVSCMF15-0959 Africa

Moldova
TA-2015/072 Approved Schrader Electronics цім
TA-2015/117 Approved стверджує, що обладнання
Радіопередавач моделі AG5SP4
Philip‐ системи контролю тиску в
pines шині автомобіля відповідає
вимогам Технічного
регламенту радіообладнання і
телекомунікаційного кінцевого
NTC (термінального) обладнання
Type Approved. (Постанова КМУ № 679 від 24
No:ESD-1510576CNTC червня 2009 р.) Декларація
відповідності знаходиться на
Serbia сайті Schrader Electronics та
надається за запитом на
електрону адресу emc‐
team@schrader.co.uk
Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA Schrader Electronics цім
105282 стверджує, що обладнання
408 Wheels and tyres

Country Radio equipment approval Brazil Vietnam

number
Радіопередавач моделі MFR
системи контролю тиску в
шині автомобіля відповідає
вимогам Технічного
регламенту радіообладнання і
телекомунікаційного кінцевого
(термінального) обладнання
(Постанова КМУ № 679 від 24
червня 2009 р.) Декларація
відповідності знаходиться на Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
сайті Schrader Electronics та isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐ Tyre pressure loss warning system
надається за запитом на ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
електрону адресу emc‐ Function of the tyre pressure loss warning
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas system
team@schrader.co.uk operando em caráter primário. The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the
United TRA driver by means of display messages when there
Arab Emi‐ REGISTERED NO :ER37156/15. is a severe tyre pressure loss.
rates After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotation
DEALER NO:DA0047074/10
or a wheel change, the tyre pressure loss warn‐
ing system has to be taught-in again by being
restarted (→ page 409).
 Wheels and tyres 409

The tyre pressure loss warning system does not Be sure to also observe the following further # Press a to begin the new start.
replace the need to regularly check the tyre related subjects: The Tyre pressure now OK? message is
pressures. R Display messages about the tyres shown in the multifunction display.
System limitations (→ page 473) # Select Yes.

The tyre pressure loss warning system does not R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402) # Press a to confirm the restart.

issue a warning: The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning
shown in the multifunction display.
R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. system
R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
Requirements: tyre pressure loss warning system monitors
example, by a foreign object penetrating the R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.
tyre. set for the respective operating condition on
R If the pressure loss in several tyres decrea‐
Make sure you also observe the following related
each of the four wheels (→ page 402).
subjects:
ses at the same rate.
On-board computer: R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
The tyre pressure loss warning system has a , Service . Tyre pressure
limited or delayed function:
The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK Wheel change
R When the road surface is poor, e.g. snow or message is shown in the multifunction display.
gravel. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in tyres
R When driving with snow chains. the following situations:
R When driving in a very sporty driving style R The tyre pressure has changed. You can ask for information regarding permitted
with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐ wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or Service Centre.
eration.
newly fitted.
R When towing a very heavy or large trailer.
R When driving with a high load.
410 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ These tyres have been specially adapted for
rect dimensions of wheels and tyres ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa‐ use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are city or the permissible speed rating ESP®, and are marked as follows:
used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
components may become damaged. capacity or the permissible speed rating may R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
# Always replace wheels and tyres with lead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst‐ (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
those that fulfil the specifications of the ing. R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
original part. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes tain AMG tyres)
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the approved for your vehicle model.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
correct: # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
R Designation rating and speed rating required for otherwise be adversely affected. In addition,
your vehicle. when driving with a load, tyre dimension var‐
R Type
iations could cause the tyres to come into
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the * NOTE Damage to vehicle and tyres due contact with the body and axle components.
correct: to non-approved tyre types and sizes This could result in damage to the tyres or
R Designation the vehicle.
For safety reasons, only use wheels, tyres
R Manufacturer and accessories which have been approved Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested
R Type for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
 Wheels and tyres 411

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ * NOTE Damage to electronic component Before purchasing and using non-approved
ded tyres parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and enquire about:
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec‐ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring R Suitability
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ‐ system: electronic component parts are
R Legal stipulations
ous damage cannot always be detected on located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should
retreaded tyres. not be applied in the area of the valve. R Factory recommendations
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ The tools could damage the electronic com‐
anteed. ponent parts. & WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tyres
# Do not use used tyres if you have no # Have the tyres changed at a qualified
information about their previous usage. specialist workshop only. The special tyre tread in combination with
the optimised tyre compound, means that
the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or * NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low roads is increased.
tyres when driving over obstacles ambient temperatures
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. Using summer tyres at very low ambient a low outside temperature and tyre running
The lower the tyre section width, the greater temperatures can cause cracks to form, temperature.
is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when thereby damaging the tyres permanently. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving over obstacles. # At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S-
driving style accordingly.
# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly tyres.
# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures
carefully.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your of less than 50 °F.
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being
used correctly can impair operating safety.
412 Wheels and tyres

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring R When replacing with tyres that do not
replacing tyres: system: All fitted wheels must be equipped feature run-flat characteristics: Vehicles
R Country-specific requirements for tyre with functioning sensors for the tyre pres‐ with MOExtended tyres are not equipped
approval that define a specific tyre type for sure monitoring system. with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the
your vehicle. R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with
or all-season tyres marked M+S for all tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in tics, e.g. winter tyres.
certain regions and areas of operation can wheels.
be highly beneficial. Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake For more information on wheels and tyres, con‐
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop.
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended vide the best possible grip in wintry road Be sure to also observe the following further
tyres) and the same make. conditions. related subjects:
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
(left and right). tread.
R Tyre pressure table (→ page 403)
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
size in the event of a flat tyre in order to the M+S tyres fitted.
(→ page 419)
drive to the specialist workshop. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the this must be indicated in an appropriate label
in the driver's field of vision. Notes on interchanging wheels
wheels.
R Do not make any modifications to the brake R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
system, the wheels or the tyres. first 100 km.
ent wheel sizes
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's wheels or tyres have different dimensions
general operating permit.
 Wheels and tyres 413

may severely impair the driving characteris‐ It is imperative to observe the instructions and % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
tics. safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so. The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on the sticker affixed to the jack.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo‐ The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
nents may also be damaged. Notes on storing wheels
malfunction, please contact a qualified spe‐
# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, cialist workshop.
wheels and tyres are of the same dry and preferably dark place. The tyre-change tool kit is located under the
dimensions. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, boot floor.
grease or fuel.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have different dimensions can
render the general operating permit invalid. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
differ: cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of For more information on which tyre-changing
the tyre tools are required and approved for performing a
R Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
tyre specialist workshop.
Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel example: 1 Jack
size, you can interchange the wheels every 2 Gloves
R jack
5000 to 10000 km, depending on the wear. 3 Wheel spanner
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for R chock
4 Centring pin
the wheels. R wheel spanner
R centring pin
414 Wheels and tyres

5 Folding chock Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change # Place chocks or other suitable items under
6 Ratchet for jack the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
Requirements: nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Setting up the folding wheel chock R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre- # Remove the hub caps if necessary
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist (→ page 414).
workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Raise the vehicle (→ page 415).
R The vehicle is not on a slope.
R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level Removing and fitting hub caps
ground. Requirements:
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead (→ page 414).
position. Plastic hub cap
# Vehicles with manual transmission: # To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub
Engage first or reverse gear.
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: # To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the
Shift into position j.
hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
# Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Set the # Position the hub cap and turn the centre
normal vehicle level (→ page 207).
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
# Switch off the engine. physically and audibly.
# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
 Wheels and tyres 415

Aluminium hub cap # Attach wheel spanner 3 to socket 2 and R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
tighten the hub cap clockwise. non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm. load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
# Raise the vehicle (→ page 415). R The base of the jack must be positioned ver‐
tically under the jack support point.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(→ page 414).
# To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap R The hub caps have been removed
1. (→ page 414).
% The socket can be found in the tyre-change Important notes on using the jack:
tool kit. R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2. been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
to raise the vehicle. R Never place your hands or feet under the
# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1
vehicle.
anti-clockwise and remove it. R The jack is only designed for raising and
R Do not lie under the vehicle.
# To fit: position hub cap 1 and turn until it is holding the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ R Do not start the engine and do not release
completely flush with the wheel.
nance work under the vehicle. the parking brake.
# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
R Do not open or close any doors or the boot
lid.
416 Wheels and tyres

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.

# Using the wheel spanner, loosen the wheel Position of jack support points # Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by change tool kit and place it on the hexagon
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are
screws completely. positioning of the jack visible.
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned ver‐
tically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
 Wheels and tyres 417

Removing a wheel
Requirements:
R The vehicle is raised (→ page 415).

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force

to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on

wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
# Screw centring pin 1 instead of the wheel
a dirty surface. bolt into the threading.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ # Remove the wheel.
pletely. # Fit the new wheel (→ page 417).
# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
# Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until Fitting a new wheel
jack 2 sits completely on jack support point
1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on Requirements:
the ground. R The wheel is removed (→ page 417).
# Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3
until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm
off the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (→ page 417).
418 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen‐ Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
wheel tring pin and push it on.
Requirements:
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel R The new wheel has been fitted (→ page 417).
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting wheel bolts andnuts # Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexa‐
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ gon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB"
wheel nuts to come loose. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
are visible.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
# To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet ring
ing. spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# In the event of damage to the threads, # For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom‐
contact a qualified specialist workshop mends that you only use wheel bolts which
immediately. have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ cles, as well as for the wheel in question.
aged hub threads replaced. # Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
# Do not continue driving. tight.
# Unscrew the centring pin.
# Observe the information on the choice of
tyres (→ page 409).
# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, # Lower the vehicle(→ page 418). # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5).
the correct direction of rotation. Observe the Specified tightening torque: 150 Nm.
direction of rotation when fitting.
 Wheels and tyres 419

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ Be sure to also observe the following further # Only use an emergency spare wheel or
rect tightening torque related subjects: spare wheel of a different size briefly.
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
The wheels could come loose if the wheel # Do not switch off ESP®.
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the # >Have the emergency spare wheel or
prescribed torque. Emergency spare wheel spare wheel of a different size replaced
# Have the tightening torque checked Notes on the emergency spare wheel at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
immediately at a qualified specialist shop. The new wheel must have the
workshop after changing a wheel. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by correct dimensions.
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun‐ Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare
ted wheel and adjust accordingly. The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐
# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn‐
Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare
ing system (→ page 409). wheel may severely impair the driving char‐ Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow
Exception: if the new wheel is an emergency acteristics. chains.
spare wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
To prevent hazardous situations:
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring years at the latest, regardless of wear.
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and
system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring % Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn‐
system (→ page 405). drive carefully.
ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is
Exception: if the new wheel is an emergency # Never fit more than one emergency
fitted the tyre pressure loss warning system
spare wheel. spare wheel or spare wheel that differs cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys‐
in size. tem again when the emergency spare wheel
has been replaced with a new wheel.
420 Wheels and tyres

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring # Detach the fastening straps.

system: If an emergency spare wheel is fit‐ # Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the fas‐
ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can‐ tening straps from the brackets.
not function reliably. Only restart the system
again when the emergency spare wheel has
# Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
been replaced with a new wheel. the emergency spare wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring # Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
system: For a few minutes after an emer‐ remove the emergency spare wheel.
gency spare wheel is fitted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 402)
R Tyre pressure table (→ page 403)

Removing the emergency spare wheel

The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
# Observe the information on mounting tyres
(→ page 409).
# Open the boot.
 Technical data 421

Notes on technical data vehicle's operating permit may be invalida‐ & WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
Plug-in hybrid: make sure that you read the ted. rect operation of the RF transmitter
separate Owner's Manual. Otherwise, you may # Always have work on the engine elec‐
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in
fail to recognise dangers. tronics and related components carried the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
The technical data was determined in accord‐ out at a qualified specialist workshop. could interfere with the on-board electronics,
ance with EU Directives. The data stated only e.g.:
applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You R if the RF transmitter is not connected to
Two-way radios
can obtain further information from a Mercedes- an exterior aerial
Benz Service Centre. Notes on installing two-way radios R if the exterior aerial is not correctly
Only for certain countries: you can find vehi‐ mounted or is not of low reflection
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents & WARNING Risk of accident caused by
(CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu‐ tampering with the RF transmitter This could jeopardise the operating safety of
ments are delivered with your vehicle. The electromagnetic radiation from RF trans‐ the vehicle.
mitters may interfere with the vehicle elec‐ # Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
tronics if RF transmitters are tampered with fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
On-board electronics or not correctly retrofitted. # When operating RF transmitters in the
Notes on tampering with the engine elec‐ This could jeopardise the operating safety of vehicle, always connect them to the
tronics the vehicle. low-reflection exterior aerial.
# You should have all work on electrical
* NOTE Premature wear through improper
maintenance and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the
422 Technical data

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ On the rear wings, it is recommended that you
mit due to failure to comply with the position the aerial on the side of the vehicle
instructions for installation and use closest to the centre of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
The operating permit may be invalidated if Vehicles – EMC guidelines for installation of
the instructions for installation and use of RF aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equip‐
transmitters are not observed. ment) when retrofitting RF (radio frequency)
# Only use approved frequency bands. transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements
# Observe the maximum permissible out‐ for detachable parts.
put power in these frequency bands. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
# Only use approved aerial positions. equipment, use the power supply or aerial con‐
nections intended for use with the basic wiring.
Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supple‐
ments when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output
1 Front roof area The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
2 Rear roof area base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
3 Rear wing the following table:
4 Boot lid
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit‐
ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
 Technical data 423

Frequency band and maximum transmission The following can be used in the vehicle without Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
output restrictions: number
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ R RF transmitter with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW Vehicle identification plate
sion output
R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
Short wave 100 W in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
3 - 54 MHz maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
4 m band 30 W
R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
74 - 88 MHz
There are no restrictions when positioning the
2 m band 50 W aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow‐
144 - 174 MHz ing frequency bands:
Trunked radio sys‐ 10 W R Trunked radio system/Tetra
tem/Tetra R 70 cm band
380 - 460 MHz R 2G/3G/4G

70 cm band 35 W
420 - 450 MHz
Mobile communica‐ 10 W
tions (2G/3G/4G)
424 Technical data

6 Permissible front axle load (kg)

7 Permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
% The data shown in the image is example
data.

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle identification plate (example: all
1 Vehicle manufacturer other countries)
2 Place of manufacture 1 Vehicle manufacturer
3 Manufacturing date 2 EU type approval number (only for certain
4 Vehicle model countries)
5 VIN 3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Permissible gross mass (kg)
5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer
combination (kg) (only for specific countries)
 Technical data 425

VIN in front of the right-hand front seat VIN on the lower edge of the windscreen Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating

fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
# Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in
1 VIN (vehicle identification number)
their original containers.
The VIN on the lower edge of the windscreen is # Always keep children away from operat‐
only available in some countries. ing fluids.
Engine number
1 VIN (vehicle identification number) The engine number is stamped into the crank‐ + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
case. You can obtain further information from pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
2 Floor covering any qualified specialist workshop. sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
426 Technical data

Operating fluids include the following: Further information on approved operating flu‐ # Keep children away from fuel.
R fuels ids:
R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for If you or other people come into contact with
operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- fuel, observe the following:
AdBlue®
benz.com (by entering the designation) # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
R lubricants
R At a qualified specialist workshop soap and water.
R coolant
# If fuel comes into contact with your
R brake fluid & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire or explosion eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
R windscreen washer fluid caused by fuel oughly with clean water. Seek medical
R climate control system refrigerant Fuels are highly inflammable. attention immediately.
# You must avoid fire, naked flames, cre‐ # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
Only use products recommended by Mercedes- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
Benz. Damage caused by using vehicle products ating sparks and smoking.
ing.
which have not been recommended is not cov‐ # Before refuelling, switch off the engine
# Change immediately out of clothing that
ered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee, warranty and auxiliary heating if your vehicle is
or goodwill gestures. equipped with auxiliary heating. has come into contact with fuel.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on & WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuel
the containers: Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your Information on fuel grades for vehicles with
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) health a petrol engine
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into Observe the notes on operating fluids
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. (→ page 425).
# Do not inhale fuel vapour.
 Technical data 427

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel E 200, E 250, E 400 4MATIC: Observe the Recommended fuel: the recommended octane
information on sulphur content on the informa‐ number for your vehicle can be found in the
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could tion table in the fuel filler flap: information table in the fuel filler flap
result in damage to the fuel system, the (→ page 166).
engine and the emission control system. As a temporary measure, if the recommended
# Only refuel using premium-grade unlea‐ fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded
ded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an regular petrol with an octane number of at least:
equivalent specification. R E 250: 93 RON

Fuel of this specification may contain up to R All other models: 91 RON

10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use This may reduce engine output and increase fuel
with E10 fuel. consumption.
Do not refuel using: Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON.
R Diesel
* NOTE Damage to the emission control Further information on fuel can be found:
R E85, E100
system caused by fuel with a too high R At a filling station
R Petrol containing methanol (M15, M30, sulphur content R At a qualified specialist workshop
M85, M100)
# Only use sulphur-free fuel (sulphur con‐ Information on additives in petrol
R Petrol with additives containing metal
tent ≤ 10 ppm). Observe the notes on operating fluids
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: (→ page 425).
All other models: If the available fuel is not suf‐
# Do not switch the ignition on. ficiently low in sulphur, this can produce
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. unpleasant odours.
428 Technical data

* NOTE Damage caused by non-approved & WARNING Risk of fire through fuel mix‐ Do not use the following:
additives ture R petrol
Even small amounts of the wrong additive If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash R marine diesel
may lead to malfunctions occurring. point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of R heating oil
# Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ pure diesel fuel.
R bio-diesel
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. While the engine is running, component
R vegetable oil
parts in the exhaust system may overheat
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel unnoticed. R paraffin
brands that have additives. # Never refuel using petrol. R kerosene
The fuel grade available in some countries may # Never mix diesel fuel with petrol.
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the Information on low outside temperatures
fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel as
consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service * NOTE Damage through wrong fuel
possible at the beginning of winter.
Centre, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could Before changing over to winter diesel, the fuel
additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. result in damage to the fuel system, the tank should be empty, if possible. When refilling
Always observe the notes and mixing ratios engine and the emission control system. for the first time, keep the fuel level low, for
specified on the container. # Only refuel using diesel fuel that con‐ example at reserve level. The fuel tank can be fil‐
Information on fuel grades for vehicles with forms to European standard EN 590, or led as usual at the next refuelling.
a diesel engine an equivalent specification. Further information on fuel can be found:
# Vehicles with diesel particle filters:
General notes R At a filling station.
Observe the notes on operating fluids in countries outside the EU, only refuel
R At a qualified specialist workshop
(→ page 425). with low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul‐
phur content of under 50 ppm.
 Technical data 429

Notes on fuel consumption R Vehicles that comply with or exceed the Adblue®
EURO 5 standard: Regulation (EC) No.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Increased CO2 715/2007 Notes on AdBlue®
‑emissions due to increased fuel con‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids
Tank capacity and reserve fuel level (→ page 425).
sumption
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on the vehicle equipment. AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
Your vehicle's CO2 ‑emissions are directly
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
related to fuel consumption. Filling capacity
# You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 * NOTE Damage caused by diluting or mix‐
Model Total capacity
emissions by driving carefully and hav‐ ing additives with AdBlue®
ing your vehicle serviced regularly. E 300 66.0 l
Diluting or mixing additives with AdBlue® can
% Only for certain countries: you can find the E 400 4MATIC 66.0 l destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat‐
current consumption and emission values of or ment system.
your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CER‐ 80.0 l
# Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu‐ ISO 22241.
ments are delivered with your vehicle. All other models 50.0 l # Do not use additives.
The consumption figures were determined, or # Do not dilute AdBlue®.
based on the currently applicable version of
the standard: 66.0 l
R Vehicles that comply with standards up
Model Of which reserve
to and including the EURO 4 standard: fuel
EU Directive RL80/1268/EEC
All models 7.0 l
430 Technical data

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to If AdBlue® has already crystallised, clean it
impurities in AdBlue® with a sponge and cold water.
Impurities in AdBlue® lead to:
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small
R Increased emissions values
amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do
R Damage to the catalytic converter not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be
R Engine damage released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐
R BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment mal‐
lated areas.
functions AdBlue® filling capacity
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®. Total capacity of AdBlue® tank * NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
Model Total capacity tives
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Contamination
caused by AdBlue® All models 23.5 l # Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period of cations explicitly prescribed for the
time, and contaminate the surfaces with Engine oil service intervals.
which they come into contact.
Notes on engine oil # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
# Surfaces that have come into contact order to achieve longer change intervals
Observe the notes on operating fluids
with AdBlue® while refilling must be (→ page 425). than prescribed.
immediately rinsed with water, or # Do not use additives.
AdBlue® must be removed with a damp
cloth and cold water.
# Have the engine oil renewed at regular
intervals.
 Technical data 431

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Replacement amount
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB- Model Replacement
workshop. Approval amount
Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may
be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. E 350 d 228.51, 229.31, E 200 d 6.3 l
Further information on engine oils and oil filters: 229.51, 229.52 E 220 d
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for All other models 228.51, 229.31, E 220 d 4MATIC
operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- 229.51, 229.52,
229.71 E 200 4MATIC 6.5 l
benz.com (by entering the designation)
R At a qualified specialist workshop
E 400 4MATIC
If the engine oils listed in the table are not avail‐
Petrol engines: For certain countries, different able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of the fol‐ E 350 d 9.0 l
engine oils can be used in conjunction with lowing engine oils once only: All other models 7.0 l
reduced maintenance intervals. For more infor‐ R Petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
mation, please contact a qualified specialist 229.3 or ACEA A3/B3
workshop. R Diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-
Notes on brake fluid
Quality and filling capacity of engine oil Approval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 425).
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter:
Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.5, 229.6
432 Technical data

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Coolant * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
vapour pockets forming in the brake sys‐ Notes on coolant ant
tem Observe the notes on operating fluids # Only add coolant that has been pre‐
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture (→ page 425). mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of tection.
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, & WARNING Risk of fire‑ and injury from
antifreeze Further information on coolant:
vapour pockets may form in the brake sys‐
tem when the brakes are applied hard. R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐ Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at
This impairs the braking effect. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the
ment, it may ignite.
R At a qualified specialist workshop.
specified intervals. # Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze.
Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali‐ # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
fied specialist workshop. next to the filler opening. peratures
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. component parts before starting the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
Further information on brake fluid: vehicle. tected against overheating and corrosion at
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for high outside temperatures.
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- # Always use an appropriate coolant.
benz.com
R At a qualified specialist workshop Have the coolant regularly changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
 Technical data 433

The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting For the correct mixing ratio refer to the informa‐
concentrate in the engine cooling system should due to unsuitable windscreen washer tion on the antifreeze reservoir.
be: fluid Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washer
R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection fluid all year round.
down to approximately -37 °C). Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
lighting. Vehicle data
down to -45 °C).
# Only use windscreen washer fluids Vehicle dimensions
which are also suitable for use on plas‐
Notes on windscreen washer fluid tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB The heights specified may vary as a result of the:
WinterFit. R tyres
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 425). R load
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by R condition of the suspension
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to mixing windscreen washer fluids R optional equipment
windscreen washer concentrate # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly terFit with other windscreen washer flu‐
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into ids.
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the fill
# Make sure that no windscreen washer level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
concentrate spills out next to the filler Recommended windscreen washer fluid:
opening. R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
434 Technical data

Model 1 Opening Model Vehicle

height height
E 200 4MATIC 1845 mm E 200 4MATIC 1480 mm
E 220 d 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC
All other models 1833 mm E 250 1474 mm
E 350 d
Vehicle dimensions
All models E 300 1460 mm

Vehicle length 4923 mm E 400 4MATIC 1467 mm

Vehicle width including out‐ 2065 mm All other models 1468 mm

side mirrors
Vehicle width excluding out‐ 1852 mm Weights and loads
Opening height side mirrors Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Model 1 Opening
Wheelbase 2939 mm R items of optional equipment increase the
height
unladen weight and reduce the maximum
E 250 1839 mm payload.
E 350 d R vehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate .
E 300 1826 mm
 Technical data 435

Roof load and boot load Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a
All models minimum start-off gradeability of 8% from a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%) from
standstill) a standstill)
Maximum roof load 100 kg Model Manual Auto‐ Model Manual Auto‐
Maximum boot load 100 kg trans‐ matic trans‐ matic
mission trans‐ mission trans‐
mission mission
Trailer hitch E 180 — 1900 kg E 180 — 1900 kg
General notes on the trailer hitch
E 200 1500 kg 1900 kg E 200 1500 kg 1900 kg
Not all models can be used to tow a trailer
(→ page 237). E 250 — 2000 kg E 250 — 2000 kg
Modifications to the engine cooling system may E 200 4MATIC E 200 4MATIC
be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.
All other models — 2100 kg All other models — 2100 kg
The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi‐
ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi‐ Permissible towing capacity, unbraked
cle documents.
Model Permissible towing
Further information on the trailer hitch can be capacity, unbraked
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
All models 750 kg
Permissible towing capacity
The tongue weight is not included in the towing
capacity.
436 Technical data

Maximum tongue weight Permissible rear axle load during trailer

operation
* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer
coming loose Axle load
Model Axle load
If the tongue weight used is too low, the
trailer may come loose. E 180 1335 kg
# The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg. E 200, manual trans‐ 1340 kg
mission
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as
possible to the maximum permissible E 200, automatic 1345 kg
tongue weight. transmission
E 250
Tongue weight
E 200 4MATIC
Model Maximum tongue
weight E 300 1370 kg
All models 84 kg E 200 d 1375 kg
E 220 d
E 220 d 4MATIC 1360 kg
E 350 d 1400 kg
E 400 4MATIC
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437

Display messages Please respond in accordance with the display Calling up stored display messages
messages and follow the additional notes in this On-board computer:
Introduction Owner's Manual. , Service . 1 message
Notes on display messages You can hide low-priority display messages by If there are no display messages, No messages
Display messages appear in the multifunction pressing the % button or the left-hand Touch appears in the multifunction display.
display. Control. The display messages are then stored in
# Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐ the message memory. Rectify the cause of a dis‐
play message as quickly as possible. ing upwards or downwards on Touch Control
plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
from the symbols in the multifunction display. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐ # To exit the message memory: press the
den. The multifunction display shows these mes‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages sages continuously until the cause for the mes‐ % button.
are accompanied by a warning tone. sage has been rectified.
438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

÷
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

÷
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

currently unavailable See & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

Owner's Manual
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
inoperative See Owner's tion.
Manual
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

!
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle

÷
stabilisation.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
# Switch the ignition on.
Turn on the ignition to
release the parking brake
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The red ! indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is applied while driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled .
Release parking brake R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake .

# Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Parking brake See Owner's # Apply the electric parking brake manually .
Manual
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction‐
ing.
To release:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually .

or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically .
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal‐
functioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

To apply:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .
To release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after
the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is
malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
# Charge the battery.

To apply:
# Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the
vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed away. Do not do this when having the vehicle
towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually .

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Brake immediately * Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You can restart the engine.

J
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

Check brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The brake linings have reached the wear limit.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check brake pad wear

Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
tions currently limited See Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Owner's Manual Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system borders .
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
tions limited See Owner's Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning.
Manual Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE inoperative See * PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.

Owner's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PRE-SAFE impulse side * Side PRE-SAFE® Impulse is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
inoperative See Owner's # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
Radar sensors dirty See * The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
Owner's Manual R soiling of the sensors
R heavy rain
R extended driving on inter-urban roads without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensors .

# Restart the engine.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system is faulty (→ page 31).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
Restraint sys. malfunction If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
Consult workshop might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for
example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recognising a restraint system malfunction

R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 31).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
Example:Front left malfunc- If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
tion Consult workshop might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for
example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recognising a restraint system malfunction

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6
* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning (→ page 37).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag
Example:Left windowbag The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident
malfunction Consult work- with high deceleration.
shop # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G
* One or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is/are malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative
Front-passenger airbag dis- * The front passenger airbag is disabled, even though an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an
abled See Owner's Manual adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system
detects may be too low.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform
its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe‐
cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front-passenger airbag * The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:
enabled See Owner's Man- R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
ual front passenger seat.
R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied.

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury from using a child restraint system when the front passenger
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(→ page 228).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

break!

À
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative

É
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle rising

É
* The vehicle level is too low and the vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle rising Please wait

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See Owner's DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
Manual # Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* You have pulled away although the vehicle level was too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
The vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level.
Stop vehicle Vehicle too # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
low
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres of the front axle or the front wings could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level .
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised.

É
* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
# In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive faster than 80 km/h.

# In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive faster than 30 km/h.
Please reduce speed
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set
the selected vehicle level.
# Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.

Compressor is cooling When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle continues rising to the selected vehicle level.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 234).
Owner's Manual Vehicles with Steering Pilot: the camera view may be restricted by the windscreen.
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.

If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Steering Pilot:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windscreen.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist Camera * The camera view is reduced. Possible causes:
view restricted See Own- R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
er's Manual R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Vehicles without Steering Pilot: the camera view is reduced.
Camera view restricted Possible causes:
See Owner's Manual R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Blind Spot Assist currently * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's The system borders have been reached (→ page 232).
Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.
Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system borders have been reached (→ page 232).
Owner's Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist inopera- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Example:Parking Pilot Park- * The parking assistance systems of Parking Pilot were interrupted. You have opened the driver's door or touched the
ing cancelled steering wheel, for example.
# Steer and brake manually.

ë
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function .

Off
Distance Pilot available * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (→ page 196).
again
Distance Pilot currently * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 193).
Manual # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
Distance Pilot inoperative * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Steering Pilot currently * Steering Pilot is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 200).
Manual # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
# If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision.

Steering Pilot inoperative * Steering Pilot is malfunctioning. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC remains available.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Limiter passive * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode
(→ page 191).

¯
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control .
--- mph

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.

If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 190).
Cruise control and Limiter * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

È
* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter .
--- mph

Speed limit (winter tyres) * You have reached the stored maximum speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
XXX mph

ð
* The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded (only for certain countries).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded

Traffic Sign Assist currently * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's # Drive on.
Manual When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
Traffic Sign Assist inopera- * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist not availa- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
ble when towing a trailer # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
See Owner's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Blind Spot Assist * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
not available when towing # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
a trailer See Owner's Man-
ual
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Manoeuvring * Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the
assistance limited See system borders (→ page 217). Beware of the entire vehicle surroundings.
Owner's Manual # As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.

Parking Pilot and * Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
PARKTRONIC inoperative # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.
See Owner's Manual # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Top up coolant See Own- * The coolant level is too low.
er’s Manual
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant .

?
* The fan motor is faulty.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

Coolant Stop vehicle & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet
Switch engine off
If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

See Owner's Manual # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#
* The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop vehicle See Owner's # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The battery charge level is too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
Stop vehicle Leave engine # Start the engine.
running # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

4
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

Check eng. oil lev. when # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
next refuelling
# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 368).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 430).
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.

Engine oil level Stop vehi- * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
cle Switch engine off # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Check the engine oil level.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 368).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 430).

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.

Engine oil level Reduce oil * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
level # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have engine oil siphoned off.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Add 1 litre engine oil when * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
next refuelling # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 368).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 430).

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil pressure is too low.

Engine oil pressure Stop * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure
Switch off engine # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil pressure.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor is interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil level cannot be
measured

Ø
* The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range.
# Refill AdBlue® immediately .

Refill AdBlue See Owner’s

Manual

Ø
* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.
# Top up at least 4.0 l of AdBlue® .

# Switch the ignition on.

Refill AdBlue Eng. start not You can restart the engine after approximately one minute.
possible

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check AdBlue See Owner’s

Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

8
* The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Reserve fuel level

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Eng. start not possible in

XXX mi

¸
* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace air cleaner

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Eng. start not possible

472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the displayed distance.
# Refill AdBlue® immediately .

% The message disappears after driving at a speed above 15 km/h for approximately one minute.
Refill AdBlue No start in
XXX mi

#
* The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance.
Start engine See Owner's The battery charges.
Manual

!
* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the water in the fuel filter must be drained off.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Tyres
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

Check tyre pressures then * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
restart Run Flat Indicator # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

Run Flat Indicator inopera- * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too
great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system .

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

Check tyre(s) Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

Warning tyre defect Flat tyres are dangerous in the following ways:
R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.
# Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres (→ page 381).

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres.

Tyre press. monitor cur- * No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong radio signal source interference. The tyre
rently unavailable pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not
displayed.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel sensor(s) missing

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
ative No wheel sensors # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
ative
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure
loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking. ‑
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheated. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
# Drive more slowly.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tyre(s) overheated Reduce * At least one tyre is overheated.
speed
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â
* The key needs to be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace key
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

,
* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key in the smartphone: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the
engine.
# Make sure that the Internet connection is not limited by certain mobile phone settings.

Replace key See Owner's # Open the Mercedes me connect web App http://www.mercedes.me. and call up the "digital vehicle key in the
Manual smartphone" service.
# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.

# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC).

Â
* The key battery is discharged.
# Change the battery .

Change key batteries

Â
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, start the engine with the key in the stowage compartment .
Key not detected (white
display message)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â
* The key detection function is malfunctioning.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Start the vehicle with the key in the stowage compartment .

Place the key in the
marked space See Owner's
Manual

Â
* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R You can no longer start the engine.
Key not detected (red dis‐ R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
play message)
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Place the key in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the key .
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
* You retract or extend the ball neck.
Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the retracting or extending process using your hand, foot or other
aids. During the retracting or extending process, do not couple a trailer.
Trailer coupling extending… When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message disappears.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
* The trailer hitch is not operational.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

Check trailer hitch lock If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
# Uncouple the trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.
# Initiate a new swivelling procedure .
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Pay attention to the reduced ground clearance due to
the unlocked ball neck.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to deselect * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position.
Park (P) position # Depress the brake pedal.
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To shift out of P or N, * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position.
depress brake and start # Depress the brake pedal.
engine # Start the engine.

Risk of vehicle rolling * The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h.
Driver door open and trans- # Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle.
mission not in P
N permanently active Risk * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i.
of vehicle rolling # Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.

# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.

Only select Park (P) when * The transmission can only be shifted to position j when the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle is stationary
Without changing gear, * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.
consult workshop # When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis‐
sion position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12‑volt
Vehicle is operational battery might discharge and it will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a donor battery (starting
Switch off the ignition assistance).
before exiting
Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically.
Stop # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Switch the transmission to position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Reversing not poss. Con- * The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged.
sult workshop # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop vehicle Leave engine * The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible.
running Wait Transmission # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
cooling continue driving under any circumstances.
# Start the engine.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
tion # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress clutch fully to * You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.
start engine # Depress the clutch pedal and then start the engine.
The engine has stalled while pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly.
# Depress the clutch pedal again.
The engine starts automatically.
# Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.

Clutch overheated Avoid * The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating.
pulling away for XX:XX mins Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances.
# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions and leave the engine running.
The clutch is cooled more quickly when the engine is running.
or
# If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not ride the
clutch.
The clutch is cooled while driving.
When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Air conditioning Malfunc- * Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic
tion See Owner's Manual mode.
# Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

_
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.
# Switch the ignition off.

# To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right.
Before starting the engine, # Switch the ignition back on.
turn the steering wheel.

Ð
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by
the electric steering lock.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering malfunction See
Owner's Manual If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Let fresh air into the vehi- * The climate control system is malfunctioning.
cle interior! Air condition-
ing malf. Visit workshop & WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air
If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the passenger compart‐
ment. Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.
# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.

# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Ð
* The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Steering malfunction Drive
carefully Visit workshop
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering malfunction Stop If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
immediately See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Manual Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ð
* The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

Steering malfunction If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
Increased physical effort # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
See Owner's Manual # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself off.
# Drive a long distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
inoperative Battery low

&
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
# Refuel the vehicle.

inoperative Refuel vehicle

Active bonnet malfunction * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
See Owner's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

&
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on
the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
inoperative See Owner's # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Man.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

M
* The engine bonnet is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

# Close the engine bonnet.

C
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N
* The boot lid is open.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

# Close the boot lid.

_
* The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.

Example:Rear left seat

backrest not locked

¥
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer fluid .

Top up washer fluid

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Example:Left dipped beam or

# Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself .
% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp have failed.

b
* The active light function is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Light System inoper-

ative

b
* The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Intelligent Light System.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Intelligent Light System

inoperative
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The exterior lighting is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
Malfunction See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Manual # Check the fuses and replace them if necessary .

b
* The light sensor is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AUTO lights inoperative

b
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch off lights

b
* You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch on headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.
Plus inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
Plus currently unavailable The system borders have been reached (→ page 128).
See Owner's Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus availa-
ble again display message appears.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * The camera view is reduced. Possible causes:
Plus Camera view restric- R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
ted See Owner's Manual R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

Warning and indicator lamps iour is non-critical. These warning and indicator
lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up
Overview of warning and indicator lamps or flash after the engine is started or during a
Some systems perform a self-test when the igni‐ journey.
tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator
lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behav‐
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Instrument display (standard) Progressive setting (widescreen cockpit) ü Seat belt is not fastened
(→ page 501)
J Brakes (red) (→ page 495)
! ABS malfunction (→ page 495)
÷ ESP®(→ page 495)
å ESP® OFF (→ page 495)
! Electric parking brake(→ page 495)
Ð Steering assistance malfunction
(→ page 503)
# Electrical fault (→ page 505)
Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit If you select the progressive display setting in
vehicles with a widescreen cockpit, the position 6 Restraint system (→ page 495)
of the indicator lamps in the instrument display ; Engine diagnosis (→ page 505)
changes. 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
Warning and indicator lamps: tion indicator (→ page 505)
L Dipped beam (→ page 123) ? Coolant too hot/cold (→ page 505)
T Standing lights (→ page 123) · Distance warning (→ page 502)
K Main beam (→ page 125) % Preglow
#! Turn signal light (→ page 125) h Tyre pressure monitoring system
R Rear fog light (→ page 123) (→ page 508)
j Trailer hitch is not operational or is
swivelling (→ page 503)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J
The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

Brake system warning lamp If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
# If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
Brake system warning lamp R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking. Braking characteristics may be
impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional acoustic warning signal, EBD is malfunctioning.
ABS warning lamp Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in
an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® is intervening .
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP® warning lamp flashes

÷
The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
ESP® warning lamp lights
up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

å
The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.

ESP® OFF warning lamp & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety systems
is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.

# Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® .
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

Red indicator lamp, electric

parking brake applied

!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.

Restraint system warning & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
lamp If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not
be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7
The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after starting the engine.
In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt .
lights up
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the warning lamp may remain lit.
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt .
Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat.
flashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Distance warning warning # Be prepared to brake immediately.
lamp
# Increase the distance.

Active Brake Assist .

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
The red trailer hitch warning lamp is on.
The trailer hitch is not operational or swivels.

Trailer hitch warning lamp & WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

If the trailer hitch swivels:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð
The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Power steering system & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
warning lamp If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;
The yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
Engine diagnosis warning # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
lamp Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry.
# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.

#
The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Electrical fault warning
lamp

8
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.
Fuel reserve warning lamp
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp R The coolant level is too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 °C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Otherwise:
# Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

# Check the coolant level .

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tyres
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

Tyre pressure monitoring & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
system warning lamp lights Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
up
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
flashes If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in
one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking. ‑
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

510 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Acoustic locking verification signal Active light function ................................ 126
Switching on/off ................................... 65 Adaptive brake lights .............................. 190
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 232 Adaptive cruise control
Activating/deactivating ....................... 234 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
230 V socket ............................................ 119 Brake application ................................. 232
360° Camera ............................................ 214 Function/notes ................................... 232 Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Assigning as a favourite ....................... 217 System limits ....................................... 232 see Intelligent Light System
Care ..................................................... 374 Trailer operation .................................. 232 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Function ............................................... 214 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 364 Activating/deactivating ....................... 129
Selecting a view ................................... 216 Operation ............................................ 364 Function .............................................. 128
Resetting ............................................. 364 AdBlue® .................................................... 429
A Additives ............................................. 429
Active Brake Assist ................................. 185
A/C function Function/notes ................................... 185 Filling capacity .................................... 430
Activating/deactivating (control Setting ................................................. 189 Low outside temperatures ................... 429
panel) .................................................. 143 Notes ................................................... 169
Activating/deactivating (multimedia Active Emergency Stop Assist ................ 201 Purity ................................................... 429
system) ................................................ 143 Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 201 Additional door lock .................................. 68
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 180 Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 234 Additives .................................................. 430
Acceleration Activating/deactivating ....................... 236 AdBlue® ............................................... 429
see Kickdown Function .............................................. 234 Engine oil ............................................ 430
Sensitivity (function/notes) ................. 237 Fuel ..................................................... 427
Access data Setting the sensitivity .......................... 237
Editing ................................................. 332 System limits ....................................... 234 Additives (engine oil)
Setting ................................................. 330 Trailer operation .................................. 234 see Additives
 Index 511

Additives (fuel) AIR BODY CONTROL ................................ 205 Overview ............................................... 37

see Fuel Setting ................................................. 207 Protection .............................................. 37
Address book Suspension .......................................... 205 Reduced protection ............................... 39
see Contacts Air conditioning system Side impact airbag ................................. 37
see Climate control Window airbag ....................................... 37
Adjusting the balance/fader
Burmester® high-end 3D surround Air distribution ......................................... 141 Airbags
sound system ...................................... 361 see Occupant safety
Air freshener system
Burmester® surround sound system .... 361 see Fragrance system Airflow ...................................................... 141
Adjusting the headlamp range ............... 124 Air suspension AIRPANEL (Care) ...................................... 374
Adjusting the sound focus see AIR BODY CONTROL Alarm
Burmester® surround sound system .... 361 Air vents ................................................... 151 see Panic alarm
Adjusting the sound optimisation Adjusting (front) ................................... 151 Alarm system
Burmester® high-end 3D surround Adjusting (rear) .................................... 151 see Anti-theft protection
sound system ...................................... 362 Glove box ............................................. 151 Alternative route
Adjusting treble, mid and bass Air vents see Route
Burmester® high-end 3D surround see Air vents Ambient lighting ...................................... 130
sound system ...................................... 361 Air-recirculation mode ............................ 144 Android Auto ............................................ 328
ADS PLUS damping system Airbag Connecting a mobile phone ................. 328
see AIR BODY CONTROL Activation .............................................. 31 Ending ................................................. 328
Adverse weather light ............................. 128 Belt airbag ............................................. 35 Overview ............................................. 328
Front airbag ........................................... 37 Tone settings ....................................... 328
After-sales service centre Installation locations ............................. 37
see ASSYST PLUS Android Auto™
Knee airbag ........................................... 37 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 329
512 Index

Animals Assistance graphic Connecting USB devices ...................... 341

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 248 Copyright ............................................. 338
Anti-lock braking system Assistance systems Information .......................................... 337
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) see Driving safety system Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 338
Media search ....................................... 344
Anti-theft alarm system ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 363 Overview ............................................. 340
Anti-theft protection .............................. 87 Battery disconnection periods ............. 364 Pause and playback function ............... 341
Anti-theft protection ................................. 87 Displaying the service due date ........... 363 Selecting a track .................................. 341
Additional door lock .............................. 68 Function/notes ................................... 363 Selecting playback options .................. 341
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ................ 87 Regular service work ........................... 363 Track list .............................................. 341
Immobiliser ............................................ 87 Special service requirements .............. 363
Authorised workshop
Interior protection ................................. 89 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see Qualified specialist workshop
Stopping the alarm (ATA) ....................... 88 Function ................................................ 87
Tow-away protection ............................. 88 Stopping the alarm ................................ 88 Automatic distance control
see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Anticipatory occupant protection ..... 44, 45 ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
see Anti-theft protection Automatic driving lights ......................... 124
Apple CarPlay™ ....................................... 326
ATTENTION ASSIST ......................... 228, 229 Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Connecting an iPhone® ....................... 327
Ending ................................................. 327 Activating/deactivating ....................... 229 stop function) .......................................... 158
Overview ............................................. 326 Function .............................................. 228 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
Tone settings ....................................... 327 System limitations ............................... 228 stop function) .......................................... 158
Transferred vehicle data ...................... 329 Attention assistant Automatic front passenger airbag
Ashtray see ATTENTION ASSIST shutoff
Front centre console ............................ 117 Audio mode see Front passenger airbag shutoff
Rear ..................................................... 117 Activating media mode ........................ 338
 Index 513

Automatic mirror folding function B Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating ....................... 139 see Active Blind Spot Assist
Ball neck
Automatic transmission Extending/retracting ........................... 238 Blower
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 162 see Climate control
Drive program display .......................... 161 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 181
BlueTEC
Drive programs .................................... 160 Battery
see AdBlue®
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 160 Key ........................................................ 66
Engaging drive position ....................... 164 Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 149 Bluetooth®
Engaging reverse gear ......................... 164 Battery (vehicle) Activating/deactivating ....................... 278
Kickdown ............................................. 165 Charging .............................................. 389 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 330
Manual gearshifting ............................. 165 Notes ................................................... 387 Settings ............................................... 277
Selecting park position ........................ 164 Starting assistance .............................. 389 Switching profile (DUN/PAN) .............. 332
Shifting to neutral ................................ 164 Bluetooth® Audio
Battery (vehicle)
Steering wheel gearshift paddles ......... 165 Activating ............................................ 349
Transmission position display .............. 162 see Vehicle battery
De-authorising (de-registering) the
Transmission positions ........................ 162 Belt ............................................................. 32 device .................................................. 349
Automatic transmission Belt airbag Information .......................................... 346
see Selector lever Activation .............................................. 31 Overview ............................................. 347
Axle load Function/notes ..................................... 35 Searching for and authorising the
Permissible .......................................... 423 Bicycle rack device .................................................. 348
Trailer operation .................................. 436 Trailer operation ................................... 241 Switching device via NFC .................... 349
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 232 Boot box
Activating/deactivating ....................... 234 see EASY-PACK boot box
Function/notes ................................... 232
System limits ....................................... 232
514 Index

Boot lid ....................................................... 73 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐ Burmester® high-end 3D surround
Activating/deactivating the boot lid tion) ..................................................... 184 sound system
opening limiter ...................................... 78 HOLD function ..................................... 203 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 361
Closing ................................................... 74 Limited braking effect (salt-treated Adjusting the sound optimisation ........ 362
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 76 roads) .................................................. 156 Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 361
Locked separately ................................. 77 New/replaced brake linings/brake Calling up the sound menu .................. 361
Opening ................................................. 73 discs .................................................... 156 Information .......................................... 361
Opening dimensions ............................ 433 Running-in notes .................................. 156 Setting the sound profile ..................... 362
Boot lid Brakes Burmester® surround sound system ..... 360
see Boot lid see Active Brake Assist Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 361
see Locking/unlocking Braking assistance Adjusting the sound focus ................... 361
Boot load .................................................. 434 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 361
Brake Assist System Breakdown ............................................... 381 Calling up the sound menu .................. 360
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Assistance overview .............................. 18 Information .......................................... 360
Tow-starting ........................................ 397 Switching the surround sound on/off
Brake fluid ............................................................. 361
Notes ................................................... 431 Towing away ........................................ 393
Transporting the vehicle ...................... 395 Buttons
Brake force distribution Wheel change ...................................... 414 Steering wheel ..................................... 245
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 184 Breakdown assistance call
see Service call C
Brakes CA module (TV) ........................................ 360
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 180 Breakdown management
see Service call Calling up a menu ................................ 360
Adaptive brake lights ........................... 190 Inserting .............................................. 359
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................... 181
Driving tips .......................................... 156
 Index 515

Call list Care ........................................................... 376 Changing bulbs ........................................ 131

Making a call ........................................ 314 AIRPANEL ............................................ 374 Dipped beam ....................................... 132
Options in the call list .......................... 314 Car wash .............................................. 371 Fitting/removing cover (front wheel
Overview .............................................. 314 Carpet .................................................. 376 arch) .................................................... 132
Calling up the sound menu Display ................................................. 376 Main beam ........................................... 132
Burmester® high-end 3D surround EASY-PACK boot box ............................ 376 Notes ................................................... 131
sound system ...................................... 361 Exterior lighting ................................... 374 Opening/closing the side trim pan‐
Burmester® surround sound system ... 360 Genuine wood/trim elements .............. 376 els ....................................................... 133
High-pressure cleaner .......................... 371 Overview .............................................. 131
Calls .......................................................... 311 Matt finish ........................................... 373 Reversing light ..................................... 133
Accepting ............................................. 311 Paint .................................................... 373 Turn signal light (front) ........................ 132
Activating functions during a call ......... 311 Plastic trim .......................................... 376 Turn signal light (rear) .......................... 133
Calls with several participants ............. 311 Reversing camera/360° Camera ........ 374 Changing hub caps .................................. 414
Declining .............................................. 311 Roof lining ............................................ 376
Ending a call ......................................... 311 Seat belt .............................................. 376 Channel tracking
Incoming call during an existing call .... 312 Seat cover ........................................... 376 Setting ................................................. 352
Making ................................................. 311 Sensors ............................................... 374 Charging
Via the overhead control panel Tailpipes ............................................... 374 Battery (vehicle) .................................. 389
(Mercedes me connect) ....................... 317 Trailer hitch .......................................... 374 Child safety lock
Camera Washing by hand ................................. 372 Rear door ............................................... 61
see 360° Camera Wheels/rims ........................................ 374 Rear side windows ................................. 63
see Reversing camera Windows .............................................. 374
Child seat ................................................... 45
Car wash Wiper blades ........................................ 374
Attaching (notes) ................................... 52
see Care Carpet (Care) ............................................ 376 Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 50
Car wash (care) ........................................ 371
516 Index

Front passenger seat (rearward- Cleaning Residual heat ....................................... 144

facing/forward-facing) .......................... 52 see Care Setting the air distribution ................... 141
Front passenger seat (without airbag Climate control ........................................ 141 Setting the airflow ............................... 141
shutoff) .................................................. 51 Activating/deactivating the A/C Setting the climate style ...................... 143
ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 48 function (control panel) ....................... 143 Setting the fragrance system ............... 145
ISOFIX/i-Size (notes) ............................. 47 Activating/deactivating the A/C Setting the temperature ....................... 141
Notes ..................................................... 45 function (multimedia system) .............. 143 Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 146
Recommended child restraint sys‐ Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ Switching on/off ................................. 142
tems ...................................................... 59 nisation function (control panel) .......... 144 Switching the rear window heater
Seats suitable for belt-secured child Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ on/off .................................................. 141
restraint systems ................................... 53 nisation function (multimedia sys‐ THERMATIC control panel .................... 141
Seats suitable for i‑Size child tem) ..................................................... 144 THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 141
restraint systems ................................... 58 Adjusting the air vents ......................... 151 Windscreen heater .............................. 146
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child Air distribution settings ....................... 143 Climate style
restraint systems ................................... 56 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 144 Function .............................................. 143
Top Tether .............................................. 49 Automatic control ................................ 143 Setting ................................................. 143
Children Climate style function .......................... 143 Cockpit ......................................................... 6
Restraint systems .................................. 45 Demisting the windows ....................... 144 Overview ................................................. 6
Chock Demisting the windscreen ................... 141
Glove box air vent ................................ 151 COMAND Online
Storage location ................................... 413 see Multimedia system
Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐
Chock grance system) .................................... 145 COMAND Touch ....................................... 281
see Wheel chock ionisation ............................................. 145 Authorising a device ............................ 280
Cigarette lighter ....................................... 118 Rear air vents ....................................... 151 Child safety lock .................................. 281
City lighting .............................................. 128 Rear operating unit .............................. 141
 Index 517

COMAND Touch App Coolant (engine) Cup holder

see COMAND Touch Level check ......................................... 369 see Cup holders
Combination switch Notes .................................................. 432 Cup holders .............................................. 115
see Turn signal light Cooling Fitting/removing (centre console) ....... 115
Compass .................................................. 306 see Climate control Rear ..................................................... 116
Computer ................................................. 246 Copyright ................................................... 28
D
Connection status Cornering light function .......................... 127
Dashboard
Displays ............................................... 333 Cover .......................................................... 78 see Cockpit
Overview ............................................. 333 Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 227 Dashboard lighting .................................. 248
Contacts ................................................... 312 Crosswind Assist
Calling up ............................................. 312 Data acquisition
Function/notes ................................... 184 Vehicle ................................................... 27
Deleting ............................................... 314
Downloading (from mobile phone) ....... 312 Cruise control .......................................... 190 Data import/export
Importing ............................................. 313 Activating ............................................. 191 Function/notes ................................... 281
Information .......................................... 312 Calling up a speed ............................... 191 Importing/exporting ............................ 281
Making a call ........................................ 313 Deactivating ......................................... 191 PIN protection for data export ............. 282
Name format ........................................ 313 Function .............................................. 190
Lever .................................................... 191 Data roaming
Options ................................................ 313 Activating/deactivating (telephone
Saving .................................................. 313 Requirements ...................................... 191
Selecting .............................................. 191 module) ............................................... 324
Controller Setting a speed .................................... 191 Declaration of Conformity
Operating ............................................ 270 Storing a speed .................................... 191 Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 24
Convenience closing ................................. 81 System limits ....................................... 190 Jack ....................................................... 24
Convenience opening ................................ 80 TIREFIT kit ............................................. 25
518 Index

Wireless vehicle components ................ 24 Digital TV Display message ..................................... 437

Designs see TV Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 437
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 255 Dipped beam Notes ................................................... 437
Destination .............................................. 297 Activating/deactivating ....................... 123 Display messages
Editing ................................................. 289 Changing bulbs .................................... 132 ? ................................................... 464
Editing the last destinations ................ 297 Setting ................................................. 129 C ................................................... 489
Entering an intermediate destination .. 289 Setting for abroad (symmetrical) ......... 123
M ................................................... 489
Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 297 DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 162
Saving as global favourite .................... 297 Function .............................................. 162 N ................................................... 490
Storing a map position ........................ 297 DIRECT SELECT selector lever ¯ .................................................... 461
Destination entry ............................ 285, 287 Engaging drive position ....................... 164 Active Blind Spot Assist currently
Entering a POI or address .................... 285 Engaging park position automatically .. 164 unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 459
Entering geo-coordinates .................... 288 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 164 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 459
Last destinations ................................. 288 Selecting park position ........................ 164
Selecting a contact ............................. 288 Shifting to neutral ................................ 164 Active Blind Spot Assist not available
Selecting a POI .................................... 287 Display when towing a trailer See Owner's
Selecting from the map ....................... 288 Care ..................................................... 376 Manual ................................................ 463
Destination entry Display (multimedia system) Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐
see Intermediate destination Settings ............................................... 276 er's Manual ......................................... 488
Diagnostics connection ............................ 26 Display (on-board computer) .................. 247 Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐
Diesel ....................................................... 428 Display content rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 448
Digital Owner's Manual ............................ 20 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 254 Active Brake Assist Functions limited
Digital speedometer ................................ 249 See Owner's Manual ........................... 448
 Index 519

Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera Apply brake to deselect Park (P) 4Check eng. oil lev. when next
view restricted See Owner's Manual ... 458 position ............................................... 481 refuelling ............................................. 467
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently ÀATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ... 454 jCheck trailer hitch lock ............... 481
unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 457 ÀATTENTION ASSIST: Take a hCheck tyre(s) ............................... 474
Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ break! .................................................. 454 !Clean the fuel filter ...................... 472
tive ...................................................... 457 bAUTO lights inoperative ............... 492 Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away
bActive Light System inoperative .. 491 Auxiliary battery malfunction .............. 484 for XX:XX mins .................................... 484
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cam‐ _Before starting the engine, turn ÉCompressor is cooling ................. 457
era view restricted See Owner's the steering wheel. .............................. 485 ?Coolant Stop vehicle Switch
Manual ................................................ 493 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ engine off ............................................ 465
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 459 Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐
rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 459 tive ....................................................... 461
ual ....................................................... 493 Blind Spot Assist not available when Cruise control inoperative ................... 463
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐ towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 462 Cruise control off ................................. 461
erative ................................................. 492 Brake immediately ............................... 447 !currently unavailable See Own‐
4Add 1 litre engine oil when next ÂChange key batteries ................... 478 er's Manual ......................................... 438
refuelling ............................................. 469 ØCheck AdBlue See Owner’s ÷currently unavailable See Own‐
Air conditioning Malfunction See Manual ................................................ 470 er's Manual ......................................... 440
Owner's Manual .................................. 485 JCheck brake fluid level ................ 447 Depress clutch fully to start engine ..... 484
Distance Pilot available again .............. 460
520 Index

Distance Pilot currently unavailable Example: Parking Pilot Parking can‐ ÂKey not detected (white display
See Owner's Manual ........................... 460 celled ................................................. 460 message) ............................................. 478
Distance Pilot inoperative .................... 460 _Example: Rear left seat back‐ Let fresh air into the vehicle interior!
È .................................................... 462 rest not locked ................................... 490 Air conditioning malf. Visit workshop .. 486
ØEng. start not possible in XXX Front-passenger airbag disabled See Limiter inoperative ............................... 461
mi ........................................................ 471 Owner's Manual .................................. 452 Limiter passive ..................................... 461
ØEng. start not possible ................. 471 Front-passenger airbag enabled See bMalfunction See Owner's Man‐
5Engine oil level cannot be Owner's Manual .................................. 453 ual ....................................................... 492
measured ............................................ 470 !inoperative See Owner's Man‐ ÉMalfunction See Owner's Man‐
4Engine oil level Reduce oil level ... 468 ual ....................................................... 439 ual ....................................................... 455
4Engine oil level Stop vehicle ÷inoperative See Owner's Man‐ ðMaximum speed exceeded .......... 462
Switch engine off ................................ 468 ual ....................................................... 441 N permanently active Risk of vehicle
4Engine oil pressure Stop Switch Tinoperative See Owner's Man‐ rolling .................................................. 482
off engine ............................................ 469 ual ....................................................... 442 ëOff ............................................... 460
6Example: Front left malfunction GInoperative .................................. 452 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is
Consult workshop ............................... 451 bIntelligent Light System inoper‐ stationary ............................................ 482
bExample: Left dipped beam ........ 491 ative ..................................................... 491 !Parking brake See Owner's
6Example: Left windowbag mal‐ ÂKey not detected (red display Manual ................................................ 444
function Consult workshop ................. 451 message) ............................................. 479 Parking Pilot and PARKTRONIC inop‐
erative See Owner's Manual ................ 463
 Index 521

Parking Pilot Manoeuvring assis‐ ,Replace key See Owner's Man‐ ÐSteering malfunction Stop
tance limited See Owner's Manual ...... 463 ual ....................................................... 478 immediately See Owner's Manual ....... 487
ÂPlace the key in the marked ÂReplace key ................................. 477 Steering Pilot currently unavailable
space See Owner's Manual ................. 479 8Reserve fuel level ........................ 471 See Owner's Manual ............................ 461
ÉPlease reduce speed ................... 456 6Restraint sys. malfunction Con‐ Steering Pilot inoperative ..................... 461
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative sult workshop ...................................... 450 Stop vehicle Leave engine running
See Owner's Manual ........................... 449 Reversing not poss. Consult work‐ Wait Transmission cooling ................... 483
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's shop .................................................... 483 #Stop vehicle Leave engine run‐
Manual ................................................ 448 Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door ning ..................................................... 467
Radar sensors dirty See Owner's open and transmission not in P ........... 482 #Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐
Manual ................................................ 449 #See Owner's Manual ................... 466 ual ....................................................... 466
hRectify tyre pressure .................... 474 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX mph ..... 462 ÉStop vehicle Vehicle too low ........ 456
ØRefill AdBlue Eng. start not pos‐ #Start engine See Owner's Man‐ bSwitch off lights .......................... 492
sible ..................................................... 470 ual ....................................................... 472 bSwitch on headlamps .................. 492
ØRefill AdBlue No start in XXX mi .. 472 ÐSteering malfunction Drive To shift out of P or N, depress brake
ØRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Man‐ carefully Visit workshop ...................... 486 and start engine .................................. 482
ual ....................................................... 470 ÐSteering malfunction Increased Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual ... 464
!Release parking brake ................. 443 physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 487 ¥Top up washer fluid ..................... 490
¸Replace air cleaner ...................... 471 ÐSteering malfunction See Own‐ Traffic Sign Assist Camera view
er's Manual ......................................... 485 restricted See Owner's Manual ........... 458
522 Index

Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ hWheel sensor(s) missing .............. 476 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 72
ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 462 Without changing gear, consult work‐ Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 68
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative ............. 462 shop .................................................... 482 Door
see Locking/unlocking
jTrailer coupling extending… ......... 480 Distance control
Door control panel ..................................... 16
Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 483 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Drive Away Assist .................................... 226
!Turn on the ignition to release Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ....................... 193
Activating ............................................ 196 DRIVE PILOT ............................................. 200
the parking brake ................................ 442
Activation conditions ........................... 196 Function .............................................. 200
Tyre press. monitor currently unavail‐ Calling up a speed ............................... 196 Drive position
able ..................................................... 475 Deactivating ........................................ 196 Selecting ............................................. 164
Tyre press. monitor inoperative ............ 476 Function .............................................. 193 Drive program display ............................. 161
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No Lever ................................................... 196
Selecting ............................................. 196 Drive programs
wheel sensors ...................................... 476 Setting a speed ................................... 196 see DYNAMIC SELECT
Tyre pressure Check tyres ................... 473 Storing a speed ................................... 196 Driver's seat
Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 476 System limits ....................................... 193 see Seat
Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed ........ 477 Distance recorder .................................... 249 Driving abroad
dVehicle is operational Switch DISTRONIC Symmetrical dipped beam ................... 123
off the ignition before exiting .............. 483 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Driving light
Door see Automatic driving lights
ÉVehicle rising Please wait ............ 454
Additional door lock .............................. 68 Driving safety system ............................. 179
ÉVehicle rising ............................... 454 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 180
hWarning tyre defect ..................... 475 Opening (from inside) ............................ 68 Active Brake Assist .............................. 185
 Index 523

Adaptive brake lights ........................... 190 see DRIVE PILOT Dynamic multicontour seat
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................... 181 see Driving safety system Setting ................................................... 97
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐ see HOLD function DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 160
tion) ..................................................... 184 see Limiter Configuring drive program I ................. 161
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Displaying engine data ......................... 161
Crosswind Assist ................................. 184 see Parking Pilot Displaying vehicle data ........................ 161
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) see Remote Parking Pilot Drive program display .......................... 161
trailer stabilisation ............................... 184 see Reversing camera Drive programs .................................... 160
Overview ............................................. 180 see Speed Limit Pilot Function .............................................. 160
Radar sensors ...................................... 179 see Steering Pilot Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) .. 161
Responsibility ...................................... 179 see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving safety system Driving tips E
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped E10 ............................................................ 426
beam) .................................................. 123
Driving system General driving tips ............................. 156 Easy entry feature
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 205 Running-in notes .................................. 156 Operation/notes ................................. 103
Driving system Setting ................................................. 103
Drowsiness detection
see 360° Camera see ATTENTION ASSIST Easy exit feature
see Active Blind Spot Assist Operation/notes ................................. 103
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Drowsiness warning Setting ................................................. 103
see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST
EASY-PACK boot box ................................ 113
see ATTENTION ASSIST DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
Adjusting the height to any position ..... 111
see Blind Spot Assist Suspension .......................................... 205 Care ..................................................... 376
see Cruise control Dynamic handling control system Installing/removing .............................. 113
see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
524 Index

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐ Electronic Stability Program Removing ............................................ 420
tion) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency spare wheel
Function/notes ................................... 184 Electronics ............................................... 421 see Spare wheel
ECO display Emergency see Wheel change
Function .............................................. 159 Assistance overview .............................. 18 Energy consumption
Resetting ............................................. 250 Fire extinguisher .................................. 381 Key ........................................................ 65
ECO start/stop function ................. 158, 159 First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 380 Engine
Automatic engine start ........................ 158 Removing the warning triangle ............ 380 ECO start/stop function ...................... 158
Automatic engine stop ......................... 158 Safety vest ........................................... 379 Engine number .................................... 423
Operation ............................................ 158 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 380 Starting (emergency operation
Switching off/on ................................. 159 Emergency braking ................................. 178 mode) .................................................. 155
Electric parking brake ............. 176, 177, 178 Emergency call system Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 154
Applying automatically ......................... 176 see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Starting (start/stop button) ................. 154
Applying or releasing manually ............ 178 Starting assistance .............................. 389
Emergency braking .............................. 178 Emergency engine start .......................... 397 Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 172
Releasing automatically ....................... 177 Emergency key Engine bonnet
Electric parking brake Locking a door ....................................... 72 Function (active bonnet) ...................... 364
see Parking Unlocking a door ................................... 72 Opening/closing ................................. 365
Electrical fuses Emergency key element Resetting (active bonnet) ..................... 364
see Fuses Inserting/removing ............................... 66 Engine data
Electromagnetic compatibility Emergency operation mode Displaying ............................................ 161
Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24 Starting vehicle ................................... 155 Engine electronics
Emergency spare wheel Notes ................................................... 421
Notes ................................................... 419
 Index 525

Engine number ........................................ 423 Exterior lighting First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 380
Engine oil ................................................. 368 Care ..................................................... 374 Flacon
Additives ............................................. 430 Exterior lighting Inserting/removing ............................. 145
Checking the oil level using the oil see Lights Flat tyre
dipstick ................................................ 367 MOExtended tyres ............................... 381
Checking the oil level using the on- F Notes ................................................... 381
board computer ................................... 367 Fatigue warning TIREFIT kit ........................................... 383
Filling capacity ..................................... 431 see ATTENTION ASSIST Wheel change ...................................... 414
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 431
Topping up ........................................... 368 Fault message Flat tyre
see Display message see Breakdown
Entering characters
Function/notes .................................... 274 Favourites Floor mat .................................................. 122
On the touchpad .................................. 275 Adding ................................................. 272 Fog light (extended range) ...................... 127
Using the controller ............................. 275 Calling up ............................................ 272
Deleting ............................................... 273 Fragrance
ERA-GLONASS test mode Moving ................................................. 273 see Fragrance system
Starting/ending .................................. 322 Overview ............................................. 272 Fragrance system .................................... 145
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Renaming ............................................ 273 Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 145
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Filling station search Setting ................................................. 145
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ....... 181 Starting an automatic filling station Frequencies
Crosswind Assist ................................. 184 search ................................................. 290 Mobile phone ...................................... 422
Function/notes .................................... 181 Switching the automatic filling sta‐ Two-way radio ...................................... 422
Switching on/off ................................. 184 tion search on/off ............................... 293 Frequency band
Trailer stabilisation .............................. 184 Fire extinguisher ..................................... 381 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 252
EU type approval number ....................... 423
526 Index

Front airbag ............................................... 37 Sulphur content ................................... 426 Resolving problems .............................. 174
Front passenger airbag shutoff ............... 39 Tank capacity ...................................... 429 Synchronising the rolling code ............. 174
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 41 Fuel consumption Gearshift paddles
Points to remember when the front On-board computer ............................. 249 see Steering wheel gearshift paddles
passenger seat is occupied ................... 39 Function seat Gearshift recommendation ............ 162, 165
Status display ........................................ 41 see Door control panel
System self-test ..................................... 41 Genuine parts ............................................ 22
Fuse insert Genuine wood (Care) ............................... 376
Front passenger airbag shutoff see Fuses
see Occupant safety Glide mode ............................................... 166
Fuses ........................................................ 398
Front passenger seat Assignment diagram ............................ 398 Glove box
Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 94 Before changing .................................. 398 Air vent ................................................ 151
Front passenger seat Fuse box in the boot ............................ 400 Locking/unlocking .............................. 106
see Seat Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 399 Gross mass .............................................. 423
Fuel ........................................................... 427 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
Additives ............................................. 427 well ...................................................... 400 H
Consumption ....................................... 429 Fuse box on the dashboard ................. 400 Handbrake
Diesel .................................................. 428 Notes .................................................. 398 see Electric parking brake
E10 ...................................................... 426 Handling characteristics (unusual) ........ 401
Low outside temperatures ................... 428 G
Petrol ................................................... 426 Garage door opener HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 76
Quality (diesel) .................................... 428 Clearing the memory ........................... 175 HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Quality (petrol) .................................... 426 Opening or closing the garage door ..... 175 see Opening the boot lid using your foot
Refuelling ............................................ 166 Programming buttons .......................... 173 Hands-free system .................................... 69
Reserve fuel level ................................ 429 Radio equipment approval number ...... 176
 Index 527

Hazard warning lights ............................. 126 Heating Implied warranty

HD programmes see Climate control Vehicle ................................................... 27
see CA module (TV) High-pressure cleaner (care) .................. 371 Inattentiveness assistant
Head restraint ........................................... 95 Hill start assist ........................................ 203 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Front (adjusting manually) ..................... 95 HOLD function ......................................... 203 Indicator lamp
Front (luxury head restraint) .................. 96 Activating/deactivating ....................... 203 see Warning/indicator lamps
Rear (adjusting) ..................................... 97 Function/notes ................................... 203 Individual drive program
Rear (removing/fitting) .......................... 97 Configuring .......................................... 161
Head-up display I Selecting .............................................. 161
Adjusting brightness (on-board com‐ i-Size child seat attachment Information
puter) .................................................. 254 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 58 Burmester® high-end 3D surround
Adjusting display elements (on-board sound system ...................................... 361
computer) ............................................ 254 i-Size child seat securing system
Function .............................................. 255 Fitting .................................................... 48 Instrument cluster .................................. 493
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 254 Notes ..................................................... 47 Instrument cluster
Setting the position (on-board com‐ Identification plate see Instrument display
puter) .................................................. 254 Engine ................................................. 423 Instrument display .................................. 244
Switching on/off ................................. 256 Vehicle ................................................ 423 Adjusting the lighting ........................... 248
Using the memory function ................. 104 Ignition Function/notes ................................... 244
Head-up display Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 153 Overview (standard) .............................. 10
see Menu (on-board computer) Ignition key ................................................ 64 Overview (widescreen) .......................... 10
Head-up display menu Warning/indicator lamps .................... 493
Immobiliser ................................................ 87
see On-board computer Instrument display
Headlamp flashing .................................. 125 see Display (on-board computer)
528 Index

see Instrument cluster Intermediate destination ........................ 289 Via Wi-Fi .............................................. 330
Instrument lighting ................................. 248 Calculating a route with intermediate Internet radio
destinations ........................................ 289 Calling up ............................................ 335
Instrument lighting Editing ................................................. 289
see Dashboard lighting Deleting stations ................................. 336
Entering ............................................... 289 Logging in ............................................ 337
Intelligent Light System .......................... 126 Starting an automatic filling station Logging out ......................................... 337
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 128 search ................................................. 290 Overview ............................................. 336
Adverse weather light .......................... 128 Internet Saving stations .................................... 336
City lighting ......................................... 128 Deleting favourites .............................. 335 Selecting and connecting to a station
Cornering light ..................................... 127 Deleting history ................................... 335 ............................................................. 336
Fog light (extended range) ................... 127 Setting favourites ................................ 335 Selecting stream ................................. 337
Motorway mode ................................... 127 Setting options .................................... 337
Overview ............................................. 126 Internet connection
Cancelling permission ......................... 332 Terms of use ........................................ 337
Switching on/off ................................. 128
Connection status ............................... 333 Ionisation ................................................. 145
Interior lighting ........................................ 130 Displaying the connection status ........ 333
Ambient lighting .................................. 130 iPhone®
Editing the access data ....................... 332 see Apple CarPlay™
Setting ................................................. 130 Establishing ......................................... 332
Switch-off delay time ........................... 131 Mobile phone details ........................... 332 ISOFIX child seat attachment
Interior lighting Restrictions ......................................... 329 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 56
see Interior lighting Setting access data ............................. 330 ISOFIX child seat securing system
see Lighting Setting up ............................................ 330 Fitting .................................................... 48
see Lights Switching Bluetooth® profile (DUN/ Notes ..................................................... 47
Interior protection PAN) .................................................... 332
Function ................................................ 89 Via Bluetooth® ..................................... 330
Switching on/off ................................... 89 Via communication module ................. 330
 Index 529

J Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 70 Level control system

Kickdown ................................................. 165 see AIR BODY CONTROL
Jack
Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24 Using ................................................... 165 Light switch
Storage location ................................... 413 Knee airbag ................................................ 37 Overview ............................................. 123
Jump-start connection ............................ 389 Lighting .................................................... 130
L Lighting
K Laden ........................................................ 110 see Lights
Key .............................................................. 64 Roof rack ............................................. 114 Lights ................................................ 123, 130
Battery .................................................. 66 Stowage space under the boot floor .... 113 Active light function ............................. 126
Emergency key element ........................ 66 Tie-down eyes ...................................... 110 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 128
Energy consumption .............................. 65 Lamp Adjusting the instrument lighting ......... 248
Key ring attachment .............................. 66 see Interior lighting Adverse weather light .......................... 128
Overview ............................................... 64 Lamp (instrument display) Automatic driving lights ....................... 124
Panic alarm ........................................... 65 see Warning/indicator lamps Changing bulbs .................................... 131
Problem ................................................. 67 City lighting ......................................... 128
Unlocking setting .................................. 65 Lane Keeping Assist Combination switch ............................. 125
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Cornering light function ....................... 127
Key
see Ignition key Language Dipped beam ....................................... 123
see Locking Notes ................................................... 281 Driving abroad ..................................... 123
see Vehicle key Setting ................................................. 281 Fog light (extended range) ................... 127
Last destinations Hazard warning lights .......................... 126
KEYLESS-GO Headlamp flashing ............................... 125
Locking the vehicle ................................ 70 Selecting ............................................. 288
Headlamp range .................................. 124
Problem ................................................. 71 LED light Intelligent Light System ....................... 126
Unlocking setting .................................. 65 see Intelligent Light System
530 Index

Light switch ......................................... 123 LINGUATRONIC ........................................ 257 Loading guidelines .................................. 105
Main beam ........................................... 125 Application-specific command ............ 258 Loads
Motorway mode ................................... 127 Audible help functions ......................... 259 Securing .............................................. 105
Parking lights ....................................... 123 Command types .................................. 258
Rear fog light ....................................... 124 Entering numbers ................................ 258 Locking ....................................................... 64
Responsibility for lighting systems ....... 123 Global command ................................. 258 Locking/unlocking ........................ 68, 69, 73
Setting the dipped beam ..................... 129 Improving speech quality .................... 259 Lowering
Setting the surround lighting ............... 130 Language setting ................................. 259 Vehicle ................................................. 418
Standing lights ..................................... 123 Media player commands ..................... 265
Turn signal light ................................... 125 Lubricant additives
Message commands ........................... 265
Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐ see Additives
Limiter ...................................................... 190
ing) ...................................................... 257 Luggage
Activating ............................................. 191
Calling up a speed ............................... 191 Navigation commands ......................... 261 Securing .............................................. 105
Deactivating ......................................... 191 Operable functions .............................. 258 Lumbar support
Function .............................................. 190 Operating safety .................................. 257 see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lever .................................................... 191 Radio commands ................................. 264 Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 95
Passive mode ...................................... 190 Switch commands ............................... 259
Permanent setting ............................... 193 Telephone commands ......................... 263 M
Requirements ...................................... 191 Text message commands .................... 265
TV commands ..................................... 264 Main beam
Selecting .............................................. 191
Setting a speed .................................... 191 Vehicle commands .............................. 266 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 128
Storing a speed .................................... 191 Voice prompting .................................. 258 Changing bulbs .................................... 132
System limits ....................................... 190 Live Traffic Information Switching on/off ................................. 125
Limiting speed Displaying subscription information .... 299 Maintenance
see Limiter Registering on Mercedes me ............... 299 see ASSYST PLUS
 Index 531

Malfunction Updating ............................................. 305 Media mode

Restraint system .................................... 31 Map and compass Activating ............................................ 338
Manual transmission Overview .............................................. 301 Media playback
Operating the gearshift lever ............... 161 Massage programmes Operating (on-board computer) ........... 252
Map ........................................... 299, 301, 302 Overview ............................................... 98 Media search
Avoiding (changing) an area ................ 304 Selecting the front seats ....................... 99 Starting ............................................... 344
Avoiding an area .................................. 304 Massage settings Media source
Avoiding an area (deleting) .................. 305 Resetting ............................................... 99 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 252
Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 304
Displaying Qibla .................................. 306 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 373 Memory function
Displaying the compass ....................... 306 Maximum speed Head-up Display — Calling up saved
Displaying the map version ................. 304 see Limiter settings ............................................... 104
Displaying the next intersecting Head-up Display — Saving settings ...... 104
MB Info call Operating ............................................ 104
street ................................................... 303 see Service call
Displaying the satellite map ................ 306 Outside mirror — Calling up saved
Mecca ....................................................... 306 settings ............................................... 104
Displaying the traffic map ................... 299
Displaying traffic signs ........................ 303 Media Outside mirror — Saving settings ......... 104
Displaying weather information ........... 306 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 252 Seat — Calling up saved settings ......... 104
Map data ............................................. 305 Searching ............................................ 344 Seat — Saving settings ......................... 104
Moving ................................................ 302 Steering wheel — Calling up saved
Media display
Overview .............................................. 301 settings ............................................... 104
Notes .................................................. 268 Steering wheel — Saving settings ......... 104
Selecting POI symbols ......................... 303 Media Interface
Selecting text information ................... 303 Menu (on-board computer) .................... 254
Information .......................................... 344
Selecting the map orientation ............. 302 Assistance graphic .............................. 248
Overview ............................................. 346
Setting the map scale .......................... 302 Content ............................................... 254
Switching on ....................................... 345
532 Index

Designs ............................................... 255 Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐ Starting the vehicle ............................. 154
Media .................................................. 252 tem ............................................................ 319 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 422
Navigation ........................................... 250 Automatic emergency call ................... 320 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69
Overview ............................................. 246 Manual emergency call ........................ 321 Wireless charging ................................ 121
Radio ................................................... 252 Notes ................................................... 319 Mobile phone
Service ................................................ 248 Overview .............................................. 319 see Hands-free system
Telephone ............................................ 253 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test see Locking/unlocking
Trip ...................................................... 249 mode ................................................... 322 see Mobile phone
Mercedes me connect Transmitted data .................................. 321 see Telephone
Accident management ......................... 318 Mercedes-Benz service centre Mobile phone voice recognition
Breakdown assistance call ................... 318 see Qualified specialist workshop Starting ................................................ 311
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Message (multifunction display) Stopping ............................................... 311
Centre using the multimedia system .... 317 see Display message
Consenting to the transfer of data ....... 319 Model type ............................................... 423
Making a call via the overhead con‐ Message memory .................................... 437 MOExtended tyres ................................... 381
trol panel ............................................. 317 Messages Motorway mode ....................................... 127
MB Info call .......................................... 318 see Text messages
Notes ................................................... 316 MULTIBEAM LED
Mirrors see Intelligent Light System
Service message .................................. 318 see Outside mirrors
Transmitted data .................................. 319 Multifunction display (on-board com‐
Mobile phone ................................... 253, 422 puter) ........................................................ 247
Mercedes-Benz Apps Authorising (Remote Parking Pilot) ...... 226
Calling up ............................................ 333 Cancelling permission for Internet Multifunction steering wheel
Using voice control .............................. 333 connection .......................................... 332 Overview of buttons ............................ 245
Frequencies ......................................... 422 Multifunction steering wheel
Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 see Steering wheel
 Index 533

Multimedia system .......................... 268, 276 see Route Noise

Activating/deactivating standby see Route guidance Wheels and tyres ................................. 401
mode ................................................... 179 see Traffic information
Adjusting the volume ........................... 274 Navigation announcements ................... 295 O
Calling up lists and menus ................... 271 Activating/deactivating ....................... 295 Occupant safety .......... 30, 32, 37, 39, 44, 45
Central controls .................................. 269 Adjusting the volume ........................... 295 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Configuring display settings ................. 276 Repeating ............................................ 296
Main functions ..................................... 271 Occupant safety
Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 295 see Child seat
Overview ............................................. 268 Switching on/off during a phone call .. 295
Restoring the factory settings ............. 284 Odometer
Switching the sound on/off ................. 273 Navigation messages see Total distance recorder
On-board computer ............................. 250
Oil
N Near Field Communication see Engine oil
Navigation Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 154
On-board computer ................................. 254
Activating ............................................ 284 Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 309 Assistance graphic menu .................... 248
Calling up the Digital Owner's Man‐ Connecting the mobile phone to the Displaying the service due date ........... 363
ual ....................................................... 306 multimedia system .............................. 309 Media menu ........................................ 252
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) ............... 261 Switching Bluetooth® audio equip‐ Menu content ...................................... 254
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 250 ment .................................................... 349 Menu designs ...................................... 255
Showing/hiding the menu ................... 285 Switching mobile phones .................... 309 Menus ................................................. 246
Updating the map data ........................ 305 Neutral Multifunction display ........................... 247
Navigation Selecting ............................................. 164 Navigation menu ................................. 250
see Destination NFC Operating ............................................ 246
see Destination entry see Near Field Communication (NFC) Radio menu ......................................... 252
see Map Service menu ...................................... 248
534 Index

Telephone menu .................................. 253 Windscreen washer fluid ..................... 433 P

Trip menu ............................................ 249 Operating safety Paint (cleaning instructions) .................. 373
On-board computer Declaration of Conformity (electro‐
see Computer magnetic compatibility) ......................... 24 Paint code ................................................ 423
see Operating system Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 24 Panel heating
On-board diagnostics interface Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 25 Setting ................................................. 100
see Diagnostics connection Declaration of conformity (wireless Panic alarm ................................................ 65
vehicle components) ............................. 24 Activating/deactivating ......................... 65
On-board electronics Information ............................................ 23
Engine electronics ............................... 421 Panorama sliding sunroof
Notes ................................................... 421 Operating system .................................... 246 see Sliding sunroof
Two-way radios .................................... 421 Outside mirrors ............................... 137, 138 Park position
On-board electronics Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 138 Selecting ............................................. 164
see Electronics Automatic mirror folding function ........ 139 Selecting automatically ....................... 164
see Technical data Folding in/out ..................................... 137
Parking position ................................... 138 Parking ...................................................... 176
Opening the boot lid using your foot ....... 76 Setting ................................................. 137 Parking aid
Operating fluids Using the memory function ................. 104 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
AdBlue® ............................................... 429 Overhead control panel ............................ 14 see Remote Parking Pilot
Additives (fuel) .................................... 427 Making calls (Mercedes me connect) .. 317 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 208
Brake fluid ........................................... 431 Activating ............................................. 210
Coolant (engine) .................................. 432 Owner's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 23 Adjusting warning tones ....................... 211
Engine oil ............................................ 430 Function .............................................. 208
Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 428 Owner's Manual (digital) .......................... 20 Side impact protection ........................ 209
Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 426 Switching off ........................................ 210
Notes .................................................. 425
 Index 535

System limitations ............................... 208 Perfume Plastic trim (Care) .................................... 376
Parking assistance systems see Fragrance system Playback options
see Parking Pilot Perfume vial Selecting .............................................. 341
Parking brake see Fragrance system POI symbols
see Electric parking brake Period out of use Custom ................................................ 303
Parking lights ........................................... 123 Activating/deactivating standby Power supply
mode ................................................... 179 Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 153
Parking Pilot ............................................. 217
Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 227 Permissible axle load .............................. 423 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
Drive Away Assist ................................ 226 Permissible gross mass .......................... 423 protection)
Exiting a parking space ....................... 220 Permitted towing methods ..................... 392 Function ................................................ 44
Function ............................................... 217 PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 44
Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 228 Personalisation
see User profile Reversing measures .............................. 44
Parking ................................................ 219
System limits ....................................... 217 Petrol ........................................................ 426 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Parking Pilot Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 63 see Anticipatory occupant protection
see Remote Parking Pilot Phone book see Occupant safety
Parking position see Contacts see Preventative occupant protection system
Outside mirrors ................................... 138 Picture formats PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Passenger outside mirror — storing see Video mode Activation .............................................. 31
using the memory button .................... 139 Function ................................................ 45
Picture settings
Parking up ................................................ 178 see Video mode PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Pedestrian protection PIN protection for data export ............... 282 see Anticipatory occupant protection
see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) see Occupant safety
536 Index

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ R Storing stations ................................... 351

pant protection plus) Switching traffic announcements
Radar sensors .......................................... 179 on/off ................................................. 352
Function ................................................ 44
Reversing measures .............................. 44 Radiator shutters Tagging music tracks ........................... 352
see AIRPANEL (Care) To display radio text ............................ 352
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection plus) Radio Radio stations
see Anticipatory occupant protection Activating ............................................ 349 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 252
see Occupant safety Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 352 Rain-closing feature
Calling up a slide show ........................ 351 Sliding sunroof ...................................... 85
Preventative occupant protection sys‐ Calling up the station list ..................... 351
tem ............................................................. 44 Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 264 Raising
Programme information Deleting stations .................................. 351 Vehicle ................................................. 415
TV channel .......................................... 356 Direct frequency entry ......................... 351 Range
Programs Displaying information ......................... 352 Displaying ............................................ 249
see DYNAMIC SELECT Editing station presets ......................... 351 Reading lamp
Protection of the environment Frequency fix ....................................... 352 see Interior lighting
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 252
Notes ..................................................... 21 Rear door (child safety lock) ..................... 61
Moving stations ................................... 351
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ............. 21 Rear fog light ........................................... 124
Overview ............................................. 350
Searching for stations .......................... 351 Rear seat
Q
Setting a station .................................. 351 see Seat
Qibla ......................................................... 306 Setting station tracking ....................... 352 Rear seat belt
QR code Setting the frequency band .................. 351
Status display ........................................ 36
Rescue card ........................................... 27 Setting the traffic information
service volume increase ...................... 352 Rear seat belt status display .................... 36
Qualified specialist workshop ................. 26
 Index 537

Rear window System limitations ............................... 222 Reverse gear

Roller sunblind ....................................... 78 Replacing a bulb Selecting ............................................. 164
Rear window heater ................................ 141 see Changing bulbs Reversing camera .................................... 211
Rear-view mirror Rescue card ............................................... 27 Assigning as a favourite ....................... 217
see Outside mirrors Care ..................................................... 374
Reserve Function ............................................... 211
Recycling Fuel ..................................................... 429 Opening the camera cover ................... 217
see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 284 Switching automatic mode on/off ....... 216
Reducing agent Restoring (factory settings) Reversing light (changing bulbs) ........... 133
see AdBlue® see Reset function (multimedia system) RF transmitters
Refuelling Restraint system see Two-way radios
Refuelling the vehicle .......................... 166 Children ................................................. 45
Topping up AdBlue® ............................. 170 Rims (Care) ............................................... 374
Function in an accident ......................... 31
Registration Functionality .......................................... 31 Roll away protection
Vehicle ................................................... 27 Malfunction ........................................... 31 see HOLD function
Remote control (stationary heater) Protection .............................................. 30 Roller sunblind
Displays ............................................... 149 Reduced protection ............................... 30 Rear window .......................................... 78
Problems ............................................. 150 System self-test ..................................... 31 Side windows ........................................ 78
Replacing the battery .......................... 149 Warning lamp ......................................... 31 Roller sunblind
Setting ................................................. 148 Restraint system see Cover
Remote Parking Pilot .............................. 222 see Occupant safety Roof lining (care) ..................................... 376
Authorising a mobile phone ................. 226 Returning an end-of-life vehicle Roof load .................................................. 434
Function/notes ................................... 222 Protection of the environment ............... 21
Roof rack .................................................. 114
Operating ............................................ 223
538 Index

Route ................................................ 290, 293 Running-in notes ..................................... 156 Selecting a massage programme .......... 99
Calculating .......................................... 290 Setting options ...................................... 16
Displaying destination information ...... 292 S Using the memory function ................. 104
Selecting a type ................................... 291 Safety Seat
Selecting an alternative route ............. 293 see Child seat see Head restraint
Selecting notifications ......................... 292
Selecting options ................................ 292 Safety systems Seat belt
Switching the automatic filling sta‐ see Driving safety system Activating/deactivating seat belt
tion search on/off ............................... 293 Safety vest ............................................... 379 adjustment ............................................ 36
With intermediate destinations ........... 289 Adjusting the height .............................. 35
Satellite map ........................................... 306 Belt airbag ............................................. 35
Route guidance ....................................... 293 SD card Care ..................................................... 376
Cancelling ........................................... 296 Inserting/removing ............................. 338 Fastening ............................................... 35
Changing direction .............................. 293 Protection .............................................. 32
Continuing ........................................... 296 Seat ..................................................... 91, 107
4-way lumbar support ........................... 95 Rear seat belt status display ................. 36
Destination reached ............................ 295 Releasing ............................................... 36
From an off-road location .................... 297 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 94
Adjusting (manually and electrically) ..... 91 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 35
Lane recommendations ....................... 294
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 93 Seat belt
Notes .................................................. 293
Off-road ............................................... 297 Backrest (rear) folding forwards .......... 107 see Belt
To an off-road destination ................... 296 Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 109 see Occupant safety
Correct driver's seat position ................ 90 Seat belt adjustment
Route guidance Dynamic multicontour seat .................... 97
see Navigation announcements Activating/deactivating ......................... 36
Folding the backrest (rear) back .......... 108 Function ................................................ 35
Run-flat characteristics Massage programme overview .............. 98 Seat belt tensioners
MOExtended tyres ............................... 381 Panel heating ....................................... 100
Activation .............................................. 31
Resetting the settings ............................ 99
 Index 539

Seat belt warning Service Manual ................................................ 165

see Seat belts see ASSYST PLUS Short text messages
Seat belts ................................................... 36 Service call ............................................... 318 see Text messages
Reduced protection ............................... 33 Breakdown assistance call ................... 318 Side impact airbag .................................... 37
Warning lamp ........................................ 36 MB Info call .......................................... 318
Side impact protection ........................... 209
Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 376 Service centre
see Qualified specialist workshop Side windows
Seat heater Child safety lock in the rear ................... 63
Switching on/off ................................. 100 Service interval display Closing .................................................. 79
Seat settings see ASSYST PLUS Closing with the key ............................... 81
Configuring ............................................ 97 Setting a speed Convenience closing ............................. 80
Seat ventilation see Cruise control Convenience opening ............................ 80
Switching on/off ................................. 100 Setting summer time .............................. 277 Opening ................................................. 79
Opening with the key ............................. 80
Selecting a gear Setting the date format .......................... 277 Problem ................................................. 81
see Shifting gears Setting the distance unit ........................ 281 Roller sunblind ....................................... 78
Selecting a POI Setting the map scale Side windows
see Destination entry see Map see Window lifter
Selector lever ........................................... 162 Setting the sound profile see Windows
Selector lever Burmester® high-end 3D surround Ski/snowboard bag ................................ 109
see DIRECT SELECT lever sound system ...................................... 362 Skid chains ............................................... 401
Sensors (Care) ......................................... 374 Setting up a hotspot (Wi-Fi) .................... 279 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 83
Service Shifting gears .......................................... 165 Automatic features ................................ 85
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 248 Gearshift recommendation .......... 162, 165 Closing .................................................. 83
540 Index

Closing with the key ............................... 81 Sound Start/stop function

Opening ................................................. 83 see Burmester® surround sound system see ECO start/stop function
Opening with the key ............................. 80 see Tone settings Starting assistance ................................. 389
Problem ................................................. 86 Spare wheel .............................................. 419
Rain-closing feature ............................... 85 Starting assistance
Spectacles compartment ....................... 107 see Jump-start connection
Smartphone
see Android Auto Speech dialogue system Starting the engine
see Apple CarPlay™ see LINGUATRONIC see Vehicle
see Telephone Speed limit for winter tyres Starting-off aid
Snow chains ............................................. 401 Setting ................................................. 193 see Hill start assist
Snow chains Speed Limit Pilot ............................. 193, 231 Station
see Skid chains Display ................................................. 193 Deleting ............................................... 351
Setting ................................................. 231 Direct frequency entry ......................... 351
Socket (12 V) ............................................ 118 Frequency fix ....................................... 352
Boot ..................................................... 120 Speedometer
Digital .................................................. 249 Moving ................................................. 351
Front centre console ............................ 118 Searching ............................................ 351
Rear passenger compartment .............. 118 Standby mode Setting ................................................. 351
Socket (230 V) Activating/deactivating ....................... 179 Storing ................................................. 351
Rear ..................................................... 119 Function .............................................. 179
Station list
Software update Standing lights ........................................ 123 Calling up ............................................. 351
Information .......................................... 283 Start/Stop button Station presets
Performing .......................................... 283 Starting vehicle ................................... 154 Editing ................................................. 351
Sound Switching off the vehicle ...................... 172 Stationary heater/ventilation
PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 44 Switching on the power supply or
Displays (remote control) .................... 149
ignition ................................................ 153
 Index 541

Problems (remote control) ................... 150 Stowage compartment ........................... 106 Suspension
Setting (using the multimedia sys‐ Armrest ............................................... 106 see AIR BODY CONTROL
tem) ..................................................... 148 Centre console .................................... 106 Suspension level
Setting (via remote control) ................. 148 Door .................................................... 106 Setting ................................................. 207
Switching on/off (via control panel) .... 146 Glove box ............................................. 106
Rear armrest ........................................ 107 Switch-off delay time
Steering Pilot ........................................... 200 Interior ................................................. 131
Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 201 Spectacles compartment .................... 107
Active Lane Change Assist ................... 201 Stowage compartments Switching residual heat on/off .............. 144
Function .............................................. 200 see Laden Switching the surround sound on/off
Switching on/off ................................. 203 see Stowage compartment Burmester® surround sound system .... 361
System limits ....................................... 200 Stowage space under the boot floor ...... 113 Synchronisation function
Steering wheel ......................................... 245 Sulphur content ...................................... 426 Activating/deactivating (control
Adjusting (electrically) ......................... 102 panel) .................................................. 144
Adjusting (manually) ............................ 101 Sun visor Activating/deactivating (multimedia
Buttons ................................................ 245 Operating ............................................ 139 system) ................................................ 144
Steering wheel heater .......................... 102 Surround lighting System settings
Using the memory function ................. 104 Setting ................................................. 130 Language ............................................. 281
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 165 Surround View Notes on language selection ................ 281
Steering wheel heater see 360° Camera Reset function (multimedia system) .... 284
Switching on/off ................................. 102 Suspension Setting the distance unit ...................... 281
Damping characteristics ...................... 205 Software update .................................. 283
Stopping the alarm (ATA) .......................... 88
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 205 System settings
Stowage areas Setting the suspension level ................ 207 see Multimedia system
see Laden
see Stowage compartment
542 Index

T Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 263 Telephone

Connecting a mobile phone (Near see Mobile phone
Tailgate Field Communication (NFC)) ............... 309
see Boot lid Telephone module
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ Activating/deactivating ....................... 322
Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 374 key) ..................................................... 308 Activating/deactivating caller ID
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 21 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure transmission ........................................ 324
Simple Pairing) .................................... 308 Activating/deactivating data roam‐
Tank capacity Disconnecting the mobile phone ......... 309
AdBlue® ............................................... 430 ing ....................................................... 324
Incoming call during an existing call .... 312 Activating/deactivating network pro‐
Fuel ..................................................... 429 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 69
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 429 vider restriction ................................... 324
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 253 Activating/deactivating text mes‐
Technical data .......................................... 421 Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 311 sage transfer ....................................... 324
Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 436 Notes ................................................... 307 Adjusting the brightness ...................... 324
Information .......................................... 421 Reception and transmission volume .... 310 Charging a mobile phone .................... 326
Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 435 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 154 Connecting .......................................... 322
Tongue weight ..................................... 436 Switching mobile phones .................... 309 Deleting call lists ................................. 325
Towing weight (towing a trailer) ........... 435 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Disconnecting ..................................... 326
Tyre pressure monitoring system ........ 406 Communication (NFC)) ........................ 309 Establishing a connection to the
Vehicle identification plate .................. 423 Telephone menu overview ................... 307 mobile phone ...................................... 323
Telephone ................................................. 307 Telephone operation ............................ 311 Fitting/removing ................................. 322
Activating functions during a call ......... 311 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 69 Inserting/removing a SIM card ........... 323
Authorising a mobile phone (Remote Using Near Field Communication Notes on receiving text messages ....... 325
Parking Pilot) ....................................... 226 (NFC) ................................................... 309 Resetting to factory settings ............... 326
Call and ringtone volume ..................... 310 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 121 Setting the ringtone ............................ 325
Calls with several participants ............. 311 Settings ............................................... 324
 Index 543

Storing the SIM card PIN ..................... 324 Reading ................................................ 315 Tongue weight ......................................... 436
Switching mobile phones ..................... 324 Replying ............................................... 316 Tool
Transferring the phone book ............... 325 Sending ................................................ 315 see Vehicle tool kit
Telephone number Through-loading feature Top Tether .................................................. 49
Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 253 see Seat
Total distance recorder ........................... 249
Telephone operation Tie-down eyes .......................................... 110 Displaying ............................................ 249
see Calls Time Touch Control
Teletext Manual time setting ............................. 277 On-board computer ............................. 246
Displaying ............................................ 359 Setting summer time ........................... 277 Operating ............................................ 269
Overview ............................................. 358 Setting the time and date automati‐ Setting the sensitivity .......................... 269
Television cally ..................................................... 277
Setting the time zone .......................... 277 Touchpad
see TV Operating ............................................ 270
Setting the time/date format .............. 277
Temperature ............................................. 141 Reading the handwriting recognition
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 382 aloud ................................................... 271
Text messages ......................................... 314 Declaration of Conformity ..................... 25
Activating/deactivating transferring Selecting an input language ................. 271
Storage location .................................. 382 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 271
(telephone module) ............................. 324 Using ................................................... 383
Calling a sender ................................... 316 Switching on/off ................................. 270
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 265 TIREFIT kit Tow-away protection
Composing ........................................... 315 see Tyre pressure Function ................................................ 88
Configuring the text messages dis‐ Tone settings ........................................... 360 Switching on/off ................................... 89
played .................................................. 315 Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 360 Tow-starting ............................................. 397
Deleting ............................................... 316 Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 360
Notes ................................................... 314 Calling up the sound menu .................. 360 Towing a trailer
Read-aloud function ............................. 315 Information .......................................... 360 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 239
544 Index

Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 238 System limits ....................................... 229 Transporting
Towing away ............................................ 393 Trailer hitch Vehicle ................................................ 395
Towing eye Axle load ............................................. 436 Trim element (Care) ................................. 376
Fitting .................................................. 397 Bicycle rack ......................................... 241 Trip
Storage location .................................. 396 Care ..................................................... 374 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 249
Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 238
Towing methods ...................................... 392 General notes ...................................... 435 Trip computer
Track Notes ................................................... 237 Displaying ............................................ 249
Selecting (audio mode) ........................ 341 Power socket ....................................... 237 Resetting ............................................. 250
Traffic announcements Tongue weight ..................................... 436 Trip distance
Activating/deactivating ....................... 352 Trailer operation Displaying ............................................ 249
Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 232 Resetting ............................................. 250
Traffic announcements volume
increase Active Lane Keeping Assist ................. 234 Trip distance
Setting ................................................. 352 Bicycle rack ......................................... 241 see Distance recorder
Notes ................................................... 237 see Trip meter
Traffic information .................................. 298 Power socket ....................................... 237
Displaying the traffic map ................... 299 Trip meter ................................................. 249
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 300 Trailer stabilisation Turn signal indicator
Issuing hazard alerts ............................ 301 Function/notes ................................... 184 see Turn signal light
Overview ............................................. 298 Trailer tow hitch Turn signal light ....................................... 125
Traffic map Towing weight ..................................... 435 Changing bulbs (front) ......................... 132
see Map Transferred vehicle data Changing bulbs (rear) .......................... 133
Traffic Sign Assist ................................... 229 Android Auto™ .................................... 329 Switching on/off ................................. 125
Function/notes ................................... 229 Apple CarPlay™ ................................... 329 TV ............................................................. 264
Setting ................................................. 231 Transmission position display ................ 162 Activating ............................................ 353
 Index 545

Calling up the menu (CA module) ........ 360 Selecting in the background ................ 356 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 264 Storing ................................................. 357 (function) ............................................. 404
Displaying teletext ............................... 359 Using a voice tag ................................. 357 Tyre pressure table .............................. 403
Displays in the TV control menu .......... 355 Two-way radio telephone Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function/notes (audio language, see Mobile phone Function .............................................. 408
subtitles) ............................................. 358 Restarting ............................................ 409
Information .......................................... 352 Two-way radios ........................................ 421
Inserting the CA module ...................... 359 Frequencies ......................................... 422 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Overview ............................................. 354 Notes on installation ............................ 421 Checking the tyre pressures ................ 405
Picture settings ................................... 359 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 422 Function .............................................. 404
Picture settings overview .................... 359 Type approval number (EU) .................... 423 Restarting ............................................ 405
Setting subtitles .................................. 358 Technical data ..................................... 406
Types of commands (LINGUATRONIC) ... 258
Setting the audio language .................. 358 Tyre pressure table ................................. 403
Showing/hiding the TV menu .............. 355 Tyre inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit Tyre tread ................................................. 401
Teletext overview ................................. 358
Tyre pressure ........................................... 383 Tyre-change tool kit
TV channel Overview .............................................. 413
Activating/deactivating channel fix ..... 356 Checking (tyre pressure monitoring
system) ............................................... 405 Tyres
Channel fix .......................................... 356
Channel list overview .......................... 357 Notes .................................................. 402 Changing .............................................. 414
EPG (electronic programme guide) ...... 356 Restarting the tyre pressure loss Changing hub caps .............................. 414
Overview of favourites ......................... 357 warning system ................................... 409 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre
Quick save ........................................... 357 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ pressure monitoring system) ............... 405
Selecting from the channel list ............ 355 ing system ........................................... 405 Fitting .................................................. 417
Selecting from the control menu ......... 355 Tyre pressure loss warning system Flat tyre ............................................... 381
Selecting from the favourites .............. 355 (function) ............................................. 408 MOExtended tyres ............................... 381
Noise ................................................... 401
546 Index

Notes on fitting ................................... 409 USB devices QR code rescue card ............................. 27
Removing ............................................. 417 Connecting .......................................... 341 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 26
Replacing ............................................ 409 User profile .............................................. 282 Raising ................................................. 415
Restarting the tyre pressure loss Creating .............................................. 282 Registration ........................................... 27
warning system ................................... 409 Importing/exporting ........................... 283 Starting (emergency operation
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ Options ................................................ 283 mode) .................................................. 155
ing system ........................................... 405 Selecting ............................................. 282 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 154
Selection ............................................. 409 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 154
Snow chains ........................................ 401 V Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 172
Storing ................................................. 413 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 69
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 383 Vehicle .............................................. 154, 155 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 70
Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 402 Activating/deactivating standby Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 69
Tyre pressure loss warning system mode ................................................... 179 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 80
(function) ............................................. 408 Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 266
Correct use ........................................... 27 Vehicle
Tyre pressure monitoring system see Locking/unlocking
(function) ............................................. 404 Data acquisition .................................... 27
Tyre pressure table .............................. 403 Diagnostics connection ......................... 26 Vehicle battery ........................................ 387
Tyre(s) .................................................. 401 Equipment ............................................. 23 Vehicle data
Unusual handling characteristics ......... 401 Implied warranty .................................... 27 Boot load ............................................. 434
Locking (automatically) .......................... 71 Displaying ............................................ 161
U Locking (emergency key) ....................... 71 Roof load ............................................. 434
Locking (from inside) ............................. 69 Vehicle height ...................................... 433
Units of measurement Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70
Setting ................................................. 281 Vehicle length ...................................... 433
Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 69 Vehicle width ....................................... 433
Unlocking setting ...................................... 65 Lowering .............................................. 418 Wheelbase ........................................... 433
Parking up ........................................... 178
 Index 547

Vehicle dimensions ................................. 433 Vents Warning triangle

Vehicle identification number see Air vents Removing ............................................ 380
see VIN Video mode .............................................. 344 Setting up ............................................ 380
Vehicle identification plate Activating ............................................ 342 Warning/indicator lamp
EU type approval number .................... 423 Activating/deactivating full-screen !ABS warning lamp ....................... 497
Paint code ........................................... 423 mode ................................................... 344 JBrake system warning lamp
Permissible axle load ........................... 423 Overview ............................................. 343
Settings ............................................... 344 ...................................................... 495, 496
Permissible gross mass ....................... 423
VIN ...................................................... 423 VIN ............................................................ 423 ?Coolant warning lamp ................. 506
Vehicle identification plate Identification plate .............................. 423 ·Distance warning warning lamp .. 502
see Model type Seat ..................................................... 423 #Electrical fault warning lamp ....... 505
Windscreen ......................................... 423 ;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ... 505
Vehicle key ................................................. 64
Visibility
Vehicle key åESP® OFF warning lamp .............. 499
Demisting the windows ....................... 144
see Key Windscreen heater .............................. 146 ÷ESP® warning lamp flashes ......... 498
Vehicle maintenance Voice control system ÷ESP® warning lamp lights up ....... 498
see ASSYST PLUS see LINGUATRONIC 8Fuel reserve warning lamp .......... 505
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 382
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 382 ÐPower steering system warning
W
Towing eye .......................................... 396 lamp .................................................... 504
Warning lamp
Ventilating see Warning/indicator lamps !Red indicator lamp, electric
Convenience opening ............................ 80 Warning system parking brake applied .......................... 500
Ventilation see Anti-theft protection 6Restraint system warning lamp ... 501
see Climate control
548 Index

7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 502 Calling up options ............................... 334 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre
7Seat belt warning lamp lights Calling up settings ............................... 334 pressure monitoring system) ............... 405
Closing ................................................ 335 Fitting .................................................. 417
up ........................................................ 501 Deleting Internet favourites ................. 335 Flat tyre ............................................... 381
jTrailer hitch warning lamp ........... 503 Deleting Internet history ...................... 335 MOExtended tyres ............................... 381
hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐ Overview ............................................. 334 Noise ................................................... 401
Setting Internet favourites ................... 335 Notes on fitting ................................... 409
tem warning lamp flashes ................... 509
Website Removing ............................................. 417
hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐ Replacing ............................................ 409
Calling up ............................................ 334
tem warning lamp lights up ................. 508 Restarting the tyre pressure loss
Wheel change ........................................... 419 warning system ................................... 409
!Yellow electric parking brake Fitting a new wheel .............................. 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
indicator lamp is malfunctioning ......... 500 Lowering the vehicle ............................ 418 ing system ........................................... 405
Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 493 Preparation .......................................... 414 Rotating ............................................... 412
Instrument display (overview) ................ 10 Raising the vehicle ............................... 415 Selection ............................................. 409
Overview ............................................. 493 Removing a wheel ................................ 417 Snow chains ........................................ 401
PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 41 Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 414 Storing ................................................. 413
Warranty .................................................... 27 Wheel chock ............................................. 413 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 383
Wheel rotation ......................................... 412 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 402
Washer fluid Tyre pressure loss warning system
see Windscreen washer fluid Wheels (function) ............................................. 408
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 372 Care ..................................................... 374 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Changing .............................................. 414 (function) ............................................. 404
Weather information ............................... 306 Changing hub caps .............................. 414 Tyre pressure table .............................. 403
Web browser Checking ............................................. 401 Unusual handling characteristics ......... 401
Calling up a website ............................ 334
 Index 549

Wi-Fi Windscreen washer system

Overview ............................................. 278 Topping up ........................................... 370
Setting ................................................. 278 Windscreen wipers
Setting up a hotspot ............................ 279 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 135
Setting up an Internet connection ....... 330 Switching on/off ................................. 134
Window airbag ........................................... 37 Winter operation
Window lifter ............................................. 79 Snow chains ........................................ 401
Windows .................................................... 79 Winter tyres
Closing .................................................. 79 Setting the permanent speed limit ...... 193
Opening ................................................. 79 Wiper blades
Windows (Care) ........................................ 374 Care ..................................................... 374
Windscreen ...................................... 135, 141 Changing ............................................. 135
Demisting ............................................ 141 Wireless charging
Infrared reflective ................................ 140 Function/notes ................................... 120
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 135 Mobile phone ....................................... 121
Windscreen Wireless vehicle components
see Windscreen Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24
Windscreen heater .................................. 146 Workout programme
Windscreen heating Overview ............................................... 98
see Windscreen heater Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 433
Notes .................................................. 433